Home

mGuard User Manual 7.4 - Innominate Security Technologies AG

1. IP address Every host or router on the Internet Intranet has a unique IP address IP Internet Protocol An IP address is 32 bits 4 bytes long and is written as four numbers each from 0 to 255 which are separated by a dot An IP address consists of 2 parts the network address and the host address Network Address Host Address All network hosts have the same network address but different host addresses The two parts of the address differ in length depending on the size of the respective network networks are categorized as Class A B or C 15t byte 2d byte 3 byte 4th byte Class A Network Host Address Address Class B Network Address Host Address Class C Network Address Host Address The first byte of the IP address determines whether the IP address of a network device belongs to Class A B or C The following has be specified Value of 15t byte No ofthe bytes for No of bytes for the network address the host address Class A 1 126 1 Class B 128 191 2 Class C 192 223 3 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 9 3 mGuard 7 4 IPsec NAT Network Address Translation Port number PPPoE There is thus a maximum worldwide total of 126 Class A networks Each of these networks can have a maximum of 256 x 256 x 256 hosts 3 bytes of address space There can be 64 x 256 Class B networks and each of these networks can have up to 65 536 hosts 2 bytes address space 256 x 256 There can be 32 x 256 x 256 Class
2. Bandwidth Rate Limit unlimited kbts v Queues tae arate peri O Pronn comment OO ol Urgent 10 unlimited High v scoe Important 10 unlimited Medium v SE 3 Default 10 unlimited Medium v en Low Priority 10 unlimited Low v 6 10 3 6 10 3 1 Egress Queues VPN VPN via Internal VPN via External VPN via External 2 VPN via Dial in VPN via Internal Setting of Egress Queues Enabling Enable Egress QoS No vo Total Bandwidth Rate QoS Egress Queues VPN VPN via internat f VPN via External i VPN via External 2 f Vpn via Diaiin Bandwidth Rate Limit unlimited Queues PE e nme O Guaranteed O Uppert l Prior comment O sO Urgent 10 unlimited High X dmj Important 10 unlimited Medium v l 3 Default 10 unlimited Medium v FE Low Priority 10 unlimited Low v 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 219 mGuard 7 4 VPN via External Setting of Egress Queues QoS Egress Queues VPN ven viainternat vpn viaexternal vPnviaExternaiz VPNviaDiatin Enabling Enable Egress QoS No v Total Bandwidth Rate Bandwidth Rate Limit unlimited kows kbit s Queues x Bi Urgent 10 unlimited High v p i 2 Important 10 unlimited Medium v m 3 Default E _ 10 gt Ei unlimited E o Medium v 7 El 4 Low Priority 10 unlimited low v VPN via External 2 Setting of Egress Queues QoS
3. In the Stealth network mode a secondary external interface can also be configured see Secondary External Interface on page 6 71 For the further configuration of the Stealth network mode see Network Mode Stealth on page 6 68 6 64 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration WAN Port LAN Port Router factory default for mGuard centerport mGuard blade controller mGuard delta If the mGuard is in Router mode it serves as a gateway between different subnetworks and has both an external interface WAN port and an internal interface LAN port with at least one IP address The mGuard is connected to the Internet or other external parts of the LAN over the WAN port mGuard smart The WAN port is the Ethernet socket The mGuard is connected to a local network or a single computer over the LAN port mGuard smart The LAN port is the Ethernet connector mQGuard pci In Driver mode the LAN port is represented by the operating system s network interface card here mGuard pci configuration In Power over PCI mode the LAN port is the LAN socket of the mGuard pci As in the other modes firewall and VPN security functions are available If the mGuard is operated in Router mode it must be set as the default gateway in the connected local computers In other words the IP address of the mGuard LAN port must be entered as the default gateway on these computers NAT should be activated
4. Authentication gt gt Certificates gt gt Remote Certificates Trusted remote Certificates Shows the current imported remote certificates Importing a new certificate Requirement The file file name extension cer pem or crt is saved on the connected computer Proceed as follows e Click on Browse to select the file e Click on Import After the import the installed certificate can be seen under Certificate e Remember to save the imported certificate along with the other entries by clicking on Apply Shortname During the remote certificate import process the CN attribute from the certificate subject field is suggested as the short name providing the Shortname field is empty at this point This name can be adopted or another name can be chosen Name entry whether the suggested one or another is mandatory The names must be unique meaning they must not be used more than once 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 135 mGuard 7 4 Use of the short name During the configuration of SSH Management gt gt System Settings menu Shell access and HTTPS Management gt gt Web Settings menu Access the imported certificates in the mGuard are given as a selection list The certificates are displayed under the short name entered for each individual certificate on this page For this reason the entry of a name is necessary Creating a certificate copy You can make a copy of the imported r
5. Proceed as follows to change the password B Check which status the set password has before entering a new one Only if you see a green checkmark to the right of the input field there is a valid A password and you are allowed to enter a new password Set the new password on both mGuards The order does not matter but the password has to be the same for both If you accidentally enter a different password follow the instructions under Procedure for an incorrect password on page 6 228 When a redundant pair receives a new password it decides itself when it can switch to the new password without an interruption The status is displayed using symbols We recommend monitoring this status for security reasons A red X indicates that the mGuard has a new password that it wants to use But the old password is still being used A yellow checkmark indicates that the new password is being used but that the old one will still be accepted in case the other mGuard is still using it If there is no symbol no password is used For example because the redundancy is not activated or the firmware is booting 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 227 mGuard 7 4 Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy continued If an mGuard fails while the password is being changed the following cases are possible The password update was started on all mGuards and then interrupted e g due to a network error This situ
6. should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default Log entries for When set to Yes all attempts to establish a connection that are not unknown connec covered by the rules defined above are logged factory default No tion attempts 6 142 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 6 1 3 Sets of Rules Network Security Packet Filter Incoming Rules Outgoing Rules Rule Records f MAC Filtering Advanced Rule Records ST a m Yes v Generic Rule records are defined and stored for structuring incoming and outgoing rules A set of rules can then be referred to in an incoming or outgoing rule so that the rules contained within the set of rules are applied there It is also possible to refer to another defined rule record during rule record definition i e inserting this as a module in the current rule record Making a new rule record definition e Click on the Edit button on the right side of the rule record table under the unnamed entry e Ifthe unnamed entry cannot be seen then open a further line in the rule record table Editing a rule record e Click on the Edit button to the right of the entry e Ifa firewall rule record is comprised of multiple firewall rules they are searched in the order in which they are listed top down until a suitable rule is found This rule is then applied If there are other suitable rules further
7. Installing the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 on page 4 4 3 Configure the device as required Easy Initial Setup EIS Local configuration at startup on page 5 3 Proceed through the various options provided in the mGuard configuration menus Please consult the relevant sections of this manual for more information regarding the required options and settings for your operating environment 4 2 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup 4 2 Checking the scope of delivery Before starting up the device check that the package is complete Included in the package The mGuard device mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade mGuard delta mGuard pci mGuard smart EAGLE mGuard mGuard rs4000 or mGuard rs2000 Package leaflet The mGuard rs4000 and mGuard rs2000 also include COMBICON connectors for the power supply and inputs outputs attached The mGuard centerport also contains 2x keys for the front cover lock 2xAC mains adapters Rubber feet self adhesive The mGuard industrial rs also contains Terminal block for the power supply attached Terminal block for the signal contact pushbutton and optional ISDN or telephone connection 2 covers for RJ45 sockets The mGuard bladepack also contains 19 mGuard bladebase 1xmGuard blade as controller 2x power supply units 2x power cables 12x place holders 12x handle plate
8. WARNING The serial port RJ12 socket must not be connected directly to communica tion connection points Use a serial cable with an RJ12 connector to connect a serial terminal or a modem The serial cable can have a maximum length of 30 meters The serial port serial interface can be used as follows For configuration of the mGuard over the serial port There are two possibilities here A PC is connected directly over its serial port to the serial port of the mGuard The PC user can then use a terminal program to configure the mGuard via the command line interface Alternatively a modem is connected to the serial port of the mGuard This modem is connected to the telephone network landline or GSM network The user of a remote PC also connected to the telephone network using a modem can establish a PPP dial connection PPP Point to Point Protocol to the mGuard and can then configure it using their web browser 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 19 mGuard 7 4 For handling data transfers over the serial port instead of the mGuard WAN interface In this case a modem is connected to the serial port Not assigned Pin 6 CTS Pin 5 TXD Pin 4 RTS Pin 3 RXD Pin 2 GND Pin 1 Fig 4 11 Pin assignment of the RJ12 socket serial port On the mGuard industrial rs with built in modem or ISDN terminal adapter traffic can pass over the analog line or ISDN line connections instead of the WAN interface 4 20 INNO
9. Check the file system s of firmware B Not supported by the current firmware version Start rescue procedure via DHCP BootP TFTP See Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware on page 8 1 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 11 mGuard 7 4 Start rescue procedure from CD DVD See Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware on page 8 1 Start rescue procedure from USB mass storage See Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware on page 8 1 4 12 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup Assembly gt DD 4 5 Installing the mGuard industrial rs WARNING Do not open the housing WARNING The shielding ground of the connectable twisted pair lines is electrically connected to the front faceplate WARNING This is a Class A device which may cause radio interference in residential areas In this case the operator may be requested to take appropriate preventative measures When installed in residential or office environments the Innominate mGuard industrial rs may only be operated in switch cabinets with fire protection properties in accordance with EN 60950 1 4 5 1 Assembly disassembly The device is delivered in a ready to operate condition The following procedure is required for assembly and connection Pull the terminal block from under the mGuard industrial rs and connect the contact lines and other connections as
10. Fig 8 2 mGuard centerport boot menu 3 Select one of the options for carrying out the rescue procedure using the 4 or arrow keys Start rescue procedure via DHCP BootP TFTP OR Start rescue procedure from CD DVD OR Start rescue procedure from USB mass storage Press Enter to apply your selection Contained in the options Start rescue procedure via DHCP BootP TFTP Result The mGuard loads all necessary files from the TFTP server The names of the downloaded files correspond to those also used by the other mGuard models with the following exceptions _ install p7s gt install x86_64 p7s jffs2 img p7s gt firmware img x86_64 p7s When using the install x86_64 p7s file ensure that it corresponds to the file version approved by Innominate for using the rescue procedure via TFTP Start rescue procedure from CD DVDs Requirement The mGuard firmware has been burned onto a CD see below under Burning mGuard firmware onto a CD on page 8 8 Result The mGuard loads all necessary files from the inserted CD To do this insert the CD containing the mGuard firmware into the CD drive whilst the boot menu is displayed before making your selection For security reasons the mGuard centerport does not boot from the CD 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 8 7 mGuard 7 4 Start rescue procedure from USB mass storage Requirement The mGuard firmware has been copied onto a USB storage medium USB stick The USB s
11. Presence notifications CARP are not received from any other mGuards Another mGuard is available which will be active or re main active Another mGuard is available which is active but will re main on_standby Indicates whether the check was successful Each interface is checked separately When synchronizing the state diverse databases are checked as to whether this is up to date With one redundant pair only one database is active while the other is on standby A change to this state is also displayed The Connection Tracking Table relates to the firewall state database IPsec VPN connections with activated VPN redundan cy All virtual interfaces are checked together to see whether the forwarding of packets is allowed 6 236 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Redundancy gt gt FW Redundancy Status gt gt Redundancy Status continued State History Firmware status System time Timeout of the previous state Availability check Connectivity check State synchroni sation The table starts with the most recent state The abbreviations are as follows Firmware started up completely Firmware not yet started up completely Valid system time Invalid system time Timeout No timeout Unknown state Another mGuard is available This mGuard is active or is currently being enabled Another mGuard is available This mGuard is on standby or is curr
12. The HTTPS server should only grant access to this individual mGuard using the login and password Otherwise users of other mGuards may be able to access this mGuard s configuration Server must be the same as the server certifi cate s Common Name CN Self signed certificates should not use the key usage extension To install a certificate please proceed as follows Requirement The certificate file is saved on the connected computer a Ensure that the profile on the server does not Click on Browse to select the file Click on Import By clicking on Test Download you can test whether the parameters are correct without actually saving the modi fied parameters or activating the configuration profile The result of the test is displayed in the right column contain unwanted variables beginning with GAI_PULL_ as these overwrite the set configuration 6 56 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 2 8 Management gt gt Restart 6 2 8 1 Restart Management Restart est Restart inate Note please give the device approximately 40 seconds to reboot Restarts the mGuard Has the same effect as a power outage The mGuard is turned off and on again A restart reboot is necessary if an error occurs It may also be necessary after a software update 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 57 mGuard 7 4 Blade Control gt gt Overview Overview
13. When RADIUS authentication is active the logon attempt is forwarded from a non predefined user not root admin netadmin audit or user to all RADIUS servers listed here The first answer received by the mGuard from one of the RADIUS servers defines whether the authentication attempt is successful or not Authentication gt gt RADIUS Servers RADIUS Servers This menu item is not included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 RADIUS timeout Specifies in seconds how long the mGuard waits for an an swer from the RADIUS server Default 3 seconds RADIUS retries Specifies how often requests to the RADIUS server are re tried after a RADIUS timeout has occurred Default 3 6 122 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Authentication gt gt RADIUS Servers continued Server Name of the RADIUS server or its IP address We recommend entering IP addresses as servers instead of names Otherwise the mGuard must first resolve the names before it can send authentication queries to the RADIUS server This takes time when logging on Additionally au thentication cannot be made in some circum stances when name resolution fails e g because the DNS is not available or the name was deleted in DNS Via VPN If Yes is selected the authentication query on the mGuard is always sent via an encrypted VPN tunnel if one is available If No is selected a query of this type is always sent unen cryp
14. 6 3 Blade Control menu This menu is only available on the mGuard blade controller 6 3 1 Blade Control gt gt Overview Blade Control Overview Overview RackID 0 Power supply P1 ites TE To ce ce 01 blade XL 27500095 7 4 1 default 02 blade XL 27500117 7 4 1 default 03 blade 27500087 7 4 1 default 04 blade 27500029 7 4 1 default 05 blade 27500065 7 4 1 default 06 Unknown 07 blade 27500086 7 4 1 default 08 blade 27500073 7 4 1 default 09 blade 27500041 7 4 1 default 10 blade 27500068 7 4 1 default 11 blade 27500071 7 4 1 default 12 blade 27500070 7 4 1 default B Automatic configuration backup is enabled disabled R Automatic reconfiguriation of a replaced blade is enabled disabled Rack ID The ID of the rack where the mGuard is mounted This value can be configured for all blades on the controller Power supply P1 P2 State of power supply units P1 and P2 OK Absent Defect Fatal error Blade Number of the slot where the mGuard blade is installed Device Device name e g blade or blade XL Status Online The device in the slot is working correctly Present Device is present but e g in start up phase not yet ready Absent No device found in the slot WAN Status of the WAN port LAN Status of the LAN port Serial number The serial number of the mGuard Version The software version of the mGuard B Backup Automatic configuration
15. Access SEC Stick Access Enable SEC Stick service No v Enable SEC Stick remote access No v Remote SEC Stick TCP Port 22002 Delay between requests for a sign of life The value 0 indicates that 120 seconds these messages will not be sent Maximum number of missing i 3 signs of life Allow SEC Stick forwarding into VPN tunnel Y Concurrent Session Limits Maximum number of cumulative concurrent sessions for all 10 users Maximum number of concurrent sessions for one 2 user Allowed Networks Log ID tw secetiox a00e6s V 00000000 0000 0000 0000 000000000000 Sk SP m 0 0 0 0 0 External v Accept v No v These rules allow to enable SEC Stick remote access Note In Stealth mode incoming traffic on the given port is no longer forwarded to the client Note In router mode with NAT or portforwarding the port set here has priority over portforwarding Note The SEC Stick access from the internal side and via dial in is enabled by default and can be restricted by firewall rules SEC Stick gt gt Global gt gt Access SEC Stick Access hic mem iem enai A license is required for the SEC Stick access function It can only be used if the corresponding license has been purchased and installed included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 Enable SEC Stick By selecting Yes you specify that the SEC Stick being used service at a remote location or its owner can login In this
16. Connection expiration period after non usage TCP 5 days this value is configurable see 6 149 120 additional seconds are added after connection closure This also applies to connections closed by the user UDP 30 seconds after data traffic in one direction 180 seconds after data traffic in both directions ICMP 30 seconds Others 10 minutes 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 155 mGuard 7 4 Network Security gt gt User Firewall gt gt User Firewall Templates gt gt Edit gt Template users Firewall rules Network Security User Firewall BluePrint General Template users Firewall rules Users gt ser Service_1 Enter the user names here The names must correspond to those that have been defined in the Authentication gt gt Firewall Users menu see page 6 120 Network Security User Firewall BluePrint General Template users Firewall rules Firewall rules Source IP authorized_ip Log 10 wt AN 2403322 3649 1450 0355 00000206000 PES Protec romeo O ee OO eron comment toa p 1 TCP w any 0 0 0 0 0 any important Yes v Source IP IP address from which connections are permitted to be set up If this is to be the IP address from which the user connected to the mGuard the placeholder authorized_ip should be used If multiple firewall rules are defined and activated for a user they will be searched in the order in which they are listed top down until a suitable r
17. IP address Netmask 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 You can also specify other addresses where the mGuard can be accessed by devices on the locally connected network For example this can be useful if the locally connected network is divided into subnetworks Multiple devices on different subnetworks can then access the mGuard under different addresses IP address where the mGuard is accessible over the LAN port The netmask of the network connected to the LAN port If this IP address should be located within a VLAN this option must be set to Yes 6 78 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Router network mode continued Secondary External Interface VLAN ID AVLAN ID between 1 and 4095 An explanation of the term VLAN can be found in the glossary on 9 7 Ifyou want to delete entries from the list please note that the first entry cannot be deleted Additional Internal Additional routes can be defined if further subnetworks are Routes connected to the local network Network Enter the network using CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 Gateway The gateway where this network can be accessed See also Example of a network on page 6 250 See Secondary External Interface on page 6 71 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 79 mGuard 7 4 Network Mode Router Router Mode static Network
18. Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Router network mode static router mode IP of default gateway The IP address of a device in the local network connected to the LAN port or the external network connected to the WAN port can be specified here If the mGuard establishes the transition to the Internet this IP address is designated by the Internet Service Provider ISP If the mGuard is utilized within the LAN the IP address of the default gateway is designated by the network administrator a If the local network is not known to the external router e g in case of configuration by DHCP enter the address of your local network underNetwork gt gt NAT see page 6 103 Internal Networks See Internal Networks on page 6 78 Secondary External See Secondary External Interface on page 6 71 Interface Network Mode Router Router Mode DHCP Network Interfaces General Ethernet Dial out Dial in Modem Console Network Status External IP address 172 16 66 49 Active Defaultroute 172 16 66 18 Used DNS servers 10 1 0 253 Network Mode Network Mode Router v RouterMode DHCP w There are no additional setting options for Network Mode Router and Router Mode DHCP Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Router network mode DHCP router mode Internal Networks See Internal Networks on page 6 78 Secondary External See Secondary External Interface on page
19. Step 1 Downloading and running the program Go to www innominate com downloads The Innominate BootP IP assignment tool is found under Software amp Misc Double click on IPAssign_mGuard exe Select Run in the window which opens The IPAssign exe tool is also available from Phoenix Contact Go to www phoenixcontact net catalog Enter the item number e g 2832700 in the search bar The BootP tool is found under Configuration file e Double click on IPAssign exe Select Run in the window which opens Step 2 IP Assignment Wizard The program is opened and the start screen of the IP assignment tool appears The program mostly uses English as standard The program buttons are changed according to the local country settings The IP address of the PC is shown on the start screen This helps when assigning the mGuard IP address on subsequent screens e Click on Next 5 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Preparing the Configuration Step 3 IP Address Request Listener All devices used to send a BootP request are listed in the window which opens These devices then wait for a new IP address Phoenix Contact IP Assignment Tool IP Address Request Listener Please select a MAC Address The list box below displays all MAC Addresses that we have received BOOTP requests from MAC Address Count Last Request Time 00 a0 45 04
20. The user s browser must use an X 509 certificate and the corresponding private key to authenticate itself Further details must be specified here a Before selecting the Login restricted to X 509 client certificate option you must first select and test the Login with X 509 client certificate or password option Only switch to Login restricted to X 509 client certificate when you are sure that this setting works Otherwise you could be locked out of the system Always take this precautionary measure when settings are changed under User authentication 6 26 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration X 509 authentication for HTTPS If the following User authentication methods are defined then you must subsequently define how mGuard authenticates the remote user according to X 509 Login restricted to X 509 client certificate Login with X 509 client certificate or password The table below shows which certificates must be provided for the mGuard to authenticate the user access over HTTPS when the user or their browser provides one of the following certificate types on connection A certificate signed by a CA A self signed certificate For further information on the following table see Authentication gt gt Certificates on page 6 124 The remote peer shows Certificate specific to Certificate specific to the following individual signed by CA individual self signed Th
21. This menu item is not included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 The following settings are only visible when Use the firewall ruleset below is set Protocol TCP UDP ICMP GRE All From To IP 0 0 0 0 0 means all IP addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 From Port Only evaluated for TCP and UDP protocols To Port any describes any selected port startport endport e g 110 120 defines a range of ports You can specify individual ports by giving either their port number or the corresponding service name e g 110 for pop3 or pops for 110 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 141 mGuard 7 4 Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Outgoing Rules continued Action Accept means that data packets may pass through Reject means that the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been rejected In Stealth mode Reject has the same effect as Drop Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Name of rule records if defined When a rule record name is entered the firewall rules saved under this name come into effect see the Sets of Rules tab page Comment Freely selectable comment for this rule Log For each individual firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule
22. mGuard 7 4 6 3 2 2 Configuration Blade Control Blade 01 Blade in slot 01 Upload configuration from client Blade Control gt gt Blade xx gt gt Configuration Configuration Configuration backup Blade __ gt Controller The status of the stored con figuration is displayed for each blade No configuration file Obsolete Current File will be copied Blade has been replaced No blade available Reconfiguration if Blade __ is replaced Delete configuration backup of Blade __ Upload configuration from client Download configura tion to client Configuration Configuration No configuration file a ee in e a ED Blade 01 gt Controller Reconfiguration if Blade 01 is Manual F replaced Delete configuration backup of Delete Blade 01 Durchsuchen is aaa client Automatic The new configuration is stored automatically on the controller shortly after a configuration change on the mGuard Manual The configuration can be stored on the controller using the Backup button With the Restore button the configuration stored on the controller can be transferred to the mGuard If the blade was reconfigured after a manual configuration storage but the new configuration was not stored the configuration stored on the controller is out of date This is indicated on the Configuration tab page by Configuration obsolete This indicates that
23. mGuard delta The status LED flashes The install p7s file is loaded from the TFTP server This contains the electronically authenticated control procedure for the installation process Only files signed by Innominate are executed The control procedure now deletes the current flash memory contents and prepares for a new firmware installation The device reaction depends on the model mGuard rs4000 rs2000 The STAT MOD and SIG LEDs form a light sequence mGuard industrial rs The Modem State and LAN LEDs form a light sequence mGuard smart The three green LEDs form a light sequence mGuard blade mGuard pci The green LEDs and the red LAN LED form a light sequence EAGLE mGuard The 1 2 and V 24 LEDs form a light sequence mGuard delta The status LED flashes at a faster rate INNOMINATE 8 5 mGuard 7 4 Action a The jffs2 img p7s firmware file is downloaded from the TFTP server and written onto the flash memory This file contains the actual mGuard operating system and is signed electronically Only files signed by Innominate are accepted This process takes around 3 to 5 minutes The device reaction depends on the model mGuard rs4000 rs2000 The STAT LED lights up continuously mGuard industrial rs The State LED lights up continuously mGuard smart
24. 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 4 2 Network gt gt NAT 6 4 2 1 Masquerading Network NAT Masquerading IP and Port Forwarding Network Address Translation IP Masquerading External X 0 0 0 0 0 These rules let you specify which IP addresses normally addresses within the private address space are to be rewritten to the mGuard s IP address Please note These rules won t apply to the Stealth mode 1 1 NAT gt X Se i Enable ARP x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 Yes v Please note These rules only apply to the network mode Router and if the router mode is set to static or DHCP Network gt gt NAT gt gt Masquerading Network Address Lists the rules set for NAT Network Address Translation Translation IP F M radin For outgoing data packets the device can rewrite the sender IP addresses they i aap contain from its internal network to its own external address This technique is called NAT Network Address Translation see also NAT Network Address Translation in the glossary This method for example is used whenever the internal address cannot or should not be routed externally e g when a private address such as 192 168 x x or the internal network structure should remain hidden This method can also be used to hide external network structures on the internal devices This can be set under Outgoing on Interface using the Internal setting The Internal setting allows communication between two separ
25. After the import the installed certificate can be seen under Certificate Remember to save the imported certificate along with the other entries by clicking on Apply Shortname During the machine certificate import process the CN attribute from the certificate subject field is suggested as the short name providing the Shortname field is empty at this point This name can be adopted or another name can be chosen e Name entry whether the suggested one or another is mandatory The names must be unique meaning they must not be used more than once Use of the short name During the configuration of SSH Management gt gt System Settings menu Shell access HTTPS Management gt gt Web Settings menu Access and VPN connections IPsec VPN gt gt Connections menu the imported certificates in the mGuard are given as a selection list The certificates are displayed under the short name entered for each individual certificate on this page For this reason the entry of a name is necessary Creating a certificate copy You can create a copy of the imported machine certificate e g for the remote peer so that this can authenticate the mGuard This copy does not contain the private key and can be made public at any time To do this proceed as follows e Click on the Current Certificate File button on the machine certificate next to the Download Certificate row title e Make the desired entries in the
26. Based on the information from the connectivity and availability checks the state monitoring is then aware of the mGuard state State monitoring ensures that the active mGuard mirrors its data onto the other mGuard state synchronization 7 1 3 Accepting the firewall redundancy settings from previous versions Existing configuration profiles on firmware version 6 1 x and earlier can be imported with certain restrictions Please contact Innominate for more information 7 1 4 Requirements for firewall redundancy The firewall redundancy function can only be activated when a suitable license key is installed See under Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy gt gt Enable redundancy Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy gt gt Interface used for synchronizing the state The Dedicated Interface value is only accepted on mGuards which have more than two physical separate Ethernet interfaces At the moment this applies to the mGuard centerport Each set of targets for the connectivity check can contain more than ten targets a fail over time cannot be guaranteed without an upper limit Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy gt gt External interface gt gt Primary targets for ICMP echo requests gt gt External interface gt gt Secondary targets for ICMP echo requests gt gt Internal interface gt gt Primary targets for ICMP echo requests
27. CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 6 216 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration QoS menu gt gt Ingress Filter gt gt Internal External continued To IP Current TOS DSCP Guaranteed Upper Limit Comment Defines that only data packets that should be forwarded to the given IP address may pass through Entries correspond to From IP as detailed above 0 0 0 0 0 stands for all addresses This means that no filtering is performed on the basis of the IP address of the sender Each data packet contains a TOS or DSCP field TOS stands for Type Of Service DSCP for Differentiated Services Code Point The traffic type to which the data packet belongs is specified here For example an IP telephone will write some thing different in this field for outgoing data packets compared to an FTP program When a value is selected here then only data packets with this value in the TOS or DSCP field may pass through When All is selected no filtering is performed on the basis of the TOS DSCP value The entered number defines how many data packets or kbit s can pass through at all times according to the Measurement Unit set see above This applies to the data flow that conforms to the rule record criteria listed on the left i e that may pass through The mGuard may drop the excess number of data packets during capacity bottlenecks if this data flow delivers more data packets per second The e
28. Lifetimes and Limits ISAKMP SA Lifetime IPsec SA Lifetime IPsec SA Traffic Limit Re key Margin for Lifetimes Applies to ISAKMP SAs and IPsecSAs Re key Margin for the Traffic Limit Applies to IPsecSAs only Fuzz Applies to all re key margins Keying tries 0 means unlimited tries Rekey Dead Peer Detection Delay between requests fora sign of life Timeout for absent sign of life after which peer is assumed desd Generat Authentication Firewall IKE Options E 3600 seconds 28800 seconds 0 bytes 0 bytes 100 120 seconds a 3DES 3DES 2 E v gt s F v All algorithms w mW 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 203 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt IKE Options ISAKMP SA Key Exchange Algorithms Decide on which encryption technique should be used with the remote peer administrator Encryption 3DES 168 is the most commonly used algorithm and is therefore the default setting The following generally applies The greater the number of bits used by an encryption algorithm specified by the ap pended number the more secure it is The relatively new AES 256 protocol is therefore considered the most secure but is not yet widely used The longer the key the longer the time required by the en cryption process However this is of no consequence for th
29. The mGuard administrator website is then accessed If the mGuard administrator website is not accessed If the address of the mGuard in Router PPPoE or PPTP mode has been changed and the current address is unknown you must use the recovery procedure to reset the mGuard IP address factory defaults as entered above see Performing a recovery procedure on page 8 2 If the web browser repeatedly reports that the page cannot be displayed try the following 5 12 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Preparing the Configuration Explanation Check whether the default gateway has been initialized on the connected configura tion system see Easy Initial Setup EIS Local configuration at startup on page 5 3 e Disable any active firewalls e Ensure that the browser does not use a proxy server In MS Internet Explorer version 8 make this setting as follows In the Extras menu select Internet Options and click on the Connections tab page Click on Properties under LAN settings Check that Use a proxy server for your LAN under proxy server is not activated in the Local Area Network LAN Settings dialog e If any other LAN connection is active on the system deactivate it until configuration has been completed Under the Windows menu Start Settings Control Panel Network Connections or Network and Dial up Connections right click on the corresponding icon and se
30. The middle LED heartbeat lights up continuously mGuard blade mGuard pci The green LEDs flash and the red LAN LED lights up continuously EAGLE mGuard The 1 2 and V 24 LEDs are out the p1 p2 and Status LEDs light up green continuously mGuard delta The status LED lights up continuously The new firmware is unpacked and configured This takes between 1 and 3 minutes As soon as the procedure has been completed the following occurs mGuard rs4000 rs2000 The STAT MOD and SIG LEDs flash green simultaneously mGuard industrial rs The Modem State and LAN LEDs flash green simultaneously mGuard smart All three LEDs flash green simultaneously mGuard blade The green WAN LED green LAN LED and red WAN LED flash simultaneously mGuard pci The mGuard reboots EAGLE mGuard The 1 2 and V 24 LEDs flash green simultaneously mGuard delta The status LED flashes once per second Restart the mGuard This is not necessary for the mGuard blade and mGuard pci e Todo this press the Rescue button briefly Alternatively you can disconnect and reconnect the power supply On the mGuard smart you can remove and insert the USB cable as it is only used for the power supply The mGuard is restored to its factory settings You can now configur
31. The time in seconds after which DPD Keep Alive queries are sent These queries test whether the remote peer is still available Factory default 30 seconds The time in seconds after which the remote peer is declared dead if Keep Alive queries are not answered Factory default 120 seconds If the mGuard finds that a connection is dead it acts according to the setting under Connection startup see definition of this VPN connection under General Connection startup 6 206 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 8 4 IPsec VPN gt gt L2TP over IPsec These settings do not apply in Stealth mode Allows VPN connections using the IPsec L2TP mGuard protocol In doing so the L2TP protocol is driven using an IPsec transport connection in order to es tablish a tunnel connection with a Point to Point Protocol PPP Clients are automatically assigned IP addresses through PPP In order to use IPsec L2TP the L2TP server must be activated and one or more IPsec connections with the following characteristics must be defined Type Transport Protocol UDP Local port all Remote port all PFS No See also Further settings can be made by clicking More on page 6 189 plus IKE Options on page 6 203 6 8 4 1 L2TP Server L2TP Server Settings Start L2TP Server for a cw IPsec L2TP Local IP for L2TP connections 10 106 106 1 Remote IP range stat 10 10
32. User name and password that the mGuard queries from the server mGuard only allows the connection when the server provides the agreed user name and password combination 6 88 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial out continued Subsequent fields See under If None is selected as authentication on page 6 89 If authentication is made via CHAP Authentication Local name Remote name Secret for client authentication CHAP server authentication Dial on demand Idle timeout idle time seconds Local IP Remote IP Netmask Local name Remote name Secret for client authentication CHAP server authentication CHAP v No v Yes v Yes v 300 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Aname used by the mGuard at the ISP The service provider may have several customers This name allows the ISP to identify who is dialing After the mGuard has logged in to the ISP with this name the service provider also checks the password for client authentication see below The connection can only be made successfully when the name is known to the ISP and the password matches A name given by the ISP to the mGuard for identification purposes The mGuard will not connect to the service provider if the ISP does not give the correct name Password entered during ISP login to access the Internet Yes No The following two fields appear when Yes is selected Password f
33. When set to Yes the client is allowed to retrieve an IP address using DHCP independently from the firewall rules for outgoing data The default setting here is Yes This entry defines the upper limit This is set to a level that can never be reached during normal operation However it is reached easily when attacks occur thus giving additional pro tection If special requirements are present in your operating surroundings then you can increase this value Connections established from the mGuard are also counted Do not set this value too low as this will otherwise cause malfunctions Yes No default No SYN is a special data packet in TCP IP connections that marks the beginning of a connection attempt No default The mGuard also allows connections where the beginning is not specified This means that the mGuard can carry out a reboot during an established connection without the connection being stopped Yes The mGuard must register the SYN packet of an existing connection Otherwise the connection is stopped This means that the connection is broken if the mGuard carries out a reboot during the establishment of a connection Attacks and hijacks on existing connections are thus prevented Ifa TCP connection is not used after this time period then the connection data is deleted A connection assigned by NAT not 1 1 NAT must then be newly established If Yes is selected under Allow TCP connections upon SYN
34. applies for access over the External External 2 VPN and Dial in interface Port number 22 still applies for internal access The remote peer that makes remote access may have to enter the port number defined here during the login procedure Example If this mGuard is accessible over the Internet under the ad dress 123 124 125 21 and the default port number 22 has been set for remote access you may not need to enter this port number in the address field on the SSH client e g PUTTY or OpenSSH of the remote peer If a different port number has been set e g 2222 this must be specified e g ssh p 2222 123 124 125 21 6 12 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access continued Limiting simultaneous sessions Delay between Default 120 seconds requests for a sign Values between 0 and 3600 seconds can be set Positive of life values mean that the mGuard sends a request to the peer within the encrypted SSH connection to see whether it is still accessible The request is sent when no activity from the remote peer is detected for the specified period for example as a result of network traffic within the encrypted connection The value entered here relates to the functionality of the encrypted SSH connection As long as this is in place the SSH connection is not terminated by the mGuard as a result of this setting even when the user does not perform any act
35. dATH OK Options for using the serial port Alternatively the serial port can be used as follows As a primary external interface if the network mode is set to Modem under Network gt gt Interfaces on the General tab page see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 and General on page 6 62 In this case the data traffic is not made over the WAN port Ethernet port but over the serial port As a secondary external interface if the Secondary External Interface is activated and Modem is selected under Network gt gt Interfaces on the General tab page see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 and General on page 6 62 In this case permanent or temporary data traffic is made over the serial port Used for dialing in to the LAN or for configuration purposes see also Dial in on page 6 93 The following options are available A modem is connected to the serial port of the mGuard This modem is connected to the telephone network landline or GSM network Connection to the telephone network is made over the terminal block on the bottom of the device for the mGuard industrial rs with built in modem or ISDN terminal adapter This enables a remote PC that is also connected to the telephone network to establish a PPP Point to Point Protocol dial up connection to the mGuard via a modem or ISDN adapter This procedure is defined as a PPP dial in option It can be used to access the LAN behi
36. 00 OC BE 04 1B DB 192 168 42 22 WAN port rs4000 master LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol IEEE 802 1AB D13 uses suitable request methods to automatically determine the Ethernet network infrastructure LLDP capable devices periodically send Ethernet multicasts layer 2 Tables of systems connected to the network are created from the responses and these can be requested using SNMP Management gt gt SNMP gt gt LLDP LLDP Internal LAN interface External WAN interface Mode Enabled Disabled The LLDP service or agent can be globally enabled or dis abled here If the function is enabled this is indicated by a green signal field on the tab atthe top of the page If the signal field is red the function is disabled Chassis ID A unique ID of the system found typically one of its MAC addresses IP address The IP address of the system found with which SNMP administration can be performed Port description A textual description of the network interface where the system was found System name Hostname of the system found Button Update Click on Update to update the displayed data 6 52 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 2 7 Management gt gt Central Management 6 2 7 1 Configuration Pull Management Central Management Configuration Pull Configuration Pull Pull Schedule Never v Server config example com Port 443 Directory Filename if empty 1A715030 atv will be used Number
37. 2 5 WLAN over VPN a e Aen dain Bale ee ee o iae 2 4 2 6 Solving network conflicts cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeeeaeesieeeeaeeeaas 2 5 3 Control Elements and Displays s2ic4 eds apie ene eee ee ee a ead ee ee pe ees 3 1 3 1 MGUard rS4000 1S2000 sisii eisi parnasian nei aeaa a aaa iee 3 1 3 2 MGuard centerport e nemere aeaa E aae Haein EEO E ER eel 3 2 3 3 mMGu ard industrial TS mps masaren iey a ea e Eae adie aAa Ea a EEEE ee 3 3 3 4 mGuard smart mGuard SMart eee eeeeeeeee cee eeneeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseeesteeeeeeeaas 3 4 3 5 MGuard PChark Aes doe bee Ani ne ea as 3 5 3 6 MGuard Blade sointiin a iE creas EEE e E E hep E E EESE ERR 3 6 3 7 EAGLE mGuard ae n tie ee eee 3 7 3 8 MGuard delta ote wey detaches tents chi a E ae eda a et eE Aaaa a Oaa aiea aea ReTaS 3 8 4 StartUp oen e a a rare eT e a AA en E er prey aera rear R 4 1 4 1 Safety iNStructiOns e ii eenn ieaie eaaa ie etonan ide hevetacea ie eartieteest 4 1 4 2 Checking the scope of delivery e ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeseeeeeeesnaeeeeeseaeesenensas 4 3 4 3 Installing the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 ou eee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseaeeeneetnaees 4 4 4 3 1 Assembly disassembly ou cc ceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteaeeteeeeeatens 4 4 4 3 2 Connecting to the network eeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeaeeseeeseneetaeeeeaeeeneetaes 4 5 4 3 3 Service Contacts spinne eaaa aeiae aoa tee ngadeeessiiedees 4 5 4 3 4 Co
38. 6 Innominate 6 ENET Power Status LAN SWITCH Power Status Reserved Ethernet WAN Ethernet LAN Fig 3 9 Control elements and displays on mGuard delta Table 3 8 Displays on mGuard delta LEDs State Meaning Power On The power supply is active Status On The mGuard is booting Heartbeat The mGuard is ready Flash flash pause 1 2 Reserved 3 WAN On Link detected Flashing Data transfer 4 7 LAN On Link detected Flashing Data transfer 3 8 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup 4 Startup A A 4 1 Safety instructions To ensure correct operation and guarantee the safety of the environment and personnel the mGuard must be installed operated and maintained correctly WARNING Intended use Please only use the mGuard in the manner intended and for purposes to which it is suited WARNING Only connect LAN installations to RJ45 sockets Only connect the mGuard network ports to LAN installations Some communication connection points also use RJ45 sockets which must not be connected to the RJ45 sockets of the mGuard Please also note the additional safety instructions for the device in the following sections General notes regarding usage ATTENTION Connection notes A free PCI slot 3 3 V or 5 V must be available on your PC when using the mGuard pci Do not bend connection cables Only use the network con
39. Egress Queues VPN VPN viainternat VPN via External VPN via External 2 If VPN via Dialin Enabling Enable Egress QoS No Total Bandwidth Rate No Bandwidth Rate Limit unlimited kbils v Queues gt xi Name E 1 Urgent E 10 E o unlimited 7 a High vv oo soe Important 10 unlimited Medium v sh 3 Default 10 unlimited Medium v enos Low Priority 10 unlimited Low v VPN via Dial in Setting of Egress Queues QoS Egress Queues VPN ven viatnternat vpn viaExternai vpn viaExternai2 vpn via piain Enabling Enable Egress QoS No v Total Bandwidth Rate Bandwidth Rate Limit unlimited kbs v Queues gt x e tpertimit ericrty comment a Urgent 10 unlimited High v daj 2 Important 10 unlimited Medium v eH 3 Default 10 unlimited Medium v soOsS Low Priority 10 unlimited Low 7 All the tab pages listed above for Egress Queues for the Internal External External 2 Dial in interfaces and for VPN connections made over these interfaces provide the same setting possibilities In all cases the settings relate to the data that is sent externally to the network from the respective mGuard interface 6 220 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration QoS menu gt gt Egress Queues gt gt Internal External External 2 Dial in QoS menu gt gt Egress Queues VPN gt gt VPN via Internal VPN via External
40. External2 Diatin Enabling EnableEgressQoS No w Total Bandwidth Rate Bandwidth Rate Limit unlimited kbs ow Queues tame urate pert ero comment cB Urgent 10 unlimited High X daj Important 10 unlimited Medium v Hl 3 Default 10 unlimited Medium v rial Low Priority 10 unlimited low v External Setting of Egress Queues on the external WAN interface QoS Egress Queues MESSER eno ee eee Enabling Enable Egress QoS No v Total Bandwidth Rate Bandwidth Rate Limit unlimited kbit s Queues Packets tame O o Suarane upper O eron comment O r Urgent 10 unlimited High X daj Important 10 unlimited Medium v FH 3 Default 10 unlimited Medium v soe Low Priority 10 unlimited Low v 6 218 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration External 2 Setting of Egress Queues on the secondary external interface QoS Egress Queues internat Externat externat2 pianin Enabling Enable Egress QoS No vo Total Bandwidth Rate Bandwidth Rate Limit unlimited Queues gt x fH Urgent 10 unlimited High X soe Important 0 unlimited Medium w i Hl 3 Defaut 10 unlimited Medium w soe Low Priority 10 unlimited Low v Dial in Setting of Egress Queues for packets for PPP dial connection dial in QoS Egress Queues internat Externat external2 viatin Enabling Enable Egress QoS No v Total Bandwidth Rate
41. In this log messages about the mGuard s CIFS server which makes network drives available externally are displayed In addition messages about mounting network drives to be made available externally are also visible CIFS Integrity Checking Messages relating to the integrity check of network drives are displayed in this log In addition messages that occur when connecting the network drives and that are required for the integrity check are also visible DHCP Server Relay Messages from services defined under Network gt DHCP SNMP LLDP Messages from services defined under Management gt SNMP IPsec VPN Lists all VPN events The format corresponds to the standard Linux format Special evaluation programs exist that present information from the logged data in a more readable format 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 245 mGuard 7 4 6 13 Support menu 6 13 1 Support gt gt Tools 6 13 1 1 Ping Check Support Tools PingCheck Traceroute DNS Lookup IKE Ping Ping Check Hostname IP Address my Webserver estima Support gt gt Tools gt gt Ping Check Ping Check Objective To check if the remote peer is accessible over a network Procedure Enter the IP address or remote peer hostname in the Hostname IP Address field Click on the Ping button You will then receive an appropriate notification 6 13 1 2 DNS Lookup Support Tools Ping Check Traceroute DNS Lookup
42. Ingress Filters Internal External Enable ingress QoS No v Measurement Unit Packets v x use vanj vean i0 Ethernet Protocol Me From IP To IP Current TOSIDSCP Guaranteed Upper Limit Comment as rotocol ARP All 6 10 QoS menu This menu is not available on the rs2000 QoS Quality of Service defines the quality of individual transfer channels in IP networks This relates to the allocation of certain resources to certain services or communication types so that they work correctly For example the necessary bandwidth must be provided for the transfer of audio or video data in real time in order to reach a satisfactory commu nication level At the same time a slower data transfer by FTP or e mail does not threaten the overall success of the transfer file or e mail transfer 6 10 1 Ingress Filter An Ingress Filter prevents the processing of certain data packages by filtering and dropping them before they enter the processing mechanism The mGuard can use an Ingress Filter to avoid processing data packets that are not needed in the network This results in a quicker processing of remaining required data packages Using suitable filter rules administrative access to the mGuard can be ensured with high probability for example Packet processing on the mGuard is generally defined by the handling of individual data packets so that the processing performance depends on the number of packets and not on bandwid
43. Modem Console PPP dial out options Phone number to call ATD Authentication PAP w User name Password PAP server authentication No w Dialondemand Yes v idle timeout Yes v Idle time seconds 300 LocalIP 0 0 0 0 Remote IP 0 0 0 0 Netmask 0 0 0 0 Please note On some platforms the serial port is not accessible Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial out PPP dial out options the WAN Internet Over the primary external interface Modem or Built in Modem network mode Over the secondary external interface also available in the Stealth or Router network mode Only configured if the mGuard should make a data connection dial out to Phone number to call Telephone number of the ISP The connection to the Internet is established after telephone connection is made Command syntax Together with the preset modem command for dialing ATD the following dial sequence is created for the connected modem for example ATD765432 A compatible pulse dialing procedure that works correctly in all cases is used as standard Special dial characters can be used in the dial sequence 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 87 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial out continued Authentication HAYES special dial characters W Instructs the modem to make a pause in dialing until the dial tone can be heard Used when the modem is connected to a private branch exchange An external line
44. Reboot the system e Press the Rescue button briefly 1 5 seconds Alternatively disconnect the device from its power supply briefly then reconnect it If the error continues to occur start the recovery procedure see Performing a recovery procedure on page 8 2 or contact the support department WAN LAN Green On or flashing Ethernet status Shows the status of the LAN and WAN interfaces As soon as the device is connected the LEDs are illuminated continuously to indicate the presence of a network connection The LEDs are extinguished briefly when data packets are transferred WAN Red Green Green Various LED illumination codes Recovery mode After pressing the Rescue button See Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware on page 8 1 In the mGuard pci the Rescue button is located on the circuit board see Hardware installation on page 4 32 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 3 5 mGuard 7 4 3 6 mGuard blade WAN red WAN green LAN red LAN green Rescue button Innominate Serial Fig 3 7 Control elements and displays on mGuard blade Table 3 6 mGuard blade LEDs Color State Meaning WAN LAN Red Flashing Boot process After starting or restarting the computer WAN Red Flashing System error Reboot the system e Press the Rescue button briefly 1 5 seconds Ifthe error continues to occur start the recovery
45. Ring Network Coupling Settings Enable Ring Network Yes No Coupling Dual Homing When activated the status of one Ethernet port is transferred in Stealth mode to the next port This means that interruptions in the network can be traced more easily Redundancy Port Internal External Internal The WAN port is activated deactivated accordingly when the connection on the LAN port is connected discon nected External The LAN port is activated deactivated accordingly when the connection on the WAN port is connected discon nected 6 240 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 12 Logging menu Logging is the recording of event messages e g concerning settings that have been made firewall rules taking effect errors etc Log entries are recorded in different categories and can be displayed according to these categories see Logging gt gt Browse local logs on page 6 242 6 12 1 Logging gt gt Settings 6 12 1 1 Remote Logging All log entries are recorded by default in the mGuard s RAM Once the memory for log entries has been filled the oldest log entries are overwritten Furthermore all log entries are deleted when the mGuard is switched off To prevent this the log entries SysLog messages can be transferred to an external system SysLog server This is particularly useful if you wish to have centralized administration of the logs of multiple mGuards Logging Settings Remote Logging Set
46. Server Hostname of the server that provides the update files Via VPN The update is performed via the VPN tunnel Default No Updates via VPN are not supported if the relevant VPN tunnel in the configuration has been switched off see Chapter 6 8 2 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections and was only opened temporarily via the service contact or the CGI interface Login Login for the server Password Password for the login 6 38 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 2 5 Management gt gt Configuration Profiles 6 2 5 1 Configuration Profiles Configuration Profiles Configuration Profiles Status NEME ction SC X Fanm Ott CE SE Sao nanan O nei Otice Bertin WRestere Download Delete Save Current Configuration to Profile Name for the new profile Upload Configuration to Profile Name for the new profile admin Filename External Config Storage ECS Save the curent configurstion O The root password to save to the ECS eeeeeeee Automatically save configuration cunguiioenecs VY You can save the configuration settings of the mGuard as a configuration profile under any name in the mGuard It is possible to create and save multiple configuration profiles You may then switch between different profiles for example if the mGuard is used in different operating environments Furthermore you can also save configuration profiles as files on your configuratio
47. The driver can now be loaded using the following command modprobe mguard 4 36 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Preparing the Configuration 5 Preparing the Configuration 5 1 Connection requirements mGuard centerport When using the mGuard centerport both power supply units must be connected to the mains power or the power source If only one power supply unit is connected then the device can be operated However an acoustic signal is also emitted For local configuration The computer used for configuration must be connected to the LAN socket of the mGuard For remote configuration The mGuard must be configured to permit remote configuration The mGuard must be connected i e the required connections must be working mGuard industrial rs The mGuard industrial rs must be connected to at least one active power supply unit For local configuration The computer used for configuration must be connected to the LAN socket of the mGuard For remote configuration The mGuard must be configured to permit remote configuration The mGuard must be connected i e the required connections must be working mGuard smart The mGuard smart must be switched on i e connected to an active system or power supply unit via the USB cable in order for it to be supplied with power For local configuration The computer used for configuration must either be connected to the LAN port of the mGuard or connected to the mGuard via
48. These addresses can be used as a DNS or NTP server when the mGuard is configured as a server for the pro tocols For every virtual IP address a real IP address must be configured in whose IP network the virtual address fits The reaction to ICMP requests with internal virtual IP ad dresses is independent from the settings made under Net work Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Advanced Yes No With Yes the presence notifications for the state synchronization are encrypted The password is changed as described under Passphrase for availability checks on page 6 227 You only deviate from the procedure described if you accidentally entered an incorrect password 6 230 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy continued Procedure for an incorrect password If you accidentally entered an incorrect password for an mGuard you cannot simply enter the password again correctly Otherwise it can happen that both mGuards are active after this Case 1 Only one mGuard has an incorrect password The password changing process has not been started for the other mGuard e Reconfigure the mGuard for which the incorrect password was entered with the old password e Wait until the mGuard shows that the old password is being used e Then enter the correct password Case 2 The other mGuard is already using the new password e Both mGuards
49. a portion of the host address that can then be used to address the subnetworks In this example by using the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 in a Class B network 2 bytes for the network address 2 bytes for the host address the third byte which was actually in tended for host addressing can now be used for subnet addressing With this configura tion the company network could support 256 subnetworks that each have 256 hosts 9 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Glossary Symmetrical encryption TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Trap VLAN In symmetrical encryption the same key is used to encrypt and decrypt data Two examples of symmetrical encryption algorithms are DES and AES They are fast but also difficult to administrate as the number of users increases These are network protocols used to connect two computers over the Internet IP is the base protocol UDP is based on IP and sends individual packets The packets may arrive at the recipient in an different order in which they were sent or they may even be lost TCP is used for connection security and ensures for example that data packets are passed on to the application in the correct order UDP and TCP add port numbers between 1 to 65535 to the IP addresses These distin guish the various services offered by the protocols A number of additional protocols are based on UDP and TCP e g HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol HTTPS Secure HyperTe
50. additional Sent when configuration restoration for mGuard blade controller is triggered Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardTrapCIFSScan generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapClIFSScaniInfo 1 additional mGuardTResCIFSShare mGuardTResCIFSScanError mGuardTResCIFSNumDiffs Sent when the CIFS integrity check has been successfully completed 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 49 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt SNMP gt gt Trap continued Failed integrity check of a CIFS share Found a suspicious difference on a CIFS share Userfirewall traps Userfirewall traps This menu item is not included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardTrapCIFSScan generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapCIFSScanFailure 2 additional mGuardTResClIFSShare mGuardTResCIFSScanError mGuardTResCIFSNumDiffs Sent when the CIFS integrity check has failed Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardTrapCIFSScan generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapClIFSScanDetection 3 additional mGuardTResClIFSShare m GuardTResCIFSScanError mGuardTResCIFSNumDiffs Sent when the CIFS integrity check has detected a difference Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardTrapUserFirewall generic trap enterpriseSpecific spe
51. been rectified The secondary mGuard receives a presence notification CARP and returns to standby mode State synchronisation If the primary mGuard should be enabled again after a failure of the internal network connection then the mGuard may contain an obsolete copy of the firewall database This database must be updated before the connection is established again The primary mGuard ensures that it receives an up to date copy before being enabled 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 9 mGuard 7 4 7 1 8 Interaction with other devices Virtual and actual IP addresses In firewall redundancy in Router network mode the mGuard uses actual IP addresses to communicate with other network devices Virtual IP addresses are used in the following two cases Virtual IP addresses are used when establishing and operating VPN connections If DNS and NTP are used according to the configuration then these are offered to internal virtual IP addresses The usage of actual management IP addresses is especially important for the connectivity check and availability check Therefore the actual management IP address must be configured so that the mGuard can establish the required connections The following are examples of mGuard communication With NTP servers to synchronize the time With DNS servers to resolve the host name especially those from VPN partners To register its IP address with a DynDNS service To send SNMP
52. clients default setting CIFS Integrity Monitoring is also switched off as this only works when the Management IP is activated MAU management for Ethernet connections is switched on HTTPS access is approved via the local Ethernet connection LAN The passwords configured settings for VPN connections and the firewall are all retained Possible reasons for starting the Recovery procedure The mGuard is in Router or PPPoE mode The mGuard device address has been changed from the default setting The current IP address of the device is unknown mGuard centerport Requirement The monitor and keyboard are connected to the device e Press the following key combination on the keyboard Alt SysRq a The SysRq key is sometimes not found on some keyboards In this case the Print key should be used After the recovery procedure has been carried out a message is displayed on the monitor 8 2 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware mGuard industrial rs mGuard smart mGuard blade mGuard pci EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta e Press the Rescue button slowly 6 times The mGuard responds after about two seconds mGuard rs4000 rs2000 The State LED lights up green mGuard industrial rs mGuard smart The middle LED lights up green mGuard blade mGuard pci The LAN LED lights up red EAGLE mGuard The STATUS LED lights up yellow m
53. continued Accessible as Server s workgroup Login Password Exported share s name Allow write access Displays the virtual network drive provided by the mGuard for the CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector function This path is displayed with UNC notation You can use this directly on the PC which should use the virtual network drive by copying and pasting see Accessing the virtual network drive CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector on page 6 171 Two UNC addresses for the internal and external interface are displayed in the Router network mode while one UNC address is displayed in the Stealth network mode Access to the virtual network drive can be prevented as a result of the settings in the Allowed Networks section Enter a rule here accordingly especially when access should be made over the external interface Depending on the mGuard configuration further access options can be established over other IP addresses such as access via VPN channels or via dial in see Dial in on page 6 93 Name of the CIFS server workgroup Login for the server Password for the login Name set for the computers who should use the CIFS server to access the combined drives the drives are connected under this name No Read access only Yes Read and write access Allowed Networks These rules allow external access to the CIFS server of the mGuard In Router mode with NAT or port forwarding the
54. cremeert f ee O eron Acson comment toa 1 External v TCP w 00 0 00 any 0 0 0 0 0 any Accept w Yes v These rules specify which traffic from the outside is allowed to pass to the inside Please note Port settings are only meaningful for TCP and UDP Log entries for unknown connection attempts ba Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Incoming Rules Incoming Lists the firewall rules that have been set These rules apply for incoming data connections that were initiated externally If no rule has been set the data packets for all incoming connections except VPN are dropped factory default General firewall Accept all incoming connections the data packets for all setting incoming connections are accepted Drop all incoming connections the data packets for all incoming connections are dropped Use the firewall ruleset below displays additional setting options This menu item is not included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 The following settings are only visible when Use the firewall ruleset below is set Interface External External 2 Any External Specifies over which interface the data packets come in so that the rule applies to them Any External refers to the External and External 2 interfaces These interfaces are only available for mGuard models that have a serial port with external access Protocol TCP UDP ICMP GRE All From To IP 0 0 0 0 0 means all IP
55. gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial out continued f The mGuard also often or sporadically makes a connection via the modem or keeps a connection longer if the following conditions apply Often The mGuard is configured so that it synchronizes its system time date and time regularly with an external NTP server Sporadically The mGuard is acting as a DNS server and has to perform a DNS query for a client After a reboot An active VPN connection is set to initiate If this is the case the mGuard sets up a connection after every reboot After a reboot For an active VPN connection the gateway of the remote peer is entered as a hostname After a restart the mGuard has to request the IP address belonging to the hostname from a DNS server Often VPN connections are set up and DPD messages are sent regularly see Dead Peer Detection on page 6 206 Often The mGuard is configured to send its external IP address regularly to a DNS service e g DynDNS in order to remain accessible over its hostname Often The IP addresses of remote peer VPN gateways must be requested from the DynDNS service or they must be kept up to date through new queries Sporadically The mGuard is configured so that SNMP traps are sent to the remote server Sporadically The mGuard is configured to permit and accept remote access via HTTPS SSH or SNMP The mGuard then sends reply packets to every IP address from which an access attempt is
56. gt gt Internal interface gt gt Secondary targets for ICMP echo requests If at least one target must respond or all targets of one set must respond is selected under External interface gt gt Kind of check then External interface gt gt Primary targets for ICMP echo requests cannot be empty This also applies to the internal interface In Router network mode at least one external and one internal virtual IP address must be set A virtual IP address cannot be listed twice 7 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy 7 1 5 Fail over switching time The mGuard calculates the intervals for the connectivity check and availability check automatically according to the variables under Fail over switching time Connectivity check The factors which define the intervals for the connectivity check are specified in Table 7 1 on Page 7 5 64 kByte ICMP echo requests are sent for the connectivity check They are sent on layer 3 of the Internet protocol When VLAN is not used 18 bytes for the MAC header and hash are added to this with the Ethernet on layer 2 The ICMP echo reply is the same size The bandwidth is also shown in Table 7 1 This takes into account the values specified for a single target and totals the bytes for the ICMP echo request and reply The timeout on the mGuard following transmission contains the following The time required by the mGuard to transmit an ICMP echo reply If other data traffic is expected t
57. means no further restriction Low Medium High Defines with which priority the affected queue should be processed providing the total available bandwidth is not exhausted Optional Text comment 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 221 mGuard 7 4 6 10 4 Egress Rules This page defines which data is assigned to the defined Egress Queues see above Rules can be defined separately for all interfaces and also for VPN connections 6 10 4 1 Internal External External 2 Dial in Internal Setting of Egress Queue rules Default Default Queue Default Rules SC CC ST SC So pEi ar v 00000 ay Joooowo o any ss TOS Minimize Delay Unchanged Urgent sO a 00000 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Maximize Reliability Unchanged Important 3 a 00 000 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Minimize Cost Unchanged Low Priority v External Setting of Egress Queue rules QoS Egress Rules internat externar Externar2 distin Default Rules s x pmm Current TOS DSCP New TOSDSCP SEa am v 000 00 any 7 0 0 0 0 0 ay TOS Minimize Delay w Unchanged w Urgent X ef 2 ary 000 00 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Maximize Reliability w Unchanged v important v SEs a v 00000 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Minimize Cost w Unchanged w Low Priority v External 2 Setting of Egress Queue rules QoS Egress Rules internat Externat ext
58. only then all expired connections must be established again The factory default is 4832000 seconds 5 days The timeout blocks a TCP port to port connection for an ex tended period after the connection is closed This is neces sary as packets belonging to the closed TCP connection may still arrive in a packet based network after the connection is closed Without a time controlled block old packets could be assigned accidentally to a new connection The factory default is 3600 seconds 1 hour 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 149 mGuard 7 4 Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Advanced continued FTP IRC PPTP H 323 SIP Yes No If an outgoing connection is established to call up data during the FTP protocol then there are two variations of data transfer With active FTP the called server establishes an additional counter connection to the caller in order to transfer data over this connection With passive FTP the client establishes this additional connection to the server for data transfer FTP must be set to Yes default so that additional connections can pass through the firewall Yes No Similar to FTP For IRC chat over the Internet to work properly incoming connections must be allowed following an active connection attempt IRC must be set to Yes default so that additional connections can pass through the firewall Yes No default No Must be set to Yes
59. the mGuard to identify itself to others shall be known as the machine certificate here in line with Microsoft Windows terminology a A certificate certificate specific to an individual or user certificate displaying a person is one used by operators to authenticate themselves to remote peers e g for an operator attempting remote access to the mGuard using HTTPS and a web browser When acquired by a web browser a certificate specific to an individual can be saved on a chip card and then inserted into the card reader of the owner s computer A certificate is thus used by its owner person or machine as a form of ID in order to verify that they really are the individual they identify themselves as As there are two communica tion partners the process takes place alternately Partner A shows their certificate to their re mote peer partner B Partner B then shows their certificate to their remote peer partner A In order for A to accept the certificate shown by B thus allowing communication there is the following option A has earlier received a copy of the certificate from B e g by data carrier or e mail with which B will identify itself A can then verify the certificate shown later by B by comparing it to this certificate When related to the mGuard interface the certificate copy given here by B to A is an example of a Remote certificate For bilateral authentication to take place both partners m
60. the respective answers are forwarded due to the nature of Stealth mode If this option is set to Disabled the mGuard does not answer any DHCP queries 6 112 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt DHCP gt gt Internal DHCP continued DHCP mode Server If the DHCP mode is set to Server the following selection settings are displayed Internal DHCP External DHCP Mode DHCP mode Server v DHCP Server Options Enable dynamic IP address pool Yes v DHCP lease time 14400 DHCP range stat 192 168 1 100 DHCP range end 192 168 1 199 Localnetmask 255 255 255 0 Broadcast address 192 168 1 255 Default gateway 192 168 1 1 DNS server 10 0 0 254 WINS server 192 168 1 2 Static Mapping A 2X E 9 DHCP Server Options Enable dynamic IP Select Yes if you wish to use the IP address pool defined by address pool DHCP range start and DHCP range end Select No if only static assignments should be made according to the MAC addresses see below With enabled dynamic IP address pool When the DHCP server and the dynamic IP address pool have been activated you can enter the network parameters to be used by the computer DHCP range start end The start and end of the address range from which the mGuard s DHCP server should assign IP addresses to locally connected computers DHCP lease time Time in seconds for which the network configuration assigned to the computer is valid The client should
61. time without prior notice Furthermore Innominate Security Technologies AG assumes no liability for errors in this document or for accidental or consequential damages in connection with the delivery performance or utilization of this document This manual may not be photocopied duplicated or translated into another language in whole or in part without the prior written approval of Innominate Security Technologies AG Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 are all registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation All other product names are trademarks of their respective organizations 2012 Innominate Security Technologies AG Notes on CE identification CE In agreement with the EU directives for the responsible authorities the conformity declarations are available at the following address Innominate Security Technologies AG Rudower Chaussee 13 12489 Berlin Germany Tel 49 0 30 92 10 28 0 FCC Note This note applies to the following devices mGuard industrial rs mGuard smart mGuard smart mGuard pci mGuard delta and EAGLE mGuard This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class A digital device according to p
62. tual IP address The applied VLAN settings define whether standard MTU set tings or VLAN MTU settings are used for the virtual IP ad dress i Firewall redundancy cannot work correctly when no actual IP address and netmask are available 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 229 mGuard 7 4 Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy continued Internal virtual Router ID Internal virtual IP addresses Encrypted state Encrypt the state synchronization messages Passphrase 1 2 3 to 255 default 51 Only in Router network mode This ID is sent by the redundant pair with each presence no tification CARP via the external and internal interface and is used to identify the redundant pair This ID must be the same on both mGuards The ID is used to differentiate the redundant pair from other Ethernet partic ipants that are connected to the same Ethernet segment through their external internal interface Please note that CARP uses the same protocol and port as VRRR Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol The ID set here must be different to the IDs on other devices which use VRRR or CARP and are located in the same Ethernet segment As described under External virtual IP addresses but with two exceptions Under Internal virtual IP addresses IP addresses are de fined for devices which belong to the internal Ethernet seg ment These devices must use the IP address as their default gateway
63. 1 3 Assigning IP addresses via BootP The address 192 168 1 1 is no longer available as an access option following the assignment of an IP address via BootP The mGuard uses the BootP protocol for assigning the IP address You can also assign the IP address via BootP A wide range of BootP servers are available on the Internet Any of these programs can be used to assign the IP address However the functional compatibilities are not tested by Innominate This chapter describes IP address assignment using the supported Windows software IP Assignment Tool IPAssign exe This software is available to download free of charge under www phoenixcontact net catalog or under www innominate com Downloads gt Software Information on BootP During the initial startup the mGuard sends uninterrupted BootP requests until a valid IP address is received No further BootP requests are sent after the mGuard has received a correct IP address From this point onwards the address 192 168 1 1 is no longer available as an access option The mGuard does not send BootP requests after it has received a BootP answer This also applies after restarting In order for the mGuard to send BootP requests again the default settings must be restored or one of the two procedures recovery or flash must be carried out Requirements The mGuard is connected to a computer which uses Microsoft Windows Assigning the IP address using IPAssign exe
64. 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 11111100 11111000 11110000 11100000 11000000 10000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 11111100 11111000 11110000 11100000 11000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111110 11111100 11111000 11110000 11100000 11000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111110 11111100 11111000 11110000 11100000 11000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 CIDR 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 PN WwW PP UO 0 fe Example 192 1
65. 124 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 17 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access continued a SSH server certificate 2 Authentication for SSH Specifies how the mGuard authenticates the SSH client The following definition relates to how the mGuard verifies the authentication of the SSH client The table below shows which certificates must be provided for the mGuard to authenticate the SSH client if the SSH client displays one of the following certificate types on connection A certificate signed by a CA A self signed certificate For further information on the following table see Chapter 6 5 4 Authentication gt gt Certificates The remote peer shows the following Certificate specific to individual signed by CA Certificate specific to individual self signed The mGuard authenticates the remote peer using 2 2 All CA certificates that build the chain to the root CA certificate together with the certificates displayed by the remote peer or ADDITIONALLY Remote certificates if used as a filter Remote certificate In accordance with this table the certificates must be provided that the mGuard uses for the authentication of the respective SSH client The following instructions assume that the certificates have already been correctly installed in the mGuard see Chapter 6 5 4 Authentication gt gt Certificates If
66. 168 134 100 192 168 134 119 option routers 192 168 134 1 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 option broadcast address 192 168 134 255 This sample configuration makes 20 IP addresses 100 to 119 available It is assumed that the DHCP server has the address 192 168 134 1 settings for ISC DHCP 2 0 The required TFTP server is configured in the following file etc inetd conf e In this file insert the appropriate lines or set the necessary parameter for TFTP service The directory for the data is tftpboot tftp dgram udp wait root usr sbin in tftpd s tftpboot The mGuard image files must be saved in the tftpboot directory install p7s jffs2 img p7s e Ifa major release upgrade of the firmware is carried out due to the flash procedure the license file purchased for the update must also be stored here under the name licence lic Ensure that this is the correct license file for the device see Management gt gt Update on page 6 35 e Restart the inetd process again to activate the modified configuration e Ifyou use a different process e g xinetd please consult the appropriate documentation 8 10 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Glossary 9 Glossary AES Asymmetrical encryption CA certificate Client Server The AES Advanced Encryption Standard was developed by NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology in cooperation with the industry This symmetrical encryption standard
67. 2 VPN Dial in Specifies which interface the rules apply to If no rules are set or if no rule takes effect the following default settings apply HTTPS access is permitted over Internal VPN and Dial in Access over External and External 2 is refused Specify the access possibilities according to your requirements a If you want to refuse access over Internal VPN or Dial in you must implement this explicitly through corresponding firewall rules by speci fying Drop as an action for example To avoid locking yourself out you may have to simul taneously allow access over another interface explicitly with Accept before you make the new setting effective by clicking the Apply button Otherwise if you are locked out you must perform the recovery procedure Accept means that data packets may pass through Reject means that the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been rejected In Stealth mode Reject has the same effect as Drop Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Freely selectable comment for this rule For each individual firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default 6 24 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management
68. 208 6 9 SEG Stick Mente hn ie Sean a en ida a he 6 209 6 9 1 Gl ODall A inn nnna a a o a ai a ia 6 210 6 9 2 SEC Stick connections 200 eee eeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeteeeeaeeesaeteneeteaeeeaeetaas 6 213 6 10 QOS MeNi ea ek cen tiden nes e E a aasa a a 6 215 610 1 Ingress Filt n iienaa a a dna 6 215 6 10 2 Egress QueUCS miari eaa Saera a anes 6 218 6 10 38 Egress Queues VPN cceesccssecescessseseeecseessseesseessseecsseseseeseesses 6 219 6 1040 Egress RUICS aieia eaaa aaee deep ete Eaa 6 222 6 11 Redu danty s sa sees ecenececadecthdedecscabedcdGeasuses cess aineen i abaa eioan in aaa da deiae iaai 6 226 6 11 1 Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy n 6 226 6 11 2 Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy n 6 235 6 11 3 Ring Network Coupling eeeccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeesaeseeeseaeenaeeres 6 240 6 12 LOGGING MENU miie a shore ates pido hitter tone 6 241 6 12 1 Logging gt gt Settings cecccccceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesnaeeeesneeeseaees 6 241 6 12 2 Logging gt gt Browse local lOGS ecseeesseeeeeneeeeeneeeesseeeesneeeeenneees 6 242 6 13 SUPPO MONU isni na aee a aie acd E a ean interne 6 246 6 1321 Support gt Tools ineei aE 6 246 6 13 2 Support gt gt Advanced s seseeseesseeieeeeeeeesesritsttsrintinstnsriternsrrsrrnen 6 248 6 14 CIDR Classless Inter Domain ROuting c cccceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteesteeeeeeteaes 6 249 6 15 tExample Of a MetWOrk niitin aeii eoa nei
69. 4 10 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup If the boot menu remains on display for a sustained period press one of the arrow keys on the keyboard l 4 or gt GNU GRUB version 0 97 639K lower 64448K upper memory Boot firmware A Boot firmware B Start Use the ft and keys to select which entry is highlighted Press enter to boot the selected OS e to edit the P commands before booting or c for a command line Fig 4 5 mGuard centerport boot menu Proceed as follows to select and enforce one of the boot options 1 Select one of the displayed options using the or arrow keys 2 Press the Enter key The boot options are described below Boot firmware A Starts the primary firmware version found on the device A This is the default setting and is applied when the user does not intervene during the boot process Boot firmware B Not supported by the current firmware version Check the file system s of firmware A Checks all firmware file systems and repairs them if necessary This menu point is only required in exceptional cases and when the user is familiar with the process or following instructions from the Innominate support team The mGuard firmware also checks and repairs the file systems when needed during the normal boot process The firmware file systems are used in a robust manner with the mass storage device cache switched off meaning that repairs are normally not necessary
70. 4 5 W 5 to 95 during operation non condensing IP 20 0 C to 40 C operation 20 C to 70 C storage 30 x 239 x 156 mm 1300 g mGuard v5 0 or higher Innominate recommends firmware version 6 x or 7 x with the current patch releases For scope of functions see relevant firmware data sheet 99 Mbit s bi directional 99 Mbit s bi directional DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 70 Mbit s bi directional Web GUI HTTPS Command Line Interface SSH SNMP v1 2 3 central Device Management Software 7 x LEDs Power Status WAN LAN 1 4 log file remote Syslog CE FCC 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 10 9 mGuard 7 4 10 10 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04
71. 6 19 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access continued Authorized for access as Client certificate Authorized for access as All users root admin netadmin audit Additional filter which defines that the SSH client has to have certain administration level authentication in order to gain access During connection the SSH client shows its certificate and also the system user for which the SSH session is to be opened root admin netadmin audit Access is only granted when the entries match those defined here Access for all listed system users is possible when All users is set The netadmin and audit settings relate to access rights with the Innominate Device Manager Configuration is required in the following cases SSH clients each show a self signed certificate SSH clients each show a certificate signed by a CA Filtering should take place Access is only granted to a user whose certificate copy is installed in the mGuard as the remote certificate and is provided to the mGuard in this table as the Client certificate This filter is not subordinate to the Subject filter It resides on the same level and is allocated a logical OR function with the Subject filter The entry in this field defines which remote certificate the mGuard should adopt in order to authenticate the remote peer SSH client For this select one of the remote certificates
72. 6 71 Interface 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 81 mGuard 7 4 Network Mode Router Router Mode PPPoE General Ethernet Dial out Dial in Modem Console Network Status External IP address 172 16 66 49 Active Defaultroute 172 16 66 18 Used DNS servers 10 1 0 253 Network Mode Network Mode Router v Router Mode PPPoE w PPPoE PPPoE Login user provider example n When Router network mode and ae aa PPPoE router Request PPPoE Service mA mode are selected Name PPPoE Service Name Automatic Re connect No wv Re connect daily at 0 ho m Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Router network mode PPPoE router mode PPPoE For access to the Internet the Internet Service Provider ISP gives the user a login name and password These are required for connection to the Internet PPPoE Login The user name Login that is required by your Internet Service Provider ISP when you setup a connection to the Internet PPPoE Password The password that is required by your ISP when you setup a connection to the Internet Request PPPoE When Yes is selected the PPPoE client of the mGuard Service Name requests the service name specified below from the PPPoE server Otherwise the PPPoE service name is not used The specified PPPoE The specified PPPoE service name service name Automatic Enter the time in the Re connect daily at field if you enter Re connect Yes This feature is used to sch
73. 7 4 1 CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector CIFS integrity Monitoring CIFS AV Scan Connector CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector CIFS Server Enable the server Yes v Accessible as 172 16 66 49 exported av share External 192 168 66 49 exported av share Internal Servers workgroup WORKGROUP Login virus scanner Password eeccsccsscece Exported share s name exported av share Allow write access No v Please note To have the CIFS server enabled in the network mode Stealth a management IP must be set Allowed Networks Log ID w cifs access 262e7300 2140 1402 9070 00009206000 SX ooo rromi oo o atertace o acson o oo commen roa om 10 0 0 0 8 External v Accept v No v These rules allow to grant remote access to the CIFS server of the mGuard Please note In router mode with NAT or portforwarding the network ports required for the CIFS server have priority over portforwarding Please note Access to the CIFS server is granted from the internal side via dial in and VPN by default and can be restricted by these firewall rules Consolidated Imported Shares DX Enabled Exported in Subdirectory CIFS Share FB a Yes v pe x7 pe x7 scan v CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector CIFS Server Enable the server No CIFS server is not available Yes CIFS server is available 6 168 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector
74. A pushbutton or an on off switch e g key switch can be connected between the CMD and _ _ service contacts A standard LED up to 3 5 V or a corresponding optocoupler can be connected between the ACK and _ _ contacts The contact is short circuit proof and supplies a maxi mum of 20 mA The LED or optocoupler must be connected without a series resistor see Fig 4 8 or Fig 4 10 for wiring information The pushbutton or on off switch is used for establishing and disabling a previously defined VPN connection The LED displays the status of the VPN connection see IPsec VPN gt gt Global on page 6 172 under Options To establish a VPN connection press and hold the pushbutton for a few seconds until the signal LED flashes Only release the pushbutton at this point The flashing LED signals that the mGuard has received the command for establishing a VPN connection and has started the connection process The LED lights up continuously when the VPN connection has been established To disable the VPN connection press and hold the pushbutton for a few seconds until the signal LED flashes or goes out Only release the pushbutton at this point The VPN connection is disabled when the signal LED no longer lights up e To establish the VPN connection turn the switch to ON e To disable the VPN connection turn the switch to OFF If the signal LED is set to OFF then the defined VPN connection is disabled The VPN connectio
75. Air humidity range Protection class Temperature range Dimensions H x W x D Weight Firmware amp performance values Firmware compatibility Data throughput router firewall Hardware based encryption Encrypted VPN throughput AES 256 Management support Diagnostics Other Conformity mGuard centerport Multicore x86 processor architecture 1 LAN port 1 WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 1000 Base TX RJ45 Full Half Duplex Auto MDIX VGA console 2 x serial RS 232 D sub 9 pin connector 6 x USB 1 HDD 1 DVD RW Depends on the firmware used 2 x 100 240 V AC 250 W at 50 60 Hz redundant Depends on the configuration level 20 to 90 during operation non condensing 10 to 90 when not in operation Front IP 20 0 C to 50 C operation 20 C to 70 C storage 88 x 482 x 472 mm 2 HU x 19 x 18 58 10 kg mGuard v7 1 or higher Innominate recommends operation with the current patch releases For scope of functions see relevant firmware data sheet 2000 Mbit s bi directional 2000 Mbit s bi directional DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 300 Mbit s bi directional Web GUI HTTPS Command Line Interface SSH SNMP v1 2 3 central Device Management Software LEDs 1 x power 1 x HDD boot menu log file remote Syslog CE developed according to UL requirements 10 2 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Technical Data 10 3 Hardware properties Platform Network int
76. C networks and each of these networks can have up to 256 hosts 1 byte address space P Security IPsec is a standard that uses encryption to verify the authenticity of the sender and to ensure the confidentiality and integrity of the data in IP datagrams gt Datagram on page 9 2 The components of IPsec are the Authentication Header AH the Encapsu lating Security Payload ESP the Security Association SA and the Internet Key Exchange IKE At the start of the session systems that wish to communicate must determine which technique should be used and the implications of this choice for the session e g Transport Mode or Tunnel Mode In Transport Mode an IPsec header is inserted between the IP header and the TCP or UDP header respectively in each IP datagram Since the IP header remains unchanged this mode is only suitable for host to host connections In Tunnel Mode an IPsec header and a new IP header are added in front of the entire IP datagram This means the original datagram is encrypted in its entirety and stored in the payload of the new datagram The Tunnel Mode is used in VPN applications The devices at the tunnel ends ensure that the datagrams are encrypted before they pass through the tunnel This means the actual datagrams are completely protected whilst being transferred over a public network During Network Address Translation NAT also known as P Masquerading an entire network is hidden behind a
77. ECS to the V 24 ACA11 or USB ACA21 port mGuard centerport and EAGLE mGuard with USB port Connect the USB stick to the USB port mGuard rs4000 rs2000 insert the SD card into the SD slot on the front side Ifthe mGuard where the profile is subsequently imported has a different root password than root then you must enter this password under The root password to save to the ECS Click on the Save button EAGLE mGuard The LED STATUS and the V 24 LED flash until the save procedure is finished Loading a profile from an external storage medium EAGLE mGuard Connect the ECS to the V 24 ACA11 or USB ACA21 port mGuard centerport and EAGLE mGuard with USB port Connect the USB stick to the USB port mGuard rs4000 rs2000 insert the SD card into the SD slot on the front side Start the mGuard whilst the storage medium is plugged in e The root password of the mGuard must either be root or must correspond to the password entered when saving the profile EAGLE mGuard The LED STATUS and the V 24 LED flash until the save procedure is finished The configuration profile loaded from the storage medium is loaded into the mGuard and activated The loaded configuration profile does not appear in the list of configuration profiles stored on the mGuard The configuration on the external storage medium also contains the passwords for the users root admin netadmin audit and user These are also set
78. GRE GRE IP packets of the GRE protocol can be forwarded However only one GRE connection is supported at any one time If more than one device sends GRE packets to the same external IP address it is possible that mGuard will not be able to return response packets correctly We recommend only forwarding GRE packets from specific senders These can be senders for whose source address a forwarding rule has been set up by entering the address of the sender in the field From IP for example 193 194 195 196 32 From IP The source address where forwarding is made 0 0 0 0 0 means all addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 From Port The source port where forwarding is made any describes any selected port Either the port number or the corresponding service name can be entered here e g pop3 for port 110 or http for port 80 6 106 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt NAT gt gt IP and port forwarding continued Incoming on IP Incoming on Port Redirect to IP Redirect to Port Comment Log Enter the external IP address or one of the external IP addresses of the mGuard here or use variable extern when a dynamic change of the external IP address of the mGuard is made so that the external IP address cannot be entered If more than one static IP address is used for the WAN port the variable extern alway
79. IKE Ping Traceroute Hostname iP Address myWebServer Do not resolve IP addresses to 7 hostnames a Support gt gt Tools gt gt DNS Lookup DNS Lookup Objective To establish which intermediary peers or routers are found on the connection path to a remote peer Procedure Enter the IP address or hostname of the remote peer to which the route is to be determined in the Hostname IP Address field e Ifthe points on the route are to be given with IP addresses and not hostnames if applicable activate the Do not resolve IP addresses to hostnames checkbox e Click on the Trace button You will then receive an appropriate notification 6 246 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 13 1 3 DNS Lookup Support Tools Ping check Traceroute DNS Lookup IKE Ping DNS Lookup Hostname myWebserver nan Support gt gt Tools gt gt DNS Lookup DNS Lookup Objective To establish which hostname belongs to a certain IP address or which IP address belongs to a certain hostname Procedure Enter the IP address or hostname in the Hostname field e Click on the Lookup button You will then receive the answer queried by the mGuard according to the DNS configuration 6 13 1 4 IKE Ping Support Tools Ping Check Traceroute DNS Lookup IKE Ping IKE Ping Hostname IP Address myWebserver mam Support gt gt Tools gt gt IKE Ping IKE Ping Objective To determine if the VPN g
80. If an on off switch is used instead of a pushbut ton and it is operated to establish a VPN connec tion this connection is re established automati cally when the mGuard is restarted 6 176 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration es me He ee eI TCP Encapsulation This function is used to encapsulate data packets to be transmitted via a VPN connection into TCP packets Without this encapsulation it is possible that with VPN connections important data packets belonging to the VPN connection may not be correctly transmitted due to interconnected NAT routers firewalls or proxy servers for example For example firewalls may be set up to stop any data packets of the UDP protocol from passing through or incorrectly implemented NAT routers may not manage the port numbers correctly for UDP packets TCP encapsulation avoids these problems because the packets belonging to the relevant VPN connection are encapsulated into TCP packets i e they are hidden so that only TCP packets appear for the network infrastructure The mGuard can accept encapsulated VPN connections in TCP even when the mGuard is positioned behind a NAT gateway in the network and thus cannot be reached by the VPN remote port under its primary external IP address To do this the NAT gateway must for ward the corresponding TCP port to the mGuard see Listen for incoming VPN connec tions which are encapsulated on page 6 178 TCP encaps
81. Interfaces General Ethernet Dial out Network Status External IP address 172 16 66 49 Active Defaultroute 172 16 66 18 Used DNS servers 10 1 0 253 Network Mode Network Mode Router w Router Mode static v External Networks External IPs untrusted port HX Additional External Routes IP of default gateway 172 16 66 18 Dialin Modem Console oo e OO nemas O useva viano 1 172 16 66 49 255 255 255 0 No v PT ewon D aew Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Router network mode static router mode External Networks External IPs untrusted port Additional External Routes The addresses on the WAN port side where devices can access the mGuard If the transition to the Internet takes place here the external IP address of the mGuard is designated by the Internet Service Provider ISP IP Netmask IP address and netmask of the WAN port Use VLAN Yes No If this IP address should be located within a VLAN this option must be set to Yes VLAN ID A VLAN ID between 1 and 4095 An explanation can be found under VLAN on page 9 7 If you want to delete entries from the list please note that the first entry cannot be deleted In addition to the default route over the default gateway see below you can define additional external routes Network Gateway see Example of a network on page 6 250 6 80 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration
82. Internal IP mGuard gt lt Name of the exported share gt Example 10 1 66 49 exported av share 192 168 66 49 exported av share Alternatively you can enter the net use command in the command line Further information can be found in the product information from Microsoft Notes You can also use a DNS name instead of the IP address The authorized network drive cannot be found using the browser or search function The Exported share s name must always be entered Windows does not display the authorized network drive automatically when the mGuard is connected 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 171 mGuard 7 4 6 8 IPsec VPN menu B This menu is not available on the mGuard blade controller 6 8 1 IPsec VPN gt gt Global 6 8 1 1 Options IPsec VPN Global owens OOo Allow packet forwarding No v between VPN connections The value Yes will not be applied to the network mode Stealth Archive diagnostic messages No for VPN connections VPN Switch Start and stop the specified VPN connection with an external contact and signal the status of the connection with the ACK contact VPN connection Mannheim Leipzig w Switch type connected to the Oot switch v TCP Encapsulation Listen for incoming VPN connections whichare No w encapsulated TCP portto listenon 8080 Server ID 0 63 0 IP Fragmentation Some routers fail to forward large UDP packets which may break th
83. Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 1 2 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway ERNA Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server Cancel Fig 5 1 Internet protocol properties TCP IP e First select Use the following IP address then enter the following addresses example IP address 192 168 1 2 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 192 168 1 1 Depending on the configuration of the mGuard it may then be necessary to change the network interface of the local computer or network accordingly 5 2 1 2 IP address https 1 1 1 1 With a configured network In order to access the mGuard via the address https 1 1 1 1 it must be connected to a interface configured network interface This is the case when the mGuard is patched between the existing network connection see Fig 4 12 on page 4 21 and the default gateway is then accessible through the WAN port of the mGuard In this case the web browser can establish a connection to the mGuard configuration interface after the address is entered as https 1 1 1 1 See Setting up a local configuration connection on page 5 12 Continue from this point The address 192 168 1 1 is no longer available as an access option after access has been made under 1 1 1 1 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 5 5 mGuard 7 4 5 2
84. Redundancy Firewall Redundancy Redundancy Connectivity Checks External interface Kind of check at least one target must respond vv Primary targets for ICMP echo requests O O Recommended are the IPs of 172 16 66 18 routers in particular of a default gateway or the realIP 10 0 0 31 of the other mGuard of this 5 redundancy pair Secondary targets ror CMP M echo requests Used only if the check failed 10 0 0 31 for the primary targets r l 10 0 0 31 Internal interface Kind of check atleast one target must respond v Primary targets for ICMP echo ests OS ee req Recommended are the IPs of Tues tipatada ore F 192 168 1 1 default gateway or the real IP gt 192 168 1 31 of the other mGuard of this redundancy pair Secondary targets for ICMP A X echo requests i Used only if the check failed 192 168 1 31 Rome pear oe 192 168 1 31 Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Connectivity Checks External interface Kind of check Specifies whether a connectivity check is made on the exter nal interface and how If at least one target must respond is selected then it does not matter whether the ICMP echo request is answered by the primary or secondary target The request is only sent to the secondary target when the pri mary target did not offer a suitable answer In this way con figurations can be supported where the devices are only op tionally equipped with ICMP
85. Router Ce g A Fig 2 2 Network router 2 2 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Typical Application Scenarios 2 3 DMZ A DMZ Demilitarized Zone is a protected network that sits between two other networks For example a company website may be inside a DMZ granting FTP write access only to computers in the Intranet and HTTP read only access to both networks i e also over the Internet IP addresses within a DMZ can be public or private In the latter case the mGuard connected to the Internet forwards the connections using port forwarding to the private addresses within the DMZ DMZ II Fig 2 3 DMZ 2 4 VPN gateway By using the VPN gateway encrypted access to the company network is provided to employees at home or whilst travelling The mGuard thereby takes on the role of the VPN gateway On external computers IPsec capable VPN client software must be installed and the operating system must support this function e g Windows 2000 XP or an mGuard must be installed on the computer EP Fig 2 4 VPN gateway 7961_en
86. This is illustrated as follows The entries in the Local and Remote fields for the local and remote mGuards could be made as follows Local mGuard Remote mGuard A Local Remote Local Remote 10 0 0 0 8 10 0 0 0 8 gt 10 1 7 0 24 10 0 0 0 8 Remote mGuard B Local Remote gt 10 3 9 0 24 10 0 0 0 8 etc In this way configuring a single tunnel can allow you to establish connections for a number of peers To use this option the VPN tunnel group license must be installed unless the device was delivered accordingly The system must be rebooted in order to use this installed license 6 188 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Virtual IP only in Stealth mode Virtual local Network myom 4 IPsec Tunnel w Client s virtual IP _ Laat ys a Oe Sieni eee Remote VPN Remote Internet gateway network Fig 6 4 Virtual IP In Stealth mode the VPN local network is simulated by the mGuard Within this virtual network the client is known and accessible under the virtual IP address entered here IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt General Further settings can be made by clicking More Options s Connection type Tunnel Serera Options Enabled Yes v Comment Type Tunnel v Local 192 168 1 1 32 Remote 192 168 254 1 32 Local NAT Local NAT for IPsec tunnel off X connections Remote NAT Remote NAT for IPse
87. VPN connection The following entries are valid for PSK Empty IP address used as default An IP address A hostname with a prefixed symbol e g vpn1138 example com An e mail address e g piepiorra example com 6 200 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 8 3 3 Firewall General Authentication Firewall IKE Options Incoming General firewall setting Use the firewall ruleset below wv Log ID tweype in IN 28267 305 240 140e 9076 000002060000 PEL rece rrome rromrot O roi O toron Acton Comment toa E1 a v 000 00 0 0 0 0 0 Accept defaultrule please adap No v Log entries for unknown connection attempts eS Y Outgoing General firewall setting Use the firewall ruleset below w Log ID twypr out W 262e7307 2 40 1402 9076 0000020600 Sx ET T T E Acton comment tog_ F an Fj 1 An 0 0 0 00 any 0 0 0 0 0 Accept w defaultrule please adap No w Log entries for unknown connection attempts Incoming Outgoing While the settings made in the Network Security menu only affect non VPN connections see above under Network Security menu on page 6 138 the settings here only affect the VPN connection defined on these tab pages If multiple VPN connections are defined you can restrict the outgoing or incoming access individually for each connection You can log any attempts made to bypass these restrictions The VPN firewall factory defaults
88. VPN via External 2 VPN via Dial in Enabling Enable Egress QoS Total Bandwidth Rate Bandwidth Rate Limit Queues Name Guaranteed Upper Limit Priority Comment No default Feature is disabled Yes Feature is enabled This is recommended when the interface is connected to a network with a small bandwidth This allows the bandwidth allocation to be influenced in favor of especially important data kbit s packets s Maximum available bandwidth measured in kbit s or packets s In order for an optimal prioritization process the total band width entered here should be slightly lower than the actual amount This prevents an overrun in the transferring device buffer which would create adverse effects You can apply the preset name for the Egress Queues or select another one The name does not define data priority Bandwidth that should be available for the relevant queue Use the same units as defined above under Bandwidth Rate Limit kbit s OR packet s but do not enter the unit of mea surement explicitly The total of all guaranteed bandwidths must be smaller or equal to the total bandwidth Maximum permitted bandwidth available for the relevant queue Use the same units as defined above under Band width Rate Limit kbit s OR packet s but do not enter the unit of measurement explicitly This value must be the same as or larger than the guaranteed bandwidth You can also enter the unlimited setting which
89. a maximum length of 30 meters The serial port Serial interface can be used as described under Serial port on page 4 19 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 9 mGuard 7 4 With front cover opened 4 4 3 Front cover The lock on the front cover prevents access to the drives RESET button and ON OFF button Keep both supplied keys in a safe place CD drive for rescue procedure Filter mat holder with fastening screw ON OFF button 2 x USB ports RESET button For a system restart without switching the device off and back on Fig 4 4 Front of mGuard centerport with front cover opened 4 4 4 Housing The mGuard centerport housing is manufactured by Kontron and is designated as a KISS 2U platform You can find further information on the following points among others under www kontron com Installation in a 19 industrial cabinet Attaching the housing feet Removing the 19 bracket from the device Care and maintenance 4 4 5 Booting the mGuard centerport Press the ON OFF button Result The mGuard centerport boots the firmware and is then ready for operation 4 4 5 1 Boot options with connected monitor and keyboard The following options are available with a monitor and keyboard attached to the device After switching on after a reboot or after pressing the RESET button the BIOS boot messages are displayed on the monitor followed by the mGuard centerport boot menu
90. a metal clamp The mounting rail is connected to the rear side of the mGuard The mounting rail must be electrically grounded Signal contact WARNING Signal contact connectors may only be connected with SELV circuits with voltage restrictions in accordance with EN 60950 1 The signal contact is used to monitor the functions of the mGuard industrial rs thereby enabling remote diagnosis The following is reported through interruption of the contact using the potential free signal contact relay contact closed current circuit The failure of at least one of the two supply voltages A power supply shortfall for the mGuard industrial rs supply voltage 1 and or 2 is less than 9 V The faulty link state of at least one port The link state report on the mGuard industrial rs can be masked for each port using the management software No connection monitoring is performed in the factory default condition Self test error The signal contact is interrupted during a reboot until the mGuard is fully operative This also applies when the signal contact is set manually to Closed in the software configuration 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 17 mGuard 7 4 Operating a connected pushbutton Operating a connected on off switch Signal LED Service contacts WARNING The service contacts _ _ CMD ACK must not be connected to an external voltage source but must be connected as described here
91. access to the mGuard if they know the user names These user names are transmitted as plain text with the RADIUS request The attacker can thus simulate RADIUS requests and find out the user names and corresponding passwords Administrative access to the mGuard should remain possible while the RADIUS server password is being changed Pro ceed as follows to ensure this Setup the RADIUS server on the mGuard a second time with a new password e Also set this new password on the RADIUS server Delete the line with the old password on the mGuard 6 5 4 Authentication gt gt Certificates Authentication is a fundamental element of secure communication The X 509 authentication procedure ensures that the correct partners communicate with each other Certificates are used in this process An incorrect communication partner is one who falsely identifies themselves as someone they are not see glossary under X 509 Certificate A certificate is used as proof of authentication for its owner The relevant authorizing party in this case is the CA Certificate Authority The digital signature on the certificate is made by the CA By providing this signature the CA confirms that the authorized certificate owner possesses a private key that corresponds to the public key in the certificate The name of the certificate provider is shown as ssuer on the certificate whilst the name of the certificate owner is shown a
92. are set to allow all connections via this VPN connection However the extended firewall settings defined above see Network Security menu on page 6 138 Network Security gt gt Packet Filter on page 6 138 Advanced on page 6 147 apply independently for each individual VPN connection If multiple firewall rules are set they will be searched in the order in which they are listed top down until a suitable rule is found This rule is then applied If there are other suitable rules further down the list these are ignored In Stealth mode the actual IP address used by the client should be used in the firewall rules or it should be left at 0 0 0 0 0 only one client can be addressed through the tunnel On the Global tab page if the Allow packet forwarding between VPN connections switch is set to Yes the rules under Incoming will be applied to the data packets coming into the mGuard and the rules under Outgoing will be applied to the data packets going out ws we E E If the outgoing data packets are included in the same connection definition in a defined VPN connection group then the firewall rules for Incoming and Outgoing for the same connection definition are used If a different VPN connection definition applies to the outgoing data packets then the firewall rules for Outgoing for this other connection definition are used If the mGuard has been configured so that it forwards the p
93. as follows Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access HTTPS Web Access Enable HTTPS remote To enable HTTPS remote access set this option to Yes In access Yes No ternal HTTPS remote access i e from the directly connected LAN or from the directly connected computer can be made independently of this switch setting You must define the firewall rules for the available interfaces on this page under Allowed Networks in order to specify differentiated access possibilities to the mGuard Additionally the authentication rules under User authentication must be set if necessary 6 22 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access continued Remote HTTPS Default 443 TCP Port If this port number is changed the new port number only applies for access over the External External 2 VPN and Dial in interface Port number 443 still applies for internal access The remote peer that makes remote access must if neces sary enter the port number defined here during entry of the address after the IP address Example If this mGuard is accessible over the Internet under the ad dress 123 124 125 21 and the port number 443 has been set for remote access then you do not need to enter this port num ber after the address in the web browser on the remote peer If another port number is used it is entered behind the IP address e g https 123 124 125 21 442 a The
94. as long as no packets with flags belonging to the connection are sent This setting applies to all TCP packets without flags The Yes setting thus weakens the security functions provided by the mGuard With this option you can control which ICMP messages from the external network are accepted by the mGuard via the primary secondary external interface Regardless of this setting incoming ICMP packets are always accepted if SNMP access is enabled Drop All ICMP messages directed to the mGuard are dropped Allow ping requests Only ping messages sent to the mGuard ICMP type 8 are accepted Allow all ICMPs All ICMP messages to the mGuard are accepted Yes No The GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP is used by GVRP capable switches to exchange configuration information When set to Yes GVRP frames are allowed to pass through the mGuard in Stealth mode Yes No The Spanning Tree Protocol STP 802 1d is used by bridges and switches to detect and consider loops in the network topology When set to Yes STP frames are allowed to pass through the mGuard in Stealth mode 6 148 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Advanced continued Allow forwarding of DHCP frames Connection Tracking Maximum table size Allow TCP connections upon SYN only Timeout for established TCP connections Timeout for closed TCP connections Yes No
95. be operated with a DC voltage of 9 6 60 V DC max 1 A or with an AC voltage of 18 30 V AC max 1 A Use the 24 V and 0 V pins to connect the DC voltage Operating voltage NEC Class 2 power source 12 V DC or 24 V DC 25 33 Safety extra low voltage SELV PELV decoupled redundant entries Max 5A min 10 ms buffer time at 24 V DC Redundant power supply Redundant power supplies are supported Both inputs are decoupled There is no load distribution With a redundant supply only the power supply unit with the higher output voltage supplies the EAGLE mGuard The supply voltage is electrically isolated from the housing Startup e Start the EAGLE mGuard by connecting the supply voltage via the 6 pin terminal block e Lock the terminal block with the locking screw at the side 4 24 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup Signal contact A WARNING The signal contact may only be connected to PELV circuits or SELV circuits with voltage restrictions in accordance with EN 60950 1 The signal contact is used to monitor the functions of the EAGLE mGuard and thereby allows remote diagnosis The following is reported through interruption of the contact using the potential free signal contact relay contact closed current circuit The failure of at least one of the two supply voltages A permanent fault on the EAGLE mGuard internal 3 3 V DC voltage supply voltage 1 or 2 lt 9 6 V etc
96. cable CAT5 which is not included in the delivery e Connect the internal network interface LAN 1 of the mGuard to the corresponding Ethernet network card of the configuration computer or to a valid network connection of the internal network LAN 4 3 3 Service contacts WARNING The service contacts GND CMD CMD V ACK must not be connected to an external voltage source but must be connected as described here Note that with firmware version 7 4 only the Service 1 contacts are assigned The Service 2 contacts will be available with a later firmware version NYY r EON SLY Ny aa ae Slle l elele Z e el ele s lelelele f e e elele 8 a x 9 9 x x 9 a x g amp E ce gf EEEF f top view F top view SN ON ON af oye OY oN ON Se ON as ii e 2 v si le elele Z e e lel le sillelelele Z e e lel le Es 2 ES 9 A x o 9 amp 9 a 9 A f e amp S Fd mGuard rs4000 mGuard rs2000 A pushbutton or an on off switch e g key switch can be connected between the CMD V and CMD service contacts A standard lamp 24 V can be connected between the ACK and GND contacts The contact is short circuit proof and supplies a maximum of 250 mA The pushbutton or on off switch is used for establishing and disabling a previously defined VPN connection The output displays
97. case SEC Stick remote access must also be enabled next switch Enable SEC Stick Yes enables the SEC Stick remote access remote access Remote SEC Stick Default 22002 TCP Port If this port number is changed the new port number only applies for access over the External External 2 or VPN interfaces Port number 22002 still applies for internal access 6 210 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration SEC Stick gt gt Global gt gt Access continued Delay between Default 120 seconds requests for a sign of life Values between 0 and 3600 seconds can be set Positive values mean that the mGuard sends a request to the peer within the encrypted SSH connection to see whether it is still accessible This means that the mGuard sends a request to the peer within the encrypted SSH connection to see whether itis still accessible The request is sent when no activity from the peer is detected for the specified period for example as a result of network traffic within the encrypted connection As the number of sessions that can be open at the same time is limited see Maximum number of simultaneous sessions for all users it is important to close sessions that are finished Therefore from version 7 4 0 on the request for a sign of life has the default value of 120 seconds With a maximum of three requests for a sign of life a finished session will be discovered after six minutes and removed In previous versions the defau
98. cece sees seaeeeaeetaeeeeeeeeeaeeseeseeeeteeeeaeeeaeeea 10 3 10 4 mGuard SMart niseni i i ee le i ee 10 4 10 5 rmG uard smaltem iis oh See rn aie hen a eae 10 5 10 6 MGUArdIPCh is aiciect cece dare a eee eee ate aa 10 6 t07 mM uard blades tess is tele lvien webct ential aia iaiaaeaia iiSi 10 7 10 8 EAGLE MGUArd s sectia rete a ea atin AT aeaa aia aah cient echeted toe 10 8 10 9 mGuarddelta c c0 dinishanwdiive dander alan Ga anaes 10 9 iv INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Introduction 1 Introduction Network features Firewall features Anti virus features The mGuard protects IP data connections In doing this the device incorporates the following functions Network card mGuard pci and switch mGuard delta VPN router VPN Virtual Private Network for the secure transfer of data via public networks hardware based DES 3DES and AES encryption IPsec protocol Configurable firewall for protection against unauthorized access The dynamic packet filter inspects data packets using the source and destination addresses and blocks undesired data traffic The device can be easily configured using a web browser Further information can be found on the Innominate website www innominate com Stealth Auto Static Multi Router Static DHCP Client PPPoE for DSL PPTP for DSL and Modem modes VLAN DHCP Server Relay on internal and external network interfaces DNS cache on the internal networ
99. certificate but the Remote Certificate below Remote Certificate Subject CN VPN Endpunkt Maschine 06 L L O Beispiel Lieferant C DE Subject Alternative Names Issuer CN VPN SubCA 01 0 BeispielLieferant C DE Validity From Mar 20 18 38 09 2007 GMT to Mar 20 18 38 09 2010 GMT Fingerprint MDS 11 73 7D 98 89 6F AB DB 23 A1 22 06 A2 68 79 EC SHA1 E9 14 0A 50 84 36 62 C5S B0 2F 1F A7 FB 1E 89 47 30 53 BC B8 Filename pem 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 195 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt Authentication Local X 509 Certificate Defines which machine certificate the mGuard uses as authentication to the VPN remote peer Select one of the machine certificates from the selection list The selection list gives a selection of machine certificates that are loaded in the mGuard under the Authentication gt gt Certificates menu see page 6 122 If None is displayed then a certificate must be installed first The None entry must not be left in place as this results in no X 509 authentication How the mGuard authenticates the remote peer The following definition relates to how the mGuard verifies the authentication of the VPN remote peer The table below shows which certificates must be provided for the mGuard to authenticate the VPN remote peer if the peer displays one of the following certificate types on connection A machine certificate signed by a CA A self si
100. checkbox is enabled so that the relevant log entries are displayed the Jump to firewall rule search field is displayed under the Reload logs button Proceed as follows if you want to trace the firewall rule referenced by a log entry in the Network Security category that resulted in the corresponding event 1 Mark the section that contains the log ID and number in the relevant log entry g 06 734 89 181 i z a17 cdeei igal te cop Connon 7 CFS integrity checking V Psecven 7 2 Copy this section into the Jump to firewall rule field via the clipboard 3 Click on the Lookup button The configuration page containing the firewall rule that the log entry refers to is displayed Blade In addition to error messages the following messages are output on the mGuard blade controller The areas enclosed by lt and gt are replaced by the respective data in the log entries blade daemon lt version gt starting Blade lt bladenr gt online Blade lt bladenr gt is mute Blade lt bladenr gt not running Reading timestamp from blade lt bladenr gt Push configuration to blade lt bladenr gt reconfiguration of blade lt bladenr gt returned lt returncode gt blade lt bladenr gt lt text gt Pull configuration from blade lt bladenr gt Pull configuration from blade lt bladenr gt returned lt returncode gt 6 244 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration CIFS AV Scan Connector
101. echo requests If all targets of one set must respond is selected then both targets must answer If no secondary target is specified then only the primary target must answer If Ethernet link detection only is selected then only the state of the Ethernet connection is checked Primary targets for This is an unsorted list of IP addresses used as targets for ICMP echo requests ICMP echo requests We recommend using the IP addresses from routers especially the IP addresses from default gate ways or the actual IP address of the other mGuard Default 10 0 0 30 10 0 0 31 for new addresses Each set of targets for the state synchronization can contain a maximum of ten targets 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 233 mGuard 7 4 Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Connectivity Checks continued Internal interface Secondary targets for ICMP echo requests Kind of check Primary targets for ICMP echo requests Secondary targets for ICMP echo requests See above Only used when the check of the primary targets has failed Failure of a secondary target is not detected in normal oper ation Default 10 0 0 30 10 0 0 31 for new addresses Each set of targets for the state synchronization can contain a maximum of ten targets Specifies whether a connectivity check is made on the inter nal interface and how The settings are the same as those for the external interface See above Factory default
102. eect eeeeteee eee eeeeeeeeteaeeseeteaeeteeeeaeeenaeee 4 28 4104 Driver mode uwi c 4 5 0 gee aia ol Melina erica 4 28 4 10 2 Power over PCl Mode 0 0 eeeeceeecceeneeeeeeteneeeeeeeeaeeteeseaeeeeeseeeeieeenaees 4 30 4 10 3 Hardware installation ee eeeeeeeseeeeesneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeersaes 4 32 4 10 4 Driver installation aiiiar iieiaei padaan 4 33 5 Preparing the Configuration vvese nsec5 scecgacies tended vacocs deuce sang aves ades Spach veecisleceleugeeuroevasachemsepiasdes venue 5 1 5 1 Connection requirements ccceeceeeseeeneeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaeeseaeesieeeneeesieeeeeeeaas 5 1 5 2 Easy Initial Setup EIS Local configuration at startup cccceeeeeeeeeeee 5 3 5 2 1 Configuring the mGuard at startup default Stealth mode 5 4 5 2 2 Configuring the mGuard at startup default Router mode 5 9 5 2 3 Configuring the mGuard pci at StartUp seeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeerreererrnes 5 10 5 3 Setting up a local configuration CONNECTION eeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeneeteeteteeeeeeeted 5 12 5 4 Remote configuration marssima nei aii ne cet eee 5 14 6 HONMQUIATIOM neni ccs hs stent Ses eh ee ie a aes wl an arden stun aM ie Nl dal os 6 1 6 1 Opetation 25 fina Me ae ee ae ha eae 6 1 6 2 Management Menu i2 cei wii ek Andie eit 6 4 6 2 1 Management gt gt System Settings oo eeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeaes 6 4 6 2 2 Management gt gt Web Settings ccccee
103. ef d9 5e 43 7f c1 64 80 fd 9f 50 41 6b 70 73 80 48 90 13 58 bf f0 4c b9 90 32 81 59 18 16 3f 19 74 5f 1 1 68 36 85 16 1c a9 af fa a9 a8 7b 44 85 79 b5 f1 20 d3 25 7d 1c de 68 15 0c b6 bc 59 46 0a d8 99 4e 07 50 0a 5d 83 61 d4 db c9 7d c3 2e eb 0a 8F 62 8f 7e 00 1 37 67 3f 36 d5 04 38 44 44 77 e9 f0 b4 95 f5 f9 34 9f f8 43 Exponent 65537 0x10001 X509v3 extensions X509v3 Subject Alternative Name email xyz anywhere com Netscape Comment mod_ssl generated test server certificate Netscape Cert Type SSL Server Signature Algorithm md5WithRSAEncryption 12 ed f7 b3 5e a0 93 3f a0 1d 60 cb 47 19 7d 15 59 9b 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 9 5 mGuard 7 4 Subnet mask 3b 2c a8 a3 6a 03 43 d0 85 d3 86 86 2f e3 aa 79 39 e7 82 20 ed f4 1 1 85 a3 41 5e 5 8d 36 a2 7 1 b6 6a 08 f9 cc 1e da c4 78 05 75 8f 9b 10 0 15 f0 9e 67 a0 4e a1 4d 3f 16 4c 9b 19 56 6a f2 af 89 54 52 4a 06 34 42 0d d5 40 25 6b b0 c0 a2 03 1 8 cd d1 07 20 b6 e5 c5 1e 21 44 e7 c5 09 d2 d5 94 9d 6c 13 07 2f 3b 7c 4c 64 90 bf ff 8e The Subject Distinguished Name or Subject clearly identifies the certificate owner The entry is comprised of several components These are known as attributes see the sample certificate above The following table contains a list of possible attributes The sequence of attributes in a X 509 certificate can vary Table 9 1 X 509 Certificate Abbreviation Name Explanation CN Common Name Identi
104. entries are allowed in the certificate displayed by the SSH client It is then no longer necessary to identify or define the subject in the certificate Limitation to certain subjects individuals or to subjects that have certain attributes In the certificate the certificate owner is entered in the Subject field The entry is com prised of several attributes These attributes are either expressed as an Object Identifier e g 132 3 7 32 1 or more commonly as an abbreviation with a relevant value Example CN John Smith O Smith and Co C UK If certain subject attributes have very specific values for the acceptance of the SSH client by the mGuard then these must be specified accordingly The values of the other freely selectable attributes are entered using the wildcard Example CN O C UK with or without spaces between attributes In this example the attribute C UK must be entered in the certificate under Subject Only then does the mGuard accept the certificate owner subject as a communication partner The other attributes in the certificates to be filtered can have freely selectable values If a subject filter is set the number but not the sequence of the entered attributes must correspond to those of the certificates for which the filter is to be used Pay attention to capitalization Several filters can be set and their sequence is irrelevant 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE
105. following applies only to certain protocols which are based on UDP Data always flows in both directions on TCP connections 7 8 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy If the firewall of the mGuard is arranged so that it only accepts data packets from the initiator then the firewall will accept all related answers This is irrespective of whether a firewall rule is available or not It is feasible that the mGuard has allowed the initiating data packet to pass and has then failed before the corresponding connection entry has been made in the other mGuard The other mGuard may then reject the answers as soon as it becomes the active mGuard The mGuard cannot correct this situation due to the unidirectional connection As a countermeasure the firewall can be configured so that the connection can be established in both directions This is normally already managed through the protocol layer and does not need to be assigned additionally Loss of data packets during state synchronization If data packets are lost during state synchronization then this is detected automatically by the mGuard which then requests the active mGuard to send the data again This request must be answered within a certain time otherwise the mGuard on standby is assigned the outdated state and asks the active mGuard for a complete copy of all state information The response time is calculated automatically from the fail over switching time This is lon
106. for other purposes see Modem Console on page 6 96 Modem Built in Modem If you select one of these options the secondary external interface will be used to transfer data permanently or temporarily into the external network WAN The secondary external interface is formed by the serial port of the mGuard and an external modem connected to it permanent temporary After selecting the Modem or Built in Modem network mode for the secondary external interface you must specify the operation mode of the secondary external interface Operation Mode permanent v Secondary External Routes P gt X r 192 168 3 0 24 gateway permanent Secondary External Routes Data packets whose destination corresponds to the routing settings defined for the secondary external interface are always routed over this external interface The secondary external interface is always activated temporary Data packets whose destination corresponds to the routing settings defined for the secondary external interface are only routed over this external interface when additional conditions to be defined are fulfilled Only then is the secondary external interface activated and the routing settings for the secondary external interface become effective see Probes for Activation on page 6 75 Network Here you make the entries for the routing to the external net work You can make multiple routing entries Data packets in tended for thes
107. for the mGuard rs2000 The DHCP server is also operational in Stealth mode IP configuration for Windows computers When you start the mGuard DHCP server you can configure the locally connected computers so that they obtain IP addresses automatically e Select Control Panel Network Connections in the Start menu e Right click on the LAN adapter icon then click on Properties in the pop up menu e Inthe General tab page select Internet Protocol TCP IP under This connection uses the following items then click on Properties e Make the appropriate entries or settings in the Internet Protocol Properties TCP IP dialog 6 4 4 1 Internal External DHCP Network DHCP Internal DHCP External DHCP Mode Network gt gt DHCP gt gt Internal DHCP Mode DHCP mode Disabled Server Relay Set this option to Server if the mGuard should function as an independent DHCP server The selection settings are then displayed at the bottom of the tab page see Server Set the option to Relay if the mGuard should forward DHCP queries to another DHCP server The selection settings are then displayed at the bottom of the tab page see Relay The Relay DHCP mode is not supported in Stealth mode If Stealth mode is in operation on the mGuard and Relay DHCP mode is selected then this setting is ignored However DHCP queries from the computer and
108. from the selection list The selection list shows the remote certificates that were loaded in the mGuard under the Authentication gt gt Certificates menu All users root admin netadmin audit Filter which defines that the SSH client has to have certain administration level authentication in order to gain access During connection the SSH client shows its certificate and also the system user for which the SSH session is to be opened root admin netadmin audit Access is only granted when the entries match those defined here Access for all listed system users is possible when All users is set B The netadmin and audit settings relate to access rights with the Innominate Device Manager 6 20 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 2 2 Management gt gt Web Settings 6 2 2 1 General Management Web Settings General I2 Access General Language English Session Timeout seconds 1800 Scope of the Apply button Per Session w Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt General General Language If automatic is selected from the list of languages the device uses the language setting of the system browser Session Timeout Specifies the time interval of inactivity in seconds after seconds which the user will be logged out automatically Possible values 15 to 86400 24 hours Scope of the Apply The Per Page setting specifies that you have to click button the
109. gt DNS gt gt DNS server DNS If the mGuard has to initiate a connection on its own to a remote peer e g a VPN gateway or NTP server and it is defined in hostname form i e www example com the mGuard has to determine which IP address belongs to the hostname To do this the mGuard connects to a Domain Name Server DNS to query the related IP address there The IP address determined for the hostname is stored in the cache so that it can be found directly i e more quickly for other hostname resolutions With the Local Resolving of Hostnames function the mGuard can also be configured to respond to DNS queries for locally used hostnames itself by accessing an internal previously configured directory The locally connected clients can be configured manually or via DHCP so that the local address of the mGuard is used as the address of the DNS server to be used If the mGuard is operated in Stealth mode the management IP address of the mGuard if this is configured must be used for the clients or the IP address 1 1 1 1 must be entered as the local address of the mGuard Servers to query DNS Root Servers Queries are sent to the root servers in the Internet whose IP addresses are stored in the mGuard These addresses rarely change Provider defined e g via PPPoE or DHCP The domain name servers of the Internet Service Provider that provide access to the Internet are used Only select this setting if the mGuard is operated
110. if VPN connections are established using PPTP from local computers to external computers without mGuard assistance Must be set to Yes if GRE packets have to be forwarded from internal to external Yes No default No Protocol used for communication meetings between two or more participants Used for audio visual transfers This protocol is older than SIP Yes No default No The SIP Session Initiation Protocol is used for communica tion meetings between two or more participants Often used during IP telephony By selecting Yes it is possible for the mGuard to monitor the SIP and add necessary firewall rules dynamically if further communication channels are established in the same session When NAT is also activated one or more locally connected computers can communicate with external computers by SIP through the mGuard 6 150 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 6 1 6 Firewall of mGuard rs2000 The mGuard rs2000 has a simple 2 click firewall It either completely allows all incoming and outgoing connections or completely rejects all connections There are no other setting options Additionally accesses via this firewall are not logged see Chapter 6 12 2 Logging gt gt Browse local logs The following firewall function is available when you use the mGuard rs2000 Network Security Packet Filter Incoming Rules Outgoing Rules Incoming General firewall se
111. if the mGuard is operated in Router mode and establishes the connection to the Internet see Network gt gt NAT on page 6 103 Only then can the computers in the connected local network access the Internet over the mGuard If NAT is not activated it is possible that only VPN connections can be used In the Router network mode a secondary external interface can also be configured see Secondary External Interface on page 6 71 There are several router modes depending on the Internet connection static DHCP PPPoE PPPT Modem Built in Modem 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 65 mGuard 7 4 Router Mode static The IP address is set permanently Router Mode DHCP The IP address is assigned via DHCP Router Mode PPPoE PPPoE mode corresponds to the Router mode with DHCP with one difference The PPPoE protocol which is used by many DSL modems for DSL Internet access is used for connecting to the external network Internet or WAN The external IP address that the mGuard uses for access from remote peers is assigned by the Internet Service Provider If the mGuard is operated in PPPoE mode it must be set as the default gateway in the connected local computers In other words the IP address of the mGuard LAN port must be entered as the default gateway on these computers If the mGuard is operated in PPPoE mode NAT must be activated in order to gain access to the
112. in PPPoE PPTP Modem mode or in Router mode with DHCP User defined servers listed below If this setting is selected the mGuard will connect to the domain name servers shown in the list of User defined name servers User defined name You can enter the IP addresses of domain name servers in servers this list If these should be used by the mGuard select the option User defined servers listed below under Servers to query 6 108 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt DNS gt gt DNS server continued Local Resolving of You can configure multiple entries with assignment pairs of hostnames and IP addresses Hostnames for various domain names You have the option to define change edit and delete assignment pairs of hostnames and IP addresses You can also activate or deactivate the resolving of hostnames for a domain You can also delete a domain with all its assignment pairs Create a table with assignment pairs for a domain Open a new row and click on Edit in this row Change or delete assignment pairs belonging to a domain e Click on Edit in the relevant table row After clicking on Edit the DNS Records tab page is displayed DNS Records Local Resolving of Hostnames Domain forthe hosts example local Enabled Yes w Resolve IP Addresses also Yes v Hostnames A O Ss i ee p host 3600 192 168 1 1 Domain for the hosts Any name can be entered but it must adhere to the
113. industrial RS mGuard industrial RS mGuard industrial RS Lower terminal block a ee ee aes a _ _ 1 CMDACK TIPRING x l alle al With ISDN terminal With analog modem WITHOUT modem ISDN Fig 4 7 mGuard industrial rs Lower terminal block Lower area on Serice front faceplate with gt L CMDACK terminal block Function grounding Signal contact interrupted if errors occur Pushbutton or on off switch Wi lt Signal LED 20 mA Service contacts _ CMD ACK for establishing a predefined VPN connection Fig 4 8 mGuard industrial rs without modem ISDN terminal adapter 4 16 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup Lower area on Service Anale front faceplate with A L CMDACK TIPRING terminal block Function grounding Signal contact Service contacts Telephone line as above as above as above analog connection Fig 4 9 mGuard industrial rs with modem Lower area on Service ISDN Line front faceplate with I L CMDACK TX TX RX RX terminal block Function grounding Signal contact Service contacts as above as above as above Fig 4 10 mGuard industrial rs with ISDN terminal adapter Function grounding The function grounding can be used by the operator This connection is electrically connected to the rear side of the mGuard industrial rs The mGuard industrial rs is grounded during the assembly on a mounting rail with
114. is available in Stealth mode on the local interface LAN of the mGuard Enabled HiDiscovery protocol is activated Read only HiDiscovery protocol is activated but the mGuard cannot be configured using it Disabled HiDiscovery protocol is deactivated If this option is set to Yes then HiDiscovery frames are forwarded from the internal LAN port externally over the WAN port Signal Contact Management System Settings Host Mode Operation supervision Manual settings Contact Closed Signal contact Operation supervision Link supervision Supervise both ports Signal Contact Time and Date ShellAccess v Contact Closed Ok Redundant power supply Supervise v v The signal contact is a relay which is used by the mGuard to signal error conditions see also Signal contact on page 4 17 and Signal contact on page 4 25 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Signal Contact Mode Signal contact Operation supervision Contact Redundant power supply only mGuard industrial rs EAGLE mGuard The signal contact can be controlled automatically by the mGuard using Operation supervision default or Manual settings See also Installing the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 on page 4 4 Installing the mGuard industrial rs on page 4 13 and Installing the EAGLE mGuard on page 4 24 Displays the state of the signal contact Either Open Error or Closed OK If
115. is refused If required you can specify the monitoring possibilities ATTENTION If you want to refuse access over Internal VPN or Dial in you must implement this explicitly through corresponding firewall rules by specifying Drop as an action for example To avoid locking yourself out you may have to si multaneously allow access over another interface explicitly with Accept before you make the new setting effective by clicking the Apply button Oth erwise if you are locked out you must perform the recovery procedure Accept means that data packets may pass through Reject means that the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been rejected In Ste alth mode Reject has the same effect as Drop Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Freely selectable comment for this rule For each individual firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default External 2 and Dial in are only for devices with serial ports See Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 45 mGuard 7 4 6 2 6 2 Trap DP cum rao 2 woe 5 Basic traps SNMP authentication Yes v Link Up Down Yes v Coldstat Yes v Admin access SSH HTTPS Yes v new DHCP clie
116. lit up Additionally the P1 P2 status displays light up green and the STAT status display flashes green heartbeat 4 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup Redundant voltage display mGuard rs4000 Redundant power supplies are supported Both inputs are decoupled There is no load distribution With a redundant supply only the power supply unit with the higher output voltage supplies the mGuard rs4000 The supply voltage is electrically isolated from the housing In case of a non redundant voltage supply the mGuard rs4000 indicates the failure of the supply voltage over the signal contact You can prevent this signal by connecting the supply voltage to both inputs 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 7 mGuard 7 4 4 4 Installing and booting the mGuard centerport Rear side Unspecified connections sockets not used Optional Dedicated interface for synchronization on redundancy Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX LAN WAN 2 x USB ports 2 x power supply mains sockets COM1 2 x USB ports Redundant wide range AC power supply unit Serial console modem 100 240 V AC power source VGA connection Fig 4 3 mGuard centerport rear side 4 4 1 Connecting the device 1 Optional The device can be installed in a 19 industrial cabinet see Housing on page 4 10 2 Connect both power supply units to the mains power or the power source 100 240 V AC via the two mains sockets 3 Establish the network connect
117. location and click on Next 4 Click on Next 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 35 mGuard 7 4 Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard Er Innominate mGuardPCl Windows has finished installing the software for this device 5 PES tre x 6 The Microsoft digital signature affirms that software has been tested with Windows and that the software has not been altered since it was tested The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature Therefore there is no guarantee that this software works correctly with Windows Innominate mGuardPCl If you want to search for Microsoft digitally signed software visit the Windows Update Web site at http windowsupdate microsoft com to see if one is available Do you want to continue the installation No More Info To close this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel Fig 4 25 Driver installation in Windows 2000 2 5 Click on Yes 6 Click on Finish In Linux The Linux driver is available as a source archive and must be compiled before usage e First set up and compile the Linux kernel 2 4 25 in the ust src linux directory Unpack the driver from the ZIP archive to usr src pci driver Execute the following commands cd usr src pci driver make LINUXDIR usr src linux install m0644 mguard o lib modules 2 4 25 kernel drivers net depmod a
118. mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Modem Console rr two simple quotation marks placed directly after one another d dATH OK a Handle modem Yes No transparently for dial in only If the external modem is used for dialing in see page 6 93 then a Yes setting means that the mGuard does not initialize the modem The subsequently configured modem initializa tion sequence is not considered Thus either a modem is connected which can answer calls itself default profile of the modem contains auto answer or a null modem cable to a computer can be used instead of the modem and the PPP protocol is used over this Modem init string The initialization sequence that is sent by the mGuard to the connected modem Default d dATH OK If necessary consult the modem manual for the initialization sequence The initialization sequence is a sequence of character strings expected by the modem and commands that are then sent to the modem so that the modem can establish a connection The preset initialization sequence has the following meaning The empty character string inside the quotation marks means that the mGuard does not initially expect any information from the connected modem but rather sends the following text directly to the modem The mGuard sends this character string to the modem in order to establish the readiness of the modem for accepting commands Specifies that the
119. mGuard expects the OK character string from the modem as an answer to d dATH With many modem types it is possible to save modem settings in the modem itself However this option should not be used Initialization settings should be set externally instead i e through the mGuard In case of a modem breakdown the modem can then be replaced quickly without changing the modem settings If the external modem is to be used for dial ins without the modem settings being entered accordingly then you have to inform the modem that it should accept incoming calls after it rings If you are using the extended HAYES instruction set you add the character string AT amp SO 1 OK a space followed by AT amp SO 1 followed by a space followed by ok to the initialization sequence Some external modems depending on their factory defaults require a physical connection with the DTR cable of the serial port in order to operate correctly Because the mGuard models do not provide this cable on the external serial port you must add the character string AT amp DO OK a space followed by AT amp DO followed by a space followed by ok to the above initialization sequence In accordance with the extended HAYES instruction set this sequence means that the modem does not use the DTR cable 6 98 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration If the external modem is to be used for dial outs
120. made if the firewall rules permit this access Often The mGuard is configured to make contact with a HTTPS server at regular intervals in order to download any configuration profile available there see Management gt gt Central Management on page 6 53 When No is selected the mGuard establishes a telephone connection using a connected modem as soon as possible after a reboot or activation of the Modem network mode This remains permanently in place regardless of whether data is transferred or not If the telephone connection is then interrupted the mGuard attempts to restore it immediately Thus a permanent connection is made like a dedicated line By doing this the mGuard is constantly available externally i e for incoming data packets Idle timeout Yes No Only considered when Dial on demand is set to Yes When Yes default is set the mGuard terminates the tele phone connection as soon as no data transfer takes place over the defined dle time The mGuard gives the connected modem the relevant command for terminating the telephone connection When No is set the mGuard gives the connected modem no command for terminating the telephone connection 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 91 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial out continued Idle time Seconds Local IP Remote IP Netmask Default 300 If no data traffic is made after the time specified here the mGuard can terminate
121. must be obtained first for outgoing calls by dialing a certain number e g 0 before the desired telephone number can be dialed Example ATDOW765432 T Change to tone dialing Set the special dial character T before the dialed number if the faster tone dialing procedure should be used only with tone compatible telephone connections Example ATDT765432 PAP CHAP None PAP Password Authentication Protocol CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol These are procedures used for the secure transfer of authentication data over Point to Point Protocol If the ISP requires the user to login using user name and password then PAP or CHAP is used as the authentication procedure The user name password and any other entries needed for the user to access the Internet are given to the user by the ISP The relevant fields are displayed depending on whether PAP CHAP or None is selected Enter the relevant data in these fields If authentication is made via PAP Authentication User name Password PAP server authentication Dial on demand Idle timeout Idle time seconds Local IP Remote IP Netmask User Name Password PAP server authentication Server user name Server password PAP 300 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 User name entered during ISP login to access the Internet Password entered during ISP login to access the Internet Yes No The following two fields appear when Yes is selected
122. necessary see Connection options on lower terminal block on page 4 16 The screws on the screw terminals must be tightened to at least 0 22 Nm Wait before inserting the terminal block Attach the mGuard industrial rs onto a grounded 35 mm mounting rail according to DIN EN 60715 The device conducts the grounding from the mounting rail through to the left contact grounding connection on the lower terminal block Fig 4 6 Attaching the mGuard industrial rs to a mounting rail Attach the upper snap on guide of the mGuard industrial rs to the mounting rail and press the mGuard industrial rs down onto the rail until it locks into position Insert the wired terminal block Connect the power supply to the top of the terminal block see Connecting to the power supply on page 4 14 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 13 mGuard 7 4 Disassembly e Make the necessary network connections on the LAN or WAN port see Connecting to the network on page 4 15 e If necessary connect the relevant device to the serial port see Serial port on page 4 19 Remove or disconnect the connections To remove the mGuard industrial rs from the mounting rail insert a screwdriver horizontally under the housing into the locking slide pull it downwards without tipping the screwdriver and lift the mGuard industrial rs upwards 4 5 2 Connecting to the power supply WARNING The mGuard industrial rs is designed for
123. no longer necessary to identify or define the subject in the certificate Limitation to certain subjects In the certificate the certificate owner is entered in the Subject field The entry is com prised of several attributes These attributes are either expressed as an Object Identifier e g 132 3 7 32 1 or more commonly as an abbreviation with a relevant value Example CN VPN end point 01 O Smith and Co C UK If certain subject attributes are to have very specific values so that the VPN remote peer is accepted by the mGuard then these must be specified accordingly The values of the other freely selectable attributes are entered using the wildcard Example CN O Smith and Co C UK with or without spaces between attributes In this example the attribute C UK and O Smith and Co must be entered in the certificate under subject Only then does the mGuard accept the certificate owner subject as a communication partner The other attributes in the certificates to be filtered can have freely selectable values If a subject filter is set the number and sequence of the entered attributes must correspond to those of the certificates where the filter is used Pay attention to capitalization 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 199 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt Authentication continued VPN Identifier Authentication method Pre Shared Secret PSK IPsec VPN Conne
124. on mGuard centerport The Ring Network Coupling function is supported with restrictions on mGuard delta The internal switch ports cannot be switched off mGuard pci In Driver mode the internal network interface cannot be switched off although this should be possible in Power over PCI mode 7 26 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware 8 Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware mGuard smart mGuard pci mGuard blade The Rescue button is used to perform the following procedures on the devices shown in figure 8 1 Performing a restart Performing a recovery procedure Flashing the firmware rescue procedure m Guard industrial rs mGuard delta mGuard rs4000 mGuard rs2000 Fig 8 1 Rescue button The mGuard centerport is equipped with a RESET button which is used for restarting the system see Chapter 3 Control Elements and Displays mGuard rs4000 rs2000 on page 3 1 On the mGuard centerport the rescue procedure and subsequent reloading of the mGuard firmware is triggered in the boot menu 8 1 Performing a restart Objective The device is restarted with the configured settings Action mGuard centerport Press the RESET button On other mGuards press the Rescue button for approx 1 5 seconds m Guard rs4000 rs2000 mGuard industrial rs Until the error LED lights up mGuard smari Until the middl
125. other The Ethernet packet for a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1Q is extended by 4 bytes with 12 bits available for recording the VLAN ID The VLAN IDs 0 and 4095 are reserved and cannot be used for VLAN identification 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 9 7 mGuard 7 4 VPN Virtual Private Network X 509 Certificate A Virtual Private Network VPN connects several separate private networks subnetworks together via a public network e g the Internet to form a single joint network A cryptographic protocol is used to ensure confidentiality and authenticity A VPN thus offers an economical alternative to using dedicated lines to build a nationwide corporate network A type of seal that certifies the authenticity of a public key gt Asymmetrical encryption and the associated data It is possible to use certification to enable the user of the public key used to encrypt the data to ensure that the received public key is from its actual issuer and thus from the instance that should later receive the data A Certification Authority CA certifies the au thenticity of the public key and the associated link between the identity of the issuer and their key The certification authority will verify authenticity in accordance with its rules For example this may require the issuer of the public key to appear before it in person Once successfully authenticated the CA adds its digital signature to the issuer s public key Th
126. port numbers for the CIFS server have priority over the rules for port forwarding port forwarding is set under Network gt gt NAT Access to the CIFS server is allowed from LAN via dial in and VPN by default and can be restricted or expanded via the firewall rules A different default setting can also be defined using these rules From IP Enter the address of the system or network where remote access is permitted or forbidden in this field IP address 0 0 0 0 0 means all addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see 6 249 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 169 mGuard 7 4 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector continued Interface Action Comment Log Consolidated Imported Enabled Shares Exported in Subdirectory Share 1 External Internal External 2 VPN Dial in Specifies which interface the rules apply to If no rules are set or if no rule takes effect the following default settings apply Remote access is permitted over nternal VPN and Dial in Access over External and External 2 is refused Specify the access possibilities according to your requirements a If you want to refuse access over Internal VPN or Dial in you must implement this explicitly through corresponding firewall rules by specifying Drop as an action for example Accept means that data packets may pass through Reject means that
127. profiles that are stored on the mGuard Activate them Save them to a file on the connected configuration computer Delete them Display them Displaying the configuration profile e Click the name of the configuration profile in the list Applying the factory defaults or a configuration profile stored in the mGuard by the user e Click the Restore button located to the right of the name of the relevant configuration profile The corresponding configuration profile is activated Saving the configuration profile as a file to the configuration computer e Click the Download button located to the right of the relevant configuration profile Specify the file name and folder in which the configuration profile is to be saved as a file in the displayed text field The file name is freely selectable Deleting a configuration profile e Click the Delete button located to the right of the relevant configuration profile The Factory Default profile cannot be deleted Save Current Configuration Saving the current configuration as a configuration profile on the mGuard t Peile Enter the desired profile name in the Name for the new profile field next to Save Current Configuration to Profile e Click on the Save button The configuration profile is saved in the mGuard and the profile name is displayed in the list of profiles saved in the mGuard 6 40 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuratio
128. rules for assigning domain names Is assigned to every hostname Enabled Yes No Switches the function Local Resolving of Hostnames on Yes or off No for the domain entered in the field above Resolve IP Addresses No The mGuard only resolves hostnames i e it supplies the also IP address assigned to hostnames Yes Same as for No It is also possible to get the hostname assigned to an IP address Hostnames The table can have any number of entries A hostname may be assigned to multiple IP addresses Multiple hostnames may be assigned to one IP address TTL Abbreviation of Time To Live Entry in seconds Default 3600 1 hour Defines how long assignment pairs called up may be stored in the cache of the calling computer IP The IP address assigned to the hostname in this table row Delete domain with all Delete the corresponding table entry assignment pairs 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 109 mGuard 7 4 Example Local Resolving The Local Resolving of Hostnames function is used in the following scenario for of Hostnames example A plant operates a number of identically structured machines each one as a cell The local networks of cells A B and C are each connected to the plant network via the Internet using mGuard Each cell contains multiple control elements which can be accessed via their IP addresses Different address ranges are used for each cell A service technician should be able to
129. sent Certain conditions must be met for the states to occur The VPN state synchronization is taken into account here 7 2 3 Error compensation through VPN redundancy VPN redundancy compensates for the exact same errors as firewall redundancy see Error compensation through firewall redundancy on page 7 7 However the VPN section can hinder the other VPN gateways in the event of a network lobotomy The independent mGuards then have the same virtual IP address in order to communicate with the VPN partners This can result in VPN connections being established and disconnected in quick succession 7 16 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy 7 2 4 Setting the variables for VPN redundancy When the required license keys are installed VPN redundancy is automatically activated when firewall redundancy is activated This occurs as soon as Enable redundancy is set to Yes in the Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy menu There is no custom menu for VPN redundancy The existing firewall redundancy variables are expanded Table 7 3 Expanded functions with activated VPN redundancy Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy General Enable redundancy The firewall redundancy and VPN redundancy are enabled or disabled Virtual interfaces External virtual Only in Router network mode IP addresses The mGuard uses the first external virtual IP address as the address from which it sends and rece
130. servers in servers this list The mGuard uses this list for communication over the secondary external interface as long as the interface is activated temporarily and the DNS Mode see above is specified as User defined for this case 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 77 mGuard 7 4 When Router network mode and static router mode are selected see page 6 80 Network Mode Router Factory default for mGuard centerport mGuard delta and mGuard blade controller Network Interfaces Network Status External IP address Active Defaultroute Used DNS servers Network Mode Network Mode Router Mode External Networks External IPs untrusted port Additional External Routes IP of default gateway Internal Networks Internal IPs trusted port Additional Internal Routes Network Mode General Ethernet Dial out Dial in Modem Console Secondary External Interface 172 16 66 49 172 16 66 18 10 1 0 253 Router w static v x 172 16 66 49 255 255 255 0 No v C 172 16 66 18 x 192 168 66 49 255 255 255 0 No v P enwol off v Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Router network mode Internal Networks Internal IPs trusted port IP Netmask Use VLAN The internal IP is the IP address where the mGuard can be accessed by devices on the locally connected network The factory defaults for Router PPPoE PPTP Modem mode are as follows
131. single device known as a NAT router If you communicate externally via a NAT router the internal computers in the local network and their IP ad dresses remain hidden The remote communication partner will only see the NAT router with its own IP address In order to allow internal computers to communicate directly with external systems over the Internet the NAT router must modify the IP datagrams that are passed to and from the internal computers and the remote peers If an IP datagram is sent from the internal network to a remote peer the NAT router modifies the UDP and TCP headers of the datagram It replaces the source IP address and port with its own IP address and an unused port A table is stored in which the original values are listed together with the corresponding new ones When a reply datagram is received the NAT router will recognize that it is intended for an internal computer using the destination port of the datagram Using the table the NAT router will replace the destination IP address and port and then forward the datagram on via the internal network A port number is assigned to each UDP and TCP protocol participant It is then possible to differentiate two UDP or TCP connections between two systems and use them at the same time Fixed port numbers can be reserved for special purposes For example HTTP connections are usually assigned to TCP port 80 and POP3 connections to TCP port 110 PPPoE is an acronym of Point
132. specific trap mGuardTrapSSHLogout mGuardTResSSHUsername mGuardTResSSHRemotelP additional Sent when access to the mGuard via SSH is terminated Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardTrapSenderIndustrial generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapIndustrialPowerStatus 2 additional mGuardTrapIndustrialPowerStatus Sent when the system registers a power outage mGuardTrapSenderIndustrial enterpriseSpecific mGuardTrapSignalRelais 3 mGuardTResSignalRelaisState mGuardTEsSignlalRelaisReason mGuardTResSignal RelaisReasonldx enterprise oid generic trap specific trap additional Sent after the signal contact is changed and displays the current status 0 Off 1 On Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardTrapIndustrial generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapIndustrialTemperature 1 additional mGuardSystemTemperature mGuardTrap ndustrialTempHiLimit mGuardTrapIndustrialLowLimit Displays the temperature when defined limits are exceeded enterprise oid genericTrap specific trap mGuardTrapIndustrial enterpriseSpecific mGuardTrapAutoConfigAdapterState 4 mGuardTrapAutoConfigAdapter Change additional Sent following access to the ECS 6 48 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt SNMP gt gt Trap continued mG
133. switch to the folder where the mGuard image files have been saved install p7s jffs2 img p7s Ifa major release upgrade of the firmware is carried out due to the flash procedure the license file purchased for the update must also be stored here under the name licence lic Ensure that this is the correct license file for the device see Management gt gt Update on page 6 35 Tftpd32 by Ph Jounin 0 x Current Directory E my Browse Server interface fis2t 68 101 v Show Dir Titp Server DHCP server Revd DHCP Discover Msg for IP 0 0 0 0 Mac 00 0C BE 01 00 EB 26 11 09 41 19 694 DHCP proposed address 192 168 10 200 26 11 09 41 19 694 Revd DHCP Rast Msg for IP 0 0 0 0 Mac 00 0C BE 01 00 EB 26 11 09 41 19 704 Previously allocated address acked 26 11 09 41 19 714 Connection received from 192 168 10 200 on port 1024 26 11 09 41 19 774 Read request for file lt install p7s gt Mode octet 26 11 09 41 19 774 lt install p s gt sent 4 blks 2048 bytes in 1 s 0 blk resent 26 11 09 41 20 786 Connection received from 192 168 10 200 on port 1024 26 11 09 43 17 053 Read request for file lt jffs2 img p s gt Mode octet 26 11 09 43 17 053 lt jffs2 img p s gt sent 14614 blks 7482368 bytes in 11 s 0 blk resent 26 11 09 43 28 008 4 Current Action lt jtfs2 img p7s gt sent 14614 biks 7482368 bytes in 11 s 0 blk resent on m Fig 8 3 Entering the host IP 7961_en_04 INNO
134. t f u Wed Nov 9 11 59 00 CET 2011 active 33 The mGuard is actively fing and fiter traffic t s u Thu Oct 27 11 33 40 CEST 2011 active_waiting t 5 Thu Oct 27 11 33 39 CEST 2011 t s u Thu Oct 27 11 33 33 CEST 2011 t s u Thu Oct 27 11 33 33 CEST 2011 t s u Thu Oct 27 11 33 32 CEST 2011 t s u Thu Oct 27 11 33 32 CEST 2011 t s u Thu Oct 27 11 33 32 CEST 2011 t f u Thu Oct 27 11 33 32 CEST 2011 t s u Thu Oct 27 11 31 53 CEST 2011 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 235 mGuard 7 4 Redundancy gt gt FW Redundancy Status gt gt Redundancy Status Current State Status of the Components Availability Check Connectivity Check State Replication Virtual Interface Con troller The following states are possible booting The mGuard is booting faulty The mGuard is not yet connected properly outdated The state synchronization of the databases is not yet up to date on_standby The mGuard is ready for activation if the other mGuard fails becomes_active The mGuard is preparing for activation as the other mGuard has failed active The mGuard is active becomes_standby The mGuard is switching from the active state into standby mode The state is changed to outdated as the status database has to be updated first Relates to the state of the availability check for the internal or external interface The availability check has three possible results
135. the certificates displayed by the users must be configured If the browser of the remote user also provides CA certificates that contribute to building of the chain then it is not necessary for the CA certificate to be installed and referenced at this point However the corresponding root CA certificate must be installed in the mGuard and made available referenced at all times When selecting the CA certificates to be used or when changing the selection or the filter settings you must first select Login with X 509 client certificate or password as the User authentication method and test this before making the new setting effective Only switch to Login restricted to X 509 client certificate when you are sure that this setting works Otherwise you could be locked out of the system Always take this precautionary measure when settings are changed under User authentication 6 28 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access continued X 509 Subject Allows a filter to be set in relation to the contents of the Subject field in the certificate displayed by the browser HTTPS client It is then possible to limit or release access by browser HTTPS clients which the mGuard would accept on the basis of certification checks Limitation to certain subjects i e individuals or to subjects that have certain attributes Release for all subjects s
136. the certificates shown Using the corresponding remote certificate e Select the following entry from the list No CA certificate but the Remote Certificate below e Install the remote certificate under Remote Certificate see Installing the remote certificate on page 6 197 It is not possible to refer to a remote certificate loaded in the Authentication gt gt Certificates menu Installing the remote certificate The remote certificate must be configured if the VPN remote peer should be authenticated using a remote certificate To import a certificate please proceed as follows 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 197 mGuard 7 4 Requirement The certificate file file format pem cer or crt is saved on the connected computer e Click on Browse to select the file e Click on Upload The certificate contents are then displayed IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt Authentication VPN Identifier Authentication method CA certificate The following explanation applies when authentication of the VPN remote peer is made using CA certificates VPN gateways use the VPN Identifier to recognize which configurations belong to the same VPN connection If the mGuard consults CA certificates to authenticate a VPN remote peer then it is possible to use the VPN Identifier as a filter e Make a corresponding entry in the Remote field Local Default Empty You can specify the name that
137. the drive is prepared by the server Click on Edit to make the settings CIFS Integrity Monitoring Importable Shares pc x7 scan Importable Share Identification for Reference Name pc x7 scan Location of the Importable Share IP address of the server 10 1 66 127 Imported share s name C Authentication for mounting the Share Workgroup WORKGROUP Login mguard scan CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares gt gt Edit Identification for Name referencing IP address of the server Location of network drive Imported share s name Name of the network drive to be checked internal name used in the configuration IP address of the server whose network drive should be checked Directory which should be checked on the authorized server shown above 6 158 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares gt gt Edit continued Authentication for connecting the network drive Integrity database Workgroup Name of the workgroup to which the network drive belongs Login Login for the server Password Password for the login 6 7 2 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking In CIFS Integrity Checking Windows network drives are checked as to whether certain files e g exe dll have been changed Changes to these files indicate a virus or unauthorized file access If a checked network drive is reconfigured the
138. the external interface and is used to identify the redundant pair This ID must be the same on both mGuards The ID is used to differentiate the redundant pair from other redundant pairs that are connected to the same Ethernet segment through their external interface Please note that CARP uses the same protocol and port as VRRR Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol The ID set here must be different to the IDs on other devices which use VRRR or CARP and are located in the same Ethernet segment External virtual IP Default 10 0 0 100 addresses Only in Router network mode These are IP addresses which are used by both mGuards as virtual IP addresses on the external interface These IP ad dresses must be the same on both mGuards These addresses are used as a gateway for explicit static routes on devices located in the same Ethernet segment as the external network interface of the mGuard The active mGuard can receive ICMP requests via this IP ad dress It reacts to these ICMP requests depending on the menu settings under Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Advanced No netmasks or VLAN IDs are set up for the virtual IP ad dresses as these attributes are defined by the actual external IP address For every virtual IP address a real IP address must be configured in whose IP network the virtual address fits The mGuard transmits the netmask and VLAN setting from the actual external IP address to the corresponding vir
139. the local network For remote configuration The mGuard must be configured to permit remote configuration The mGuard must be connected i e the required connections must be working mGuard pci For local configuration The computer used for configuration must fulfill the following requirements mQGuard in Driver mode The mGuard pci driver must be installed on the computer mGuard in Power over PCI mode The computer must be connected to the mGuard LAN port or connected to the mGuard over the local network For remote configuration The mGuard must be configured to permit remote configuration The mGuard must be connected i e the required connections must be working 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 5 1 mGuard 7 4 mGuard blade The mGuard blade must be installed inside the mGuard bladebase and at least one of the bladebase power supply units must be on For local configuration The computer used for configuration must either be connected to the LAN socket of the mGuard or connected to the mGuard via the local network For remote configuration The mGuard must be configured to permit remote configuration The mGuard must be connected i e the required connections must be working EAGLE mGuard The EAGLE mGuard must be connected to at least one active power supply unit For local configuration The computer used for configuration must either be connected to the LAN socket of the mGuard or conn
140. the logon remains in place and could be misused by another unauthorized person An interface is unsecure for example if a user logs on over the Internet from a location or a computer to which the IP address is assigned dynamically by the ISP as normally happens for many Internet users If such a connection is temporarily interrupted because the user logged on is being assigned a different IP address this user must logon again However the old logon made under the old IP address remains in place This logon could then be used by an intruder who uses this old IP address of the authorized user and accesses the mGuard using this source address The same thing could also occur if an authorized firewall user forgets to logoff at the end of a session This hazard for logging on via an unsecure interface is not completely removed but the time is limited by setting the configured timeout for the user firewall template used See Timeout type on page 6 155 Interface External Internal External 2 Dial in Specifies which mGuard interfaces firewall users can use to log into the mGuard For the interface selected web access via HTTPS must be enabled Management menu Web Settings Access tab page see Access on page 6 22 In the Stealth network mode both the Internal and External interfaces must be released so that firewall users can logon to the mGuard Two rows must be entered in the table for
141. the redundant pair In Router network modes both mGuards share a MAC address for the virtual network interface connected to the external and internal Ethernet segment In Router network mode the mGuards support forwarding of special UDP TCP ports from a virtual IP address to other IP addresses provided the other IP addresses can be reached by the mGuard In addition the mGuard also masks data with virtual IP addresses when masquerading rules are set up State monitoring State monitoring is used to decide whether the mGuard is active on standby or has an error Each mGuard decides independently on its own state depending on the information provided by other components State monitoring ensures that two mGuards are not active at the same time State display The state display contains detailed information on the firewall redundancy state A summary of the state can be called up using the Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy or Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Connectivity Checks menu 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 3 mGuard 7 4 7 1 2 Interaction of the firewall redundancy components During operation the components work together as follows Both mGuards make ongoing connectivity checks for both network interfaces internal and external In addition an ongoing availability check is made Each mGuard listens continuously for presence notifications CARP and the active mGuard also sends them
142. the results of the ICMP echo requests in chronological order The most recent result is at the top sR indicates a cycle with correctly sent and received ICMP echo requests Missing answers are indicated by a and un sent requests by a _ Results of the second Only visible when a secondary target is set see Secondary ary targets targets for ICMP echo requests on page 6 233 Internal Interface Summarized result See External interface Ethernet link status See External interface Number of check inter See External interface vals Check interval See External interface Timeout per interval See External interface and set of targets Results of the last 16 See External interface intervals youngest first 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 239 mGuard 7 4 6 11 3 Ring Network Coupling B The Ring Network Coupling function is not supported on mMmGuard centerport The Ring Network Coupling function is supported with restrictions on mGuard delta The internal switch ports cannot be switched off mGuard pci In Driver mode the internal network interface cannot be switched off although this should be possible in Power over PCI mode 6 11 3 1 Ring Network Coupling Redundancy Ring Network Coupling Ring Network Coupling Settings Enable Ring Network Coupling Dual Homing bi v Redundancy Port Internal w Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt
143. the telephone connection see above under Idle timeout IP address of the mGuard serial port that now acts as a WAN interface Adopt the preset value if this IP address is assigned dynamically by the ISP 0 0 0 0 Otherwise enter this here i e assignment of a fixed IP address IP address of the remote peer This is the IP address of the ISP used for access when connecting to the Internet As PPP is used for the connection the IP address is not normally specified This means you can use the predefined value 0 0 0 0 The netmask here belongs to both Local and Remote IP addresses Normally all three values Local IP Remote IP and Netmask are set or remain set to 0 0 0 0 Enter the connection settings for an external modem on the Modem Console tab page see Modem Console on page 6 96 6 92 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 4 1 4 Dial in Only for mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta Network Interfaces General Ethernet Dial out Dial in Modem Console PPP dial in options Modem PPP Off v LocaliP 192 168 2 1 Remote IP 192 168 2 2 PPP Login name admin Incoming Rules PPP Log ID w sertal incoming 00000000 0000 0000 0000 000000000000 ES ie erotccot a larron naa trom Port ror rorot action comment to Log entries for unknown connection attempts No v Outgoing Rules PPP Log I0 tw sertat oungoing MN
144. to an error e g the external network is down or the hostname of the remote peer could not be released in an IP address DNS void is also issued as an answer by the CGI interface without an error being present An example of this is when the VPN connection is deactivated according to the configuration No in column and has not been temporarily enabled using the CGI interface or the CMD contact ready The connection is ready to establish channels or allow incoming queries regarding channel set up active At least one channel is set up for the connection Defining VPN connection VPN connection channels Depending on the mGuard network mode the following page appears after clicking Edit 6 182 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 8 3 1 General General Authentication Firewall IKE Options Options A descriptive name for the mnai Mannheim Leipzig Enabled Yes v Address of the remote site s VPN gateway Either an IP address a hostname or any for any IP muttiple clients or clients behind a NAT gateway any Interface to use for gateway ing any External ow Connection startup Wait v Encapsulate the VPN traffic in TCP Yes v TCP Port of the server which accepts the encapsulated 38080 connection Transport and Tunnel Settings pE Yes v Tunnel v 192 168 1 1 32 192 168 254 1 32 192 168 1 1 minore Only in Stealth mode IPsec VPN gt gt Connecti
145. to be checked entered under CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares gt gt Edit 6 160 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Settings continued Checksum Memory In order to make the check the mGuard must be provided with a network drive for storing the files The checksum memory can be accessed via the external network interface Click on Edit to make further settings for the check of the network drive CIF S integrity Monitoring CIF S Integrity Checking pc x7 scan Checked Share Settings Enabled Checked CIFS Share Patterns for filenames Time Schedule Maximum time a check may take Checksum Memory Checksum Algorithm To be stored on CIFS share Basename of the checksum ile May be prefixed with a directory Yes ad pc x7 scan v executables v Everyday 180 m Please note No regular check will happen unless the system time of the mGuard has been set either manually or with the help of NTP SHA 1 X pc x7 scan v mel cmpc x7 c vas h 17 m CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Settings gt gt Edit Settings Enabled Checked CIFS Share Patterns for filenames No No check of this network drive is triggered The mGuard has not connected this drive A status cannot be accessed Yes A check of this network drive is triggered regularly Suspended T
146. to personal injury Observe all instructions indicated by this symbol in order to avoid possible injuries DANGER Indicates a hazardous situation that will lead to personal injury or death if not avoided WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation that can lead to personal injury or death if not avoided CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation that can lead to personal injury if not avoided The following symbols indicate dangers that can lead to material damage or provide useful operation tips ATTENTION This symbol and the corresponding text warn the user of actions that can lead to damages or malfunctions on the device device surroundings hardware or software This symbol and the corresponding text provide additional information e g tips and suggestions for efficient operation or optimizing the software It is also used to refer the operator to further sources of information manuals data sheets etc INNOMINATE 7961_en_01 Legal information Innominate and mGuard are registered trade names of Innominate Security Technologies AG mGuard technology is protected by patent numbers 10138865 and 10305413 which were granted by the German Patent Office Additional patents are pending This document may not be copied or transferred in whole or in part without prior written approval Innominate Security Technologies AG reserves the right to modify this document at any
147. traps To forward log messages to a syslog server To download a CRL from a HTTP S server To authenticate a user through a RADIUS server To download a configuration profile through a HTTPS server To download a firmware update from a HTTPS server In firewall redundancy in the Router network mode devices connected to the same LAN segment as the redundant pair must use their respective virtual IP addresses as gateways for their routes If these devices would use the actual IP address of one of the two m Guards then this would work until this mGuard fails However the other mGuard cannot take over the function in this case 7 10 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy Targets for the connectivity check If a target is set for ICMP echo requests in the connectivity check then these requests must be answered within a certain time even if the network is loaded with other data The network path between the redundant pair and these targets must be set so that it is also able to forward on the ICMP answers when under heavy load Otherwise the connectivity check for an mGuard may fail by mistake Targets can be configured for the internal and external interface in the connectivity check see Connectivity Checks on page 6 233 It is important that these targets are actually connected to the specified interface An ICMP echo reply cannot be received from an external interface when the target is connected to the i
148. using a telephone dial up connection or a terminal The mGuard delta has a robust metal housing making it suitable as a desktop device or for use in wiring closets Innominate o o mGuard Power S a LAN SWITCH Fig 1 7 mGuard delta 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 1 5 mGuard 7 4 mGuard rs4000 mGuard rs2000 The mGuard rs4000 is a security router with an intelligent firewall and optional IPsec VPN 10 to 250 tunnels It is designed for use in industry where there are high requirements for local security and high availability The mGuard rs2000 is a variant with a simple firewall and integrated IPsec VPN maximum 2 tunnels The scope of the functions is reduced to the essential It is suitable for secure remote maintenance scenarios in industry and enables quick starting up for sturdy industry compatible field devices for disturbance free self sufficient operation Both variants have replaceable configuration storage SD card The fan less metal housing is designed to be attached to a DIN mounting rail Following connectivity options are available mGuard rs4000 LAN WAN mGuard rs2000 LAN WAN TX TX Ethernet Ethernet TX TX VPN Ethernet Ethernet VPN TX TX VPN Ethernet Ethernet VPN 1 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Typical Application Scenarios 2 Typical Application Scenarios Various possible application scenarios for the mGuard are detailed in this chapter Stealth mode Ne
149. via Internal VPN via External VPN via External 2 VPN via Dial in Current TOS DSCP New TOS DSCP Queue Name Comment Each data packet contains a TOS or DSCP field TOS stands for Type Of Service DSCP for Differentiated Services Code Point The traffic type to which the data packet belongs is specified here For example an IP telephone will write some thing different in this field for outgoing data packets compared to an FTP program that loads the data packets to a server When you select a value here only the data packets that have this TOS or DSCP value in the corresponding fields are chosen These values are then set to a different value accord ing to the entry in the New TOS DSCP field If you want to change the TOS DSCP values of the data packets that are selected using the defined rules then enter what should be written in the TOS or DSCP field here Further details concerning the Current TOS DSCP and New TOS DSCP can be found in the following RFC documentation RFC8260 New Terminology and Clarifications for Diffserv RFC3168 The Addition of Explicit Congestion Notification ECN to IP RFC2474 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field DS Field RFC1349 Type of Service in the Internet Protocol Suite Name of the Egress Queue where the traffic is assigned Optional Text comment 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 225 mGuard 7 4 6 11 Redundancy Re
150. was developed to replace the earlier DES standard AES specifies three different key lengths 128 192 and 256 bits In 1997 NIST started the AES initiative and announced its conditions for the algorithm From the many proposed encryption algorithms NIST selected a total of five algorithms for closer examination the MARS RC6 Rijndael Serpent and Twofish algorithms In October 2000 the Rijndael algorithm was adopted as the encryption algorithm In asymmetrical encryption data is encrypted with one key and decrypted with a second key Both keys are suitable for encryption and decryption One of the keys is kept secret by its owner Private Key whilst the other is made available to the public Public Key i e to possible communication partners A message encrypted with the public key can only be decrypted and read by the owner of the associated private key A message encrypted with the private key can be decrypted by any recipient who is the owner of the associated public key Encryption using the private key shows that the message actually originated from the owner of the associated public key Therefore the expression digital signature is also often used However asymmetrical encryption techniques such as RSA are both slow and susceptible to certain types of attack meaning they are often combined with some form of symmetrical encryption gt Subject certificate on page 9 5 On the other hand concepts are available
151. when attacks occur thus giving additional protection If special requirements are present in your operating surroundings then these values can be increased 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 153 mGuard 7 4 6 6 3 Network Security gt gt User Firewall The user firewall is used exclusively by firewall users i e users that are registered as firewall users see Authentication gt gt Firewall Users on page 6 120 Each firewall user can be assigned a set of firewall rules also called a template 6 6 3 1 User Firewall Templates Network Security User Firewall User Firewall Templates Dox ES e sE m Yes v BluePrint All defined user firewall templates are listed here A template can consist of several firewall rules A template can be assigned to several users Making a new template definition e Click on the Edit button on the right side of the template table under the unnamed entry e Ifthe unnamed entry cannot be seen then open a further line in the rule record table Editing a rule record e Click on the Edit button to the right of the entry Network Security gt gt User Firewall gt gt User Firewall Templates General Options Enabled Activates deactivates the relevant template Name Name of the template The name is defined during creation of the template After clicking on the Edit button the following tab page appears General Template users Firewall rul
152. 0 ceseeeessreeeeseeeeeneeeeeneerenaes 6 120 6 5 3 Authentication gt gt RADIUS Servers 0 0 00 eceeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeneeeeaes 6 122 6 5 4 Authentication gt gt Certificates 0 0 ieeeeieeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeneeeneeees 6 124 6 6 Network Security Men s tni e E e a a A A 6 138 6 6 1 Network Security gt gt Packet Filter eeeseeeeeeeeeeieeereereerrerreereee 6 138 6 6 2 Network Security gt gt DoS Protection eeeeeeeeeeeeereeeereerreerren 6 152 6 6 3 Network Security gt gt User Firewall eeeseseeeeeseeeeeeeereeeerreersee 6 154 ii INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Table of Contents 6 7 CIFS Integrity Monitoring Menu ooo eee eee ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeeneeesas 6 157 6 7 1 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares 6 158 6 7 2 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking 0 6 159 6 7 3 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status oe 6 165 6 7 4 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS AV Scan Connector ss 6 168 6 8 Psec VPN M6NUt cece ee ee eee i 6 8 1 IPsec VPN gt S Global ma aa nti el ek MA ante 8 6 8 2 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections 6 8 3 Making a new definition of VPN connection VPN connection Channels esceeseseesneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeees 6 182 6 8 4 IPsec VPN gt gt L2TP over IPSCC ou ee eatandtreats lainaa 6 207 6 8 5 IPsec VPN gt gt IPSEC Status 20 0 eeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeneeteeeeeaeeteaeeeseeeeaeees 6
153. 0 Mbit s pci 533 bi directional Web GUI HTTPS Command Line Interface SSH SNMP v1 2 3 central Device Management Software LEDs 2 x LAN 2 x WAN in combination for boot process heartbeat system errors Ethernet status recovery mode log file remote Syslog CE FCC UL 508 Operating modes with without driver via PoPCI 10 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Technical Data 10 7 m Guard blade m Guard blade 266 mGuard blade 533 Hardware properties Platform Network interfaces Other interfaces Drives High availability Power supply Power consumption Air humidity range Protection class Temperature range Dimensions H x W x D Weight Firmware amp performance values Firmware compatibility Data throughput router firewall Hardware based encryption Encrypted VPN throughput AES 256 Management support Diagnostics Other Conformity Intel network processor optionally with 533 MHz or 266 MHz clock rate 1 LAN port 1 WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 Base TX RJ45 Full Duplex Auto MDIX Serial RS 232 RJ11 socket Depends on the firmware used Via bladebase 100 V AC to 240 V AC at 50 60 Hz blade Typically 3 W bladebase Typically 42 W 10 to 95 during operation non condensing IP 20 5 C to 40 C operation 20 C to 70 C storage blade 100 x 26 x 160 mm bladebase 133 x 483 x 235 mm 3 HU blade 245 g bladepack 7 7 kg mGuar
154. 08 a3 2 14 33 06 IF you do not see the Mac address of the device you are looking for try cycling power to that device F Show Only Phoenix Contact Devices abbrehen Fig 5 2 IP Address Request Listener window In this example the mGuard has the 00 A0 45 04 08 A3 MAC ID e Select the device where the IP address should be assigned e Click on Next Step 4 SET IP Address The following information is displayed in the window which opens IP address of the PC MAC address of the selected device P parameters of the selected device IP address subnet mask and gateway address Any incorrect settings Phoenix Contact IP Assignment Tool Set IP Address Please specify an IP Address to use This PC s IP Address 192 168 1 100 Please specify the IP Address to be used below Selected MAC Address 00 a0 45 04 08 a3 IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address WARNING this address is in a different Subnet Once you have entered a valid IP address click Next lt Zur ck Abbrechen Fig 5 3 Set IP Address window with incorrect settings e Adjust the IP parameters according to your requirements 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 5 7 mGuard 7 4 When no further inconsistencies are detected a message appears indicating that a valid IP address has been set e Click on Next Step 5 Assign IP Address The program now attempts to transmit the set IP pa
155. 192 168 1 30 192 168 1 31 for new addresses See above Factory default 192 168 1 30 192 168 1 31 for new addresses 6 234 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 11 2 Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy 6 11 2 1 Redundancy Status Redundancy FW Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Connectivity Current State ae pe ee The mGuard is actively forwarding and filtering network traffic Additionally the mGuard waits for a restarting component active The mGuard is actively forwarding and filtering network traffic active The mGuard is actively forwarding and filtering network traffic becomes_active The mGuard becomes active on_standby The mGuard is on standby outdated faulty The mGuard does not yet have proper connectivity or cannot determine it for sure active The mGuard is actively forwarding and filtering network traffic Please note The table is sorted chronologically starting with the youngest former state The mGuard has an empty or outdated firewall or VPN state information which it wants to re synchronize i ci enying t s u Wed Nov 9 11 59 13 CET 2011 Status of the Components External Interface Received no CARP announcements from another mGuard Wed Oct 28 15 49 20 CEST 2011 AART CIEE Internal Interface Received no CARP announcements from another mGuard Wed Oct 28 15 49 19 CEST 2011 Availability Check Interface for State Synchronization Received n
156. 2 Displays on mGuard centerport LED State Meaning Green Green Lights up when the system is switched on Orange Orange Lights up when the hard drive is accessed With front cover opened CD drive LEDs see above Knurled screw for attaching the cover ON OFF button RESET button 2 x USB ports For a system restart without switching the device off and back on Fig 3 3 Control elements on mGuard centerport with front cover opened 3 2 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Control Elements and Displays Rescue button 3 3 Supply voltage 1 Power supply 1 P1 Modem State LAN Located in the opening Can be pressed with a straightened paper clip See Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware on page 8 1 m uard industrial rs Supply voltage 2 see Chapter 4 Startup P1 P2 12 Modem Fault Q Power supply 2 P2 g State Error 3 LAN WAN S Fault xe Serial ej Error E WAN i al Service Line I __ CMDACK TIPRING 3 Terminal block for the signal contact pushbutton and optional ISDN or telephone connection see Chapter 4 Startup lt _ Fig 3 4 Control elements and displays on mGuard industrial rs Table 3 3 Displays on mGuard industrial rs LED State Meaning P1 Green Power supply 1 is active P2 Green Power supply 2 is active Modem Green Connection establishe
157. 31 mGuard 7 4 Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy continued IP of the dedicated Only available when Dedicated Interface is selected interface IP IP address used on the third network interface of the mGuard centerport for state synchronization with the other mGuard Default 192 168 68 29 Netmask Netmask used on the third network interface of the mGuard centerport for state synchronization with the other mGuard Default 255 255 255 0 Use VLAN When Yes is selected a VLAN ID is used for the third network interface VLAN ID 1 2 3 to 4094 default 1 VLAN ID when this setting is activated Disable the availabil Only available when Dedicated Interface is selected ity check at the exter When Yes is selected no presence notifications CARP are nal interface sent or received via the external interface This can make sense in some scenarios for protection against external at tacks 6 232 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 11 1 2 Connectivity Checks Targets can be configured for the internal and external interface in the connectivity check It is important that these targets are actually connected to the specified interface An ICMP echo reply cannot be received from an external interface when the corresponding target is connected to the internal interface and vice versa When the static routes are changed it can easily happen that the targets are not checked properly
158. 6 106 2 Remote IP range end 10 106 106 254 Please note These settings don t apply to the Stealth mode Status The L2TP daemon isn t running IPsec VPN gt gt L2TP over IPsec gt gt L2TP Server Settings Start L2TP Server for If you want to enable IPsec L2TP connections set this option IPsec L2TP to Yes It is then possible to establish incoming L2TP connections over IPsec which dynamically assign IP addresses to the clients within the VPN Local IP for L2TP If set as shown in the screenshot above the mGuard will connections inform the remote peer that its address is 10 106 106 1 Remote IP range start If set as shown in the screenshot above the mGuard will end assign the remote peer an IP address between 10 106 106 2 and 10 106 106 254 Status Shows L2TP status information when this connection type has been selected 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 207 mGuard 7 4 Update Restart Edit GATEWAY TRAFFIC ID ISAKMP State IPsec State If the display shows ISAKMP SA established IPsec State WAITING IPsec State IPsec SA established 6 8 5 IPsec VPN gt gt IPsec Status IPsec VPN IPsec Status Connection a ISAKMP IPsec Name State State Mannheim Leipzig Gateway 172 16 66 48 any MA10097829638_1 Traffic 192 168 1 1 32 192 168 254 1 32 C DE O Beispiel Lieferant LEMA CN VPN Endpunkt C DE O Beispiel Lieferant L L CN VPN Endpunkt 1D meS Kundendienst Maschine 06 Shows the sta
159. 68 1 0 255 255 255 0 corresponds to CIDR 192 168 1 0 24 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 249 mGuard 7 4 Router External IP address 192 168 11 2 Internal IP address 192 168 15 254 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Router External IP address 192 168 15 1 Internal IP address 192 168 27 254 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Additional internal routes Network A Network B Network C 6 15 Example of a network The following sketch illustrates how IP addresses can be distributed in a local network with subnetworks which network addresses result and how the details regarding additional internal routes may look Internet A External address e g 123 456 789 21 assigned by the ISP Switch OOG amp mGuard in Router network mode Internal mGuard address 192 168 11 1 Network A Network address 192 168 11 0 24 Network B Network address 192 168 15 0 24 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Network C Network address 192 168 27 0 24 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Computer A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 IP address 192 168 11 3 192 168 11 4 192 168 11 5 192 168 11 6 192 168 11 7 Netmask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 Computer B1 B2 B3 B4 Additional internal routes IP address 192 168 15 2 192 168 15 3 192 168 15 4 192 168 15 5 Network Netmask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 ae 192 168 11 2 Computer C1 C2 C3 C4 Networ
160. 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 25 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access User authentication This menu item is not included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 Defines how the local mGuard User authentication authenticates the remote peer User authentication User authentication method Login with X 509 client certificate or password v SC at f VPN RootCA01 w AX X 509 Subject Authorized for access as x root gt x X 509 Certificate Authorized for access as method Battaglia Mauro root X Login with password Specifies that the remote mGuard user must use a password for authentication The password is specified under the Authentication gt gt Administrative Users menu see page 6 117 The RADIUS authentication method is also possible see page 6 122 Depending on which user ID is used user or administrator password the user has the right to operate and configure the mGuard Login with X 509 client certificate or password Option 1 User authentication is made with a password see above Option 2 The user s browser authenticates itself using an X 509 certificate and a corresponding private key Further details must be specified here The use of either method depends on the web browser of the remote user The second option is used when the web browser provides the mGuard with a certificate Login restricted to X 509 client certificate
161. 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 163 mGuard 7 4 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Filename Patterns gt gt Edit Rules for files to check Filename pattern Include in check The following rules apply here exe means that files are checked or excluded that are found in any directory and end with exe Only one placeholder per directory or file name is allowed Placeholders represent wildcards e g win exe finds files that end with exe and are found in a directory that begins with win at the start means that any directory is searched including the uppermost level when this is empty This cannot be combined with other characters e g c is not allowed Example Name exe applies to all files ending with exe that are found in the Name directory and any subdirectories Missing files lead to an alarm Missing files are those files that were present during initialization An alarm is also triggered when additional files are detected Include The files are included in the check Each file name is compared to the templates in sequence The first hit is decisive for the inclusion of the file in the integrity check The file is not included if no hits are detected Exclude The files are excluded from the check 6 164 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 7 3 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status CIFS Integri
162. 8 0867 1A85 8E48 027ABDA00853 0568 Feature License ficence_id o licence_date 2010 07 15T17 38 55 flash_id U3DDD33F8 0B67 1A85 SE4B 027ABDA00853 14715030 serial_number hardware_revision 00002001 product_code BD 970010 pxc_product_code BD 970010 firmware_max_version 7 firmware_flavours default vpn_channels 10 4 From mGuard version 5 0 onwards licenses also remain installed after firmware is flashed Licenses are still deleted when devices with older firmware versions are flashed to version 5 0 0 or higher Before flashing the license for using the new update must first be obtained so that the required license file is available for the flash This applies to major release upgrades for example from version 4 x y to version 5 x y to version 6 x y etc see Flashing the firmware rescue procedure on page 8 3 Management gt gt Licensing gt gt Overview General a Displays which functions are included with the installed mGuard license e g the number of possible VPN tunnels whether remote logging is supported etc Feature License 6 2 3 2 Install This function is not available on the mGuard rs2000 You can subsequently add more functions to the mGuard license you have obtained Management Licensing Overview Install Terms of License Automatic License Installation Nuch Key Number Voucher Key rebate Manual License Installation You will find a voucher seri
163. 961_en_04 Redundancy State synchronisation The mGuard on standby receives a copy of the state on the currently active mGuard This includes a database containing the forwarded network connections This database is filled and updated constantly by the forwarded network packets It is protected against unauthorized access The data is transmitted through the physical LAN interface and never through the virtual network interface To keep internal data traffic to a minimum a VLAN can be configured so that it stores the synchronization data in a separate multicast and broadcast domain Virtual IP addresses Each mGuard is configured with virtual IP addresses The number of addresses depends on the network mode used Both mGuards in a redundant pair must be assigned the same virtual IP addresses The virtual IP addresses are required by the mGuard to establish virtual network interfaces Two virtual IP addresses are required in Router network mode while others can be created One virtual IP address is required for the external network interface and the other for the internal network interface These IP addresses are used as a gateway for routing devices located in the external or internal LAN In this way the devices can benefit from the high availability which occurs through the use of both redundant mGuards The redundant pair automatically defines MAC addresses for the virtual network interface These MAC addresses are identical for
164. AN computer with the IP 192 168 0 8 can be reached under the IP 10 0 0 8 in the external network g mGuard p 192 168 0 8 tue 192 168 0 0 24 10 0 0 0 24 The mGuard claims the IP addresses entered for the External Network for the devices in its Local Network The mGuard gives ARP answers for all addresses from the specified External Network on behalf of the devices in the Local Network Therefore the IP addresses entered under External Network must not be in use They must not be assigned to other devices or used in any way as an IP address conflict would otherwise occur in the external network This even applies when no device exists in the Internal Network for one or more IP addresses from the specified External Network 6 104 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt NAT gt gt Masquerading continued Factory default 1 1 NAT is not active B 1 1 NAT cannot be used on the External 2 interface 1 1 NAT is only used in the Router network mode Local network The network address on the LAN port External network The network address on the WAN port Netmask The netmask as a value between 1 and 32 for the local and external network addresses see also CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 Comment Can be filled with relevant comments 1 External 2 and Any External are only for devices with serial ports mGuard centerpor
165. Apply button on every page where you make changes in order for the settings to be accepted and applied by the mGuard The Per Session setting specifies that you only have to click Apply once after making changes on a number of pages 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 21 mGuard 7 4 Only displayed with Login with X 509 user certificate 7 6 2 2 2 Access Generat 4 access HTTPS Web Access Enable HTTPS remote access Yes v Remote HTTPS TCP Port 443 Allowed Networks Log 1D 1w ripe aocess N 26287302 2040 1408 9076 00000806000 A rom interface comment og ex From IP Interfi c L 1 0 0 0 0 0 External ow Accept v No v 0 0 0 0 0 External ow Accept v No v RADIUS Authentication Enable RADIUS authentication No v User authentication User authentication method Login with X 509 client certificate or password w rE cacemneae r VPN RootCA01 v D x X 509 Subject Authorized for access as fH root v z z ertificate uthorized for access as pX X 509 Certifi Authorized fi O Battaglia Mauro v root X When web access by HTTPS protocol is enabled the mGuard can be configured from a remote system using its web based administrator interface This means a browser running on the remote system is used to configure the mGuard This option is disabled by default ATTENTION If you enable remote access ensure secure root and administrator passwords are defined To enable HTTPS remote access proceed
166. Because the ping probes generate network traffic the num ber of probes and their frequency should be kept within rea sonable limits You also want to avoid activating the second ary external interface too early The timeout period for the individual ping requests is 4 seconds This means that after a ping probe is started the next ping probe starts after 4 seconds if the previous one was negative To take this aspect into account you make the following settings The ping probes defined above under Probes for Activation are performed one after the other When the ping probes defined are performed once in sequence this is known as a probe run Probe runs are performed continuously at inter vals The interval entered in this field specifies how long the mGuard waits after starting a probe run before it starts the next probe run The probe runs are not necessarily performed to completion As soon as one ping probe in a probe run is successful the subsequent ping probes in this probe run are omitted If a probe run takes longer than the interval specified then the subsequent probe run is started directly after it 6 76 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General continued Secondary External Interface continued Number of times all Specifies how many sequentially performed probe runs must probes need to fail return a negative result before the mGuard activates the during subsequent se
167. CIFS Integrity Checking Windows network drives are checked as to whether certain files e g exe dll have been changed Changes to these files indicate a virus or unauthorized file access CIFS Antivirus Scan In the CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector the mGuard allows an antivirus scan of drives that Connector are otherwise not externally accessible e g production cells The mGuard mirrors a drive externally in order to carry out the antivirus scan Additional antivirus software is necessary in this procedure Set the necessary read access for your antivirus software Setting options for CIFS Integrity Checking Which network drives are known by the mGuard see CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares on page 6 158 Which access type is allowed see CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Settings on page 6 160 At which intervals the drives should be checked see CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Settings gt gt Edit on page 6 161 Which file types should be checked see CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Filename Patterns on page 6 163 The type of warning when a change is detected e g by e mail see CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Settings on page 6 160 or by SNMP see CIFS integrity traps on page 6 49 Setting options for the CIF
168. D2 Message Digest Algorithm ImdS Derived from the RSA Data Security Inc MDS Message Digest Algorithm FreeS WAN Openswan l des BSD style libcrypto BSD style Eric Young BSD style OpenSSL libaes BSD style zlib zlib license ra BSD style HTML Utiities BSD stve haparm ESD stvie RECT ibrary BSD stve fiproute2 enu GPLv2 fipset Gnu Gpiv2 fictabies enu GeLv2 koa enu GeLv2 iocap BSD stve ibfuse Gnu GPLv2 LGPLv2 ibgmp Gnu GPLvzLGPLv2 onetfiter_conntrack GNU GPLv2 ibnfnetink Gnu GPLv2 x a Lists the licenses of the external software used in the mGuard This software is usually open source software 6 34 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 2 4 Management gt gt Update From mGuard version 5 0 0 onwards a license must be purchased for the device before the installation of a major release update e g from version 4 x y to 5 x y or from version 5 x y to 6 x y The license must be installed on the device before a firmware update is made see Management gt gt Licensing on page 6 32 and Install on page 6 32 Minor release upgrades i e same main version e g within version 5 x y can be installed without a license until further notice 6 2 4 1 Overview Management Update Overview Update System Information Version 7 4 0 default Base 7 4 0 default Updates non
169. Device Management Software LEDs 3 LEDs in combination for boot process heartbeat system errors Ethernet status recovery mode log file remote Syslog CE FCC 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 10 5 mGuard 7 4 10 6 mGuard pci m Guard pci 266 mGuard pci 533 Hardware properties Platform Network interfaces Other interfaces Drives High availability Power supply Power consumption Air humidity range Protection class Temperature range Dimensions H x W x D Weight Firmware amp performance values Firmware compatibility Data throughput router firewall Hardware based encryption Encrypted VPN throughput AES 256 Management support Diagnostics Other Conformity Intel network processor optionally with 266 MHz or 533 MHz clock rate 1 LAN port 1 WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 Base TX RJ45 Full Duplex Auto MDIX Serial RS 232 internal cable connector Depends on the firmware used 3 3 V or 5 V via PCI bus Typically 3 7 W to 4 2 W 20 to 90 during operation non condensing Depends on installation type 0 C to 70 C operation 20 C to 70 C storage Low profile PCI 729g mGuard v5 0 or higher Innominate recommends firmware version 6 x or 7 x with the current patch releases For scope of functions see relevant firmware data sheet 99 Mbit s bi directional 99 Mbit s bi directional DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 35 Mbit s pci 256 bi directional 7
170. Guard delta The STATUS LED lights up green e Once again press the Rescue button slowly 6 times mGuard rs4000 rs2000 If successful the state LED lights up green mMGuardindustrialts If unsuccessful the error LED lights up red mGuard smart If successful the middle LED lights up green If unsuccessful the middle LED lights up red mGuard blade mGuard pci If successful the LAN LED lights up red If unsuccessful the WAN LED lights up red EAGLE mGuard If successful the status LED lights up yellow If unsuccessful the error LED lights up red mGuard delta If successful the status LED lights up green If unsuccessful the status LED stays off e If successful the device reboots after two seconds and switches to Stealth or Router mode The device can then be accessed over the corresponding addresses see table Preset addresses on page 8 2 8 3 Flashing the firmware rescue procedure Objective To reload all mGuard firmware onto the device All configured settings are deleted The mGuard is restored to the factory default settings From m uard version 5 0 0 onwards the licenses installed in the mGuard remain in place after flashing the firmware They therefore do not need to be installed again Only firmware from version 5 1 0 onwards can be installed on the mGuard industrial rs Possible reasons The administrator and root password have been lost 7961_en
171. Guard is put into operation at a later date You can also start the check manually CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status gt gt Display gt gt Actions on page 6 166 Maximum check period in minutes You can then ensure that the check is completed in good time e g before a shift is started SHA 1 MD5 SHA 256 Checksum algorithms such as MD5 SHA 1 or SHA 256 are used to check whether a file has been changed SHA 256 is more secure than SHA 1 but requires a longer processing time In order to make the check the mGuard must be provided with a network drive for storing the files The checksum memory can be accessed via the external network interface The same network drive can be used as a checksum memory for several different checked drives The base name of the checksum files must then be clearly selected in this case The mGuard recognizes which version the checksum files on the network drive must have For example if it is necessary to restore the contents of the network drive from a backup following a malfunction then the old checksum files are provided and the mGuard would detect deviations In this case the integrity database must be recreated see CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status gt gt Display gt gt Actions on page 6 166 6 162 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking
172. INATE 6 211 mGuard 7 4 SEC Stick gt gt Global gt gt Access continued If multiple firewall rules are set they will be searched in the order in which they are listed top down until a suitable rule is found This rule is then applied If there are other suitable rules further down the list these are ignored The rules specified here only become effective if Enable SEC Stick remote access is set to Yes nternal access is also possible when this option is set to No A firewall rule that would refuse nternal access is therefore not effective in this case You can specify multiple rules From IP Interface Action Comment Log 1 Enter the address of the system or network where remote access is permitted or forbidden in this field IP address 0 0 0 0 0 means all addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see 6 249 External Internal External 2 VPN Dial in Specifies which interface the rules apply to If no rules are set or if no rule takes effect the following default settings apply SEC Stick access is permitted over Internal VPN and Dial in Access over External and External 2 is refused Specify the access possibilities according to your requirements la If you want to refuse access over Internal VPN or Dial in you must implement this explicitly through corresponding firewall rules by specifying Drop as an action for example Accept means that data p
173. INFO terminating ham fsr INFO ham fsr 2922 terminated ham fsr INFO ham fsr 3453 starting ham fsr INFO started ham fsr INFO entering sending mode ham vsr INFO ham vsr 3459 starting ham vsr INFO started ham vsr INFO entering sending mode ham ssv INFO transitioned to state active beron beron exec root CMD cifsscan start_scan r MAI2011736741 beron Subject Cron lt root mguard cessmann gt cifsscan start_scan r MAI2011736741 beron beron OK ham ssv INFO transitioned to state faulty ham vic INFO disabled IP forwarding and other conditions ham ac extl AC INFO ham ac 3417 eth0 listening to CARP messages ham ac syncif AC INFO ham ac 3432 eth2 listening to CARP messages ham ac int AC INFO ham ac 3399 eth1 listening to CARP messages INFO disabled virtual interface eth0 vif INFO disabled virtual interface ethl vif INFO disabled ARP daemon 0 ham vic ham vi ham vic ham ssv INFO transitioned to state outdated ham ssv INFO transitioned to state on_standby ham vic INFO enabled IP forwarding and other conditions ham ssv INFO transitioned to state becomes_active ham ac syncif AC INFO ham ac 3432 eth2 sending CARP messages and listening to them ham ac ext1 AC INFO ham ac 3417 eth0 sending CARP messages and listening to them ham ac int AC INFO ham ac 3393 ethl sending CARP messages and listening to them ham ssv INFO sigalrm timeout ham ssv WARN call read func receive_report line 444
174. Innominate User Manual mGuard Software Release 7 4 02 24 2012 Description UM EN MGUARD 7 4 Revision 01 Item no This manual applies to mGuard software release 7 4 when used with the following mGuard devices mGuard rs4000 mQGuard rs2000 mGuard centerport mQuard industrial rs mGuard smart mGuard smart mGuard pci mQGuard blade mQGuard delta EAGLE mGuard 7961_en_01 INNOMINATE mGuard 7 4 H o BBB Please observe the following notes In order to use the product described here safely you must have read and fully understood the manual The following notes are intended for initial guidance in using the manual Target groups Operation of the product as described in this manual is intended for the following groups only Qualified electricians or those trained by qualified electricians who are familiar with applicable electrotechnical regulations and standards and the relevant safety concepts in particular Qualified application programmers and software engineers who are familiar with the relevant safety concepts for automation technology and the applicable regulations and standards Innominate assumes no liability for human errors and damages to Innominate products and third party products that result from the improper use of the information in this manual Explanation of symbols and signal words This symbol indicates dangers that may lead
175. Integrity certificate Used for signing and checking the integrity database so that Used to sign integrity it cannot be replaced or manipulated by an intruder without databases being detected Further information on certificates can be found under Machine Certificates on page 6 131 Send notifications via After every check An e mail is sent to the address below e mail after every check No No e mails are sent to the address below Only with faults and deviations An e mail is sent to the address below when deviations are detected in CIFS Integrity Checking or when the check is not made due to an access error Target address for An e mail is sent to this address after every check or only e mail notifications when deviations are detected in CIFS Integrity Checking or when the check could not be made due to an access error Sender address of This address is entered as the sender in the e mail e mail notifications Address of the IP address or host name of the e mail server used for sending e mail server the e mail Subject prefix for e mail notifications Text entered in the subject field of the e mail Enabled No No check of this network drive is triggered The mGuard has not connected this drive A status cannot be accessed Yes A check of this network drive is triggered regularly Suspended The check has been suspended until further notice The status can be accessed Checked CIFS Share Name of the network drive
176. Internet If NAT is not activated it is possible that only VPN connections can be used For the further configuration of the PPPoE network mode see Network Mode Router Router Mode PPPoE on page 6 82 Router Mode PPTP Similar to the PPPoE mode In Austria for example PPTP is used instead of the PPPoE protocol for DSL connections PPTP is the protocol that was originally used by Microsoft for VPN connections If the mGuard is operated in PPTP mode it must be set as the default gateway in the connected local computers In other words the IP address of the mGuard LAN port must be entered as the default gateway on these computers If the mGuard is operated in PPTP mode NAT should be activated in order to gain access to the Internet from the local network see Network gt gt NAT on page 6 103 If NAT is not activated it is possible that only VPN connections can be used For the further configuration of the PPTP network mode see Network Mode Router Router Mode PPTP on page 6 83 6 66 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Router Mode Modem Only used for mGuard industrial rs without a built in modem mGuard centerport mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta If the Modem network mode is selected the external Ethernet interface of the mGuard is deactivated and data transfer to and from the WAN is made over the serial port that is accessible externa
177. L by the mGuard Estimated time and date when the CA will next issue a new CRL These entries are not influenced or considered by the CRL download interval Enter the CA URL where CRL downloads are obtained if the CRL should be downloaded on a regular basis as defined in the CRL download interval under the Certificate settings tab page see Certificate settings on page 6 129 With Yes the mGuard uses a VPN tunnel to access the URL that provides the CRL for downloading For this a suitable VPN tunnel must be configured and active and must allow the access Otherwise the CRL downloads of this URL will not be forwarded through a VPN tunnel If the CRL is present in file form then it can be loaded onto the mGuard manually Todo this click on the Browse button then select the file and click on Import e Remember to save the imported CRL along with the other entries by clicking on Apply 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 137 mGuard 7 4 6 6 Network Security menu This menu is not available on the mGuard blade controller This menu is available in a reduced form on the mGuard rs2000 6 6 1 Network Security gt gt Packet Filter The mGuard comes with an integrated Stateful Packet Inspection Firewall The connection data for each active connection is collected in a database connection tracking Therefore it is only necessary to define rules for one direction Only data from the opposite direction of t
178. MINATE 7961_en_04 Startup 4 6 Connecting the mGuard smart mGuard LAN port Ethernet connector for direct connection to the protected device or network local device or network USB connector a Used for connection to the USB interface of a computer Used as a power supply default setting The mGuard smart not mGuard smart can also be configured so that a serial console is available through the USB port see Chapter 6 4 1 5 WAN port Socket for connection to an external network e g WAN Internet Connections to the remote device or network are established over this network Use a UTP cable CATS Before g C o S Qo B 5 da After ALAN can also be m on the left RTS a d oO Q i Gap Fig 4 12 mGuard smart Network connection If your computer is already connected to a network then insert the mGuard smart between the existing network interface of the computer network card and the network Additional driver installation is not necessary For security reasons we recommend that you change the default Root and Administrator passwords during the first configuration WARNING This is a Class A device which may cause radio interference in residential areas In this case the operator may be requested to take appropriate pre ventative measures 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 21 mGuard 7 4 4 7 Installing the mG
179. MINATE 8 9 mGuard 7 4 Go to the TFTP server or DHCP server tab page and click on Settings to set the parameters as follows m Tftpd32 Settings x Tftpd32 by Ph Jounin Oj x r Base Directory Ew once Current Directory JEAmy Browse r Global Settings Syslog server J Server interface 192 168 10 1 zl Show Dit M TFTP Server I Syslog Server Save syslog message T tp Server DHCP server I TFTP Client IV DHCP Server File IP pool starting address 152 168 10 200 TFTP Security TFTP configuration Size of pool J30 6 C None Ti Boot File imeout seconds 3 a 3 e PEE A WINS DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Y 5 Ber l Tftp port 6a Default router 0 0 0 0 B sate Mask 255 255 255 0 r Advanced TFTP Options Domain Name J IV Option negotiation T Hide Window at startup I Show Progress bar T Create dir txt files About Help IT Translate Unix file names I Beep for long tranfer IV Use Tftpd32 only on this interface TEZATERTR I Use anticipation window of Bytes T Allow As virtual root OK Default Help Cancel Fig 8 4 Settings In Linux All current Linux distributions include DHCP and TFTP servers e Install the corresponding packages as described in the instructions for the respective distributions e Configure the DHCP server by making the following settings in the etc dhcpd conf field subnet 192 168 134 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 range 192
180. NOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt IKE Options Lifetimes and Limits The keys of an IPsec connection are renewed at certain intervals to increase the costs of an attack to the IPsec connection ISAKMP SA Lifetime IPsec SA Lifetime IPsec SA Traffic Limit Re key Margin for Life times Re key Margin for the Traffic Limit Re key Fuzz The lifetime of the ISAKMP SA keys in seconds Factory default 3600 seconds 1 hour The permitted maximum is 86400 seconds 24 hours The lifetime of the IPsec SA keys in seconds Factory default 28800 seconds 8 hours The permitted maximum is 86400 seconds 24 hours 0 to 2147483647 bytes The value 0 indicates that there is no traffic limit for the IPsec SAs on this VPN connection All other values indicate the maximum number of bytes which are encrypted by the IPsec SA for this VPN connection Hard Limit Applies to ISAKMP SAs and IPsec SAs Minimum time interval before the old key expires during which a new key should be created Factory default 540 seconds 9 minutes Only applies to IPsec SAs The value 0 indicates that the traffic limit is not used O must be set here when 0 is also set under IPsec SA Traffic Limit If a value above 0 is entered then a new limit is calculated from two values The number of bytes entered here is sub tracted from the value specified under Psec SA Traffic Limit i e Ha
181. PNName mGuardTResVPNindex mGuardTResVPNPeer mGuardTResVPNStatus mGuardTResVPNType mGuardTResVPNLocal mGuardTResVPNRemote Sent when the state of an IPsec connection changes enterprise oid mGuard generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapVPNIPsecConnStatus Sent when a connection is established or disconnected The trap is not sent when the mGuard is in the process of accepting a connection query for this connection Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardTrapVPN genericTrap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapVPNL2TPConnStatus 3 additional mGuardTResVPNName mGuardTResVPNindex mGuardTResVPNPeer m GuardTResVPNStatus m GuardTResVPNLocal mGuardTResVPNRemote Sent when the state of an L2TP connection changes Traps can be sent to one or more destinations Destination IP Destination Port Destination Name Destination Community IP address to which the trap should be sent Default 162 Destination port to which the trap should be sent Optional name for the destination Has no influence on the generated traps Name of the SNMP community to which the trap is allocated 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 51 mGuard 7 4 6 2 6 3 LLDP f Menegement SA SSS o Query Trap v LLDP LLDP Mode Enabled v Internal LAN interface aeee External WAN interface MAC 00 A0 45 08 61 69 192 168 0 12 Port 5 FL SWITCH SMCS_Boot MAC
182. PPP Login name PPP Password Only mGuard industrial rs with built in modem or ISDN TA Off Built in Modem External Modem The setting must be Off if the serial port should not be used for the PPP dial in option If it is set to External Modem the PPP dial in option is available Then an external modem must be connected to the serial port The connection settings for the connected external modem are made on the Modem Console tab page If this is set to Built in Modem the PPP dial in option is available In this case the modem connection is not made over the Serial socket on the front side Instead it is made over the terminal block on the bottom where the built in modem or ISDN terminal adapter is connected to the telephone network The connection settings for the built in modem are made on the Modem Console tab page If you are using the Built in Modem option you can also use the serial port For the usage options see Modem Console on page 6 96 IP address of the mGuard at which it can be accessed for a PPP connection IP address of the PPP connection remote peer Login name that the PPP remote peer has to enter to gain access to the mGuard using PPP Password that the PPP remote peer has to enter to gain access to the mGuard using PPP Firewall rules for PPP connections to the LAN interface If multiple firewall rules are set they will be searched in the order in which they are listed top down unt
183. PS SNMP and SSH management protocols is only possible with an actual IP address from each mGuard Access attempts to virtual addresses are rejected The following features cannot be used with firewall redundancy A secondary external Ethernet interface ADHCP server ADHCP relay ASEC Stick server A user firewall CIFS Integrity Monitoring The redundant pair must have the same configuration Take this into account when making the following settings NAT settings masquerading port forwarding and 1 to 1 NAT Flood Protection Packet filter firewall rules MAC filter advanced settings Queues and rules for QoS Some network connections may be interrupted following a network lobotomy See Restoration in the event of a network lobotomy on page 7 8 After a fail over semi unidirectional or complex connections that were established in the second before the fail over may be interrupted See Fail over when establishing complex connections on page 7 8 and Fail over when establishing semi unidirectional connections on page 7 8 Firewall redundancy does not support the mGuard pci in Driver mode The state synchronization does not replicate the connection tracking entries for ICMP echo requests forwarded by the mGuard Therefore ICMP echo replies can be dropped according to the firewall rules if they only reach the mGuard after the fail over is completed Please note that ICMP echo replies are
184. S Antivirus Scan Connector Which network drives are known by the mGuard see CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares on page 6 158 Which access type is allowed read only access or read write access see CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector on page 6 168 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 157 mGuard 7 4 6 7 1 Requirements You can enter the network d CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares rives that the mGuard should check regularly here a In order for the network drives to be checked you must also refer to these drives in one of the two methods CIFS Integrity Checking or CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector The reference to the network drives can be set as follows In CIFS Integrity Checki page 6 168 6 7 1 1 CIFS Integrity Monitoring Importable Shares Importable Shares Importable CIFS Shares ng see Checked CIFS Share on page 6 160 In the CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector see CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector on Importable Shares Here you can specify the CIFS shares to which the mGuard has access F pc x7 scan CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares Importable Shares Name i Server Share O r E E E c m 10 1 66 127 Name of the network drive to be checked internal name used n the configuration IP address of the authorized server Name of the network drive where
185. System error Reboot the system Press the Rescue button briefly 1 5 seconds Alternatively disconnect the device from its power supply briefly then reconnect it If the error continues to occur start the recovery procedure see Performing a recovery procedure on page 8 2 or contact the support department SIG Not assigned FAULT Red The signal output is open due to an error see Installing the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 on page 4 4 The signal output is interrupted during a reboot MOD Green Connection established over modem INFO Not assigned STAT ERR Flashing Boot process After connecting the device to the power supply The LED switches to alternately heartbeat mode after a few seconds green red LAN Green The LAN WAN LEDs are located in the LAN WAN sockets 10 100 and duplex display WAN Green Ethernet status Shows the status of the LAN and WAN ports As soon as the device is connected to the relevant network the LEDs are illuminated continuously to indicate the presence of a network connection over LAN or WAN The LEDs are extinguished briefly when data packets are transferred 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 3 1 mGuard 7 4 3 2 mGuard centerport Front side Power LED green Hard drive LED orange 19 bracket with handle Lock front cover 19 bracket with handle Fig 3 2 Control elements and displays on mGuard centerport front side Table 3
186. The faulty link state of at least one port The link state report on the EAGLE mGuard can be masked for each port using the management software No connection monitoring is performed in the factory default condition Self test error In case of a non redundant voltage supply the EAGLE mGuard indicates the failure of the supply voltage You can prevent this signal by connecting the supply voltage to both inputs Grounding connection e The EAGLE mGuard is grounded with a separate screw connection Serial port WARNING The serial port RJ12 socket must not be connected directly to communica tion connection points Use a serial cable with an RJ12 connector to connect a serial terminal or a modem The serial cable can have a maximum length of 30 meters The serial port serial interface can be used as described under Serial port on page 4 19 However the connections for the contacts are different as the following figure shows Not assigned Pin6 CTS Pin 5 LE TXD Pin4d RJ12 RTS Pin 3 M RXD Pin 2 fi GND Pin 1 Fig 4 16 Pin assignment of the RJ12 socket serial port Assembly The device is delivered in a ready to operate condition The following procedure is required for the assembly process Detach the terminal block from the EAGLE mGuard and connect the supply voltage and signal contact lines 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 25 mGuard 7 4 Attach the EAGLE mGuard onto a 35 mm moun
187. Transmission rate in firewall redundancy These values apply to the Router network mode when the data traffic for the state synchronization is transmitted without encryption If the transmission rate described here is exceeded then the activation time may be longer than set in the event of errors Platform Transmission rate in firewall redundancy mGuard centerport 1 500 Mbit s bi directional not more than 400 000 frames s mGuard 150 Mbit s bi directional industrial rs not more than 12 750 frames s mGuard smart mGuard core With 533 MHz mGuard pci mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta mGuard 62 Mbit s bi directional industrial rs not more than 5 250 frames s mGuard smart mGuard core With 266 MHz mGuard pci mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta mGuard smart 62 Mbit s bi directional mGuArd core not more than 5 250 frames s mGuard rs4000 1 The bi directional value includes the traffic in both directions For example 1 500 Mbit s means that 750 Mbit s are forwarded in each direction Fail over switching time The fail over switching time can be set to 1 3 or 10 seconds in the event of errors The 1 second upper limit is currently only maintained by the mGuard centerport even under high loads 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 13 mGuard 7 4 7 1 10 Limits of firewall redundancy In Router network mode firewall redundancy is only supported with the static mode Access to the mGuard via the HTT
188. V 09000000 0000 0000 0000 000000000000 FS we roto Frome romeo tor f orot Acton comment toa Log entries for unknown connection attempts Me Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial in PPP dial in options Only for mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta Only configured if the mGuard is to permit PPP dial in over A modem connected to the serial port A built in modem option available for the mGuard industrial rs The PPP dial in can be used to access the LAN or the mGuard for configuration purposes see Modem Console on page 6 96 If the modem is used for dialing out by functioning as the primary external interface Modem network mode of the mGuard or as its secondary external interface when activated in the Stealth or Router network mode then it is not available for the PPP dial in option Modem PPP Only mGuard industrial rs without a built in modem or ISDN TA mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta Off On The setting must be Off if no serial port should be used for the PPP dial in option If it is set to On the PPP dial in option is available The connection settings for the connected external modem are made on the Modem Console tab page 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 93 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial in continued Incoming Rules PPP Modem PPP Local IP Remote IP
189. _04 INNOMINATE 10 3 mGuard 7 4 10 4 Hardware properties Platform Network interfaces Other interfaces Drives High availability Power supply Power consumption Temperature range Air humidity range Protection class Dimensions H x W x D Weight Firmware amp performance values Firmware compatibility Data throughput router firewall Hardware based encryption Encrypted VPN throughput AES 256 Management support Diagnostics Other Conformity Special features mGuard smart Freescale network processor with 330 MHz clock rate 1 LAN port 1 WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 Base TX RJ45 Full Duplex Auto MDIX Serial interface via USB port Depends on the firmware used Via USB interface 5 V at 500 mA Optional External power supply unit 110 230 V Max 2 5 W 0 C to 40 C operation 20 C to 70 C storage 20 to 90 during operation non condensing IP 30 27x 77x115mm 131g mGuard v7 2 or higher Innominate recommends firmware version 7 x with the current patch releases for scope of functions see relevant firmware data sheet 99 Mbit s bi directional DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 35 Mbit s bi directional Web GUI HTTPS Command Line Interface SSH SNMP v1 2 3 central Device Management Software LEDs 3 LEDs in combination for boot process heartbeat system errors Ethernet status recovery mode log file remote Syslog CE FCC Re
190. _04 INNOMINATE 2 3 mGuard 7 4 2 5 WLAN over VPN With WLAN over VPN two company buildings are connected to each other over an IPsec protected WLAN connection The auxiliary building should also be able to use the Internet connection of the main building 4 S l 89b C6 vac c 891 c6l VOL CZLt GL OLeZt L YS L89 ZEL Vv ZL OLeZL 1 t 192 168 2 0 24 192 168 1 0 24 Fig 2 5 WLAN over VPN In this example the mGuards were switched to Router mode and a separate network with addresses of 172 16 1 x was created for the WLAN As Internet access should also be available via the VPN from the auxiliary building a Default route over VPN is configured here Auxiliary building tunnel configuration Connection type Tunnel Network lt gt Network Local network address 192 168 2 0 24 Remote network address 0 0 0 0 0 The appropriate connection counterpart is configured in the main building Main building tunnel configuration Connection type Tunnel Network lt gt Network Local network 0 0 0 0 Remote network address 192 168 2 0 24 The default route of an mGuard is usually directed over the WAN port but in this case the Internet is accessible via the LAN port Main building de
191. _04 INNOMINATE 8 3 mGuard 7 4 Requirements Requirements DHCP and TFTP server ATTENTION To flash firmware a DHCP server and a TFTP or TFTP BootP server must be installed on the locally connected computer This does not apply to the mGuard centerport when the firmware is loaded from a USB mass storage device or a CD Install the DHCP and TFTP server if necessary see Installing the DHCP and TFTP server on page 8 9 No such server is required for the mGuard centerport when the firmware is loaded from a USB mass storage device or a CD ROM No such server is required for the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 when the firmware is to be loaded from an SD card With flashing the firmware is always first loaded from an SD card Only if no SD card is found is the firmware loaded from a TFTP server Prerequisites for loading the firmware from an SD card all the necessary firmware files must exist in a shared directory on the first partition of the SD card this partition uses a vfat file system standard for SD cards ATTENTION The installation of a second DHCP server in a network can affect the configuration of the entire network Further requirements mGuard centerport The monitor and keyboard are connected to the device The mGuard firmware has been copied from Innominate Support or from the website www innominate com and saved on the configuration computer If your current firmware version is hig
192. ace The secondary external interface can be used to transfer data permanently or temporarily into the external network WAN If the secondary external interface is activated the following applies In Stealth network mode Only the data traffic created by the mGuard is subject to the routing specified for the secondary external interface not the data traffic coming from a locally connected computer Locally connected computers cannot be accessed remotely either only the mGuard can be accessed remotely if the configuration permits this VPN data traffic can as in the Router network mode flow to and from the locally connected computers Because this traffic is encrypted by the mGuard and is therefore seen as generated by the mGuard In Router network mode All data traffic i e from and to locally connected computers and that which is generated by the mGuard can be fed into the external network WAN via the secondary external interface Secondary External Interface Network Mode Off v 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 71 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Stealth network mode continued Operation Mode Secondary External Interface Network Mode Modem wv Network Mode Off Modem Off Default Select this setting if the operating environment of the mGuard does not require a secondary external interface You can then use the serial port or the built in modem if there is one
193. acket it is allocated to the Egress Queue named in the row Example You have defined a queue with guaranteed band width and priority for transferred audio data under Egress Queues see page 6 218 under the name Urgent Specify the rules for how the audio data is defined here and that this data belongs in the Urgent queue All TCP UDP ICMP ESP Protocols relating to the allocation IP address of the network or device where the data originates from 0 0 0 0 0 means all IP addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 Allocate the traffic from this source to the queue selected under Queue Name towards the back of this row Port used at the source where the data originates from only evaluated for TCP and UDP protocols any describes any selected port startport endport e g 110 120 defines a range of ports You can specify individual ports by giving either their port number or the corresponding service name e g 110 for pops or pops for 110 IP address of the network or device where the data is sent to Entries correspond to From IP as detailed above Port used at the source where the data is sent to Entries correspond to From Port as detailed above 6 224 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration QoS menu gt gt Egress Rules gt gt Internal External External 2 Dial in QoS menu gt gt Egress Rules VPN gt gt VPN
194. ackets may pass through Reject means that the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been rejected In Stealth mode Reject has the same effect as Drop Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Freely selectable comment for this rule For each individual firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default External 2 and Dial in are only for devices with serial ports see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 6 212 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 9 2 SEC Stick connections SEC Stick Connections SEC Stick connections SEC Stick connections PEF Ensen Po username tame compory ction body EH w v nol SEC Stick gt gt Connections gt gt SEC Stick connections List of the defined SEC Stick connections If you want to add a new connection click on the downwards arrow on the top left You can edit an existing connection by clicking the Edit button SEC Stick connections General myconeny a Not all the functions of the SEC Stick can be configured using the web interface of the mGuard Enabled User Name Name Company The Enabled switch must be set to Yes for a defined SEC Stick connection to be used A SEC Stick co
195. ackets of an SSH connection for example by allowing an SEC Stick Hub amp Spoke connection then the existing VPN firewall rules are not applied This means for example that the packets of an SSH connection are sent through a VPN tunnel despite being contrary to its firewall rule oy 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 201 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt Firewall Incoming Outgoing General firewall setting Accept all incoming connections the data packets for all incoming connections are accepted Drop all incoming connections the data packets for all incoming connections are dropped Use the firewall ruleset below displays additional setting options This menu item is not included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 The following settings are only visible when Use the firewall ruleset below is set Protocol From To IP From Port To Port Action Comment Log Log entries for unknown connection attempts All means TCP UDP ICMP GRE and other IP protocols 0 0 0 0 0 means all IP addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 Incoming From IP The IP address in the VPN tunnel TolP The 1 to 1 NAT address or actual address Outgoing From IP The 1 to 1 NAT address or actual address TolP The IP address in the VPN tunnel Only evaluated for TCP a
196. address from this range The address entered in the Local field must have the netmask 32 so that this signifies exactly one IP address PPTP Modem Built in Modem and Stealth only multiple clients Stealth mode Modem Built in Modem Not available on all mGuard models see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 la Local Masquerading can be used in the following network modes Router PPPoE For IP connections via a VPN connection with active local masquerading the firewall rules for outgoing data in the VPN connection in the VPN connection are used for the original source address of the connection 1 to 1 NAT la Only in Router mode With 1 to 1 NAT it is still possible to enter the used network addresses local and or remote for specifying the tunnel beginning and end independently of the tunnel parameters agreed with the remote peer Local network Remote network m IPsec Tunnel fas F So aan Internet Internet network address for Network address for remote 1 to 1 NAT 1 to 1 NAT Fig 6 5 1 to 1 NAT 6 194 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 8 3 2 Authentication General Authentication Firewall IKE Options Authentication Authentication method X 509 Certificate X Local X 509 Certificate VPN Endpunkt Kundendienst MA Remote CA Certificate No CA certificate but the Remote Certificate below w Remote Certificate Subject CN VPN Endpunkt Ma
197. addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 From Port To Port Only evaluated for TCP and UDP protocols any describes any selected port startport endport e g 110 120 defines a range of ports You can specify individual ports by giving either their port number or the corresponding service name e g 110 for pops or pops for 110 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 139 mGuard 7 4 Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Incoming Rules continued Action Accept means that data packets may pass through Reject means that the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been rejected In Stealth mode Reject has the same effect as Drop Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Name of rule records if defined When a rule record name is entered the firewall rules saved under this name come into effect see the Sets of Rules tab page Comment Freely selectable comment for this rule Log For each individual firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default Log entries for When set to Yes all attempts to establish a connection that unknown connection are not covered by the rules defined above are
198. adebase accessories or replace it with the plate from the old mGuard blade To do this pull or push the plate in a sideways motion 4 22 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup Control unit CTRL slot The CTRL slot is located right next to the two power supplies An mGuard blade operated here works as a controller for all other mGuard blades During the first installation of an mGuard blade into the CTRL slot the blade is reconfigured as a control unit as follows The user interface is reconfigured for operation as a controller It switches into router mode with the local IP address 192 168 1 1 The firewall CIFS Integrity Monitoring and VPN services are reset and deactivated Connecting the mGuard blade Computer in patch panel Patch panel Switch mGuard blade Before Fig 4 14 Connecting the mGuard blade to the network ATTENTION If your computer is already attached to a network then patch the mGuard blade between the existing network connection Please note that initial configuration can only be made from the local computer over the LAN interface The mGuard firewall rejects all IP traffic from the WAN to the LAN interface Additional driver installation is not necessary For security reasons we recommend that you change the default Root and Administrator passwords during the first configuration Serial port ATTENTION The serial port RJ12 socket must not be conne
199. administrative role Ses admin Administrator netadmin Administrator for the network audit Auditor 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 119 mGuard 7 4 6 5 2 Authentication gt gt Firewall Users For example to eliminate private surfing on the Internet every outgoing connection is blocked under Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Sets of Rules VPN is not affected by this Under Network Security gt gt User Firewall certain users can be assigned different firewall definitions e g outgoing connections are permitted This user firewall rule comes into effect as soon as the respective firewall user has logged in see Network Security gt gt User Firewall on page 6 154 6 5 2 1 Firewall Users This menu is not available on the mGuard rs2000 Authentication Firewall Users Firewall Users Access Status Users Enable user firewall Yes v Enable group authentication No v F Service_1 LocalDB v Authentication gt gt Firewall Users gt gt Firewall Users Users Lists the firewall users by their user names Also defines the authentication methods Enable user firewall Under the Network Security gt gt User Firewall menu firewall rules can be defined and assigned to specific firewall users By selecting Yes the firewall rules for the listed users are activated as soon as the corresponding user logs in Enable group If enabled the mGuard forwards login requests for u
200. al number and a voucher key in the voucher included with the mGuard The voucher can also be purchased separately With this you can perform the following functions Request the required feature license file Install the license file 6 32 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt Licensing gt gt Install Automatic License Voucher Serial Installation Number Voucher Key Reload Licenses Manual License Installation Order License Filename Enter the serial number printed on the voucher and the corresponding voucher key then click on Online License Request The mGuard now establishes a connection via the Internet and installs the respective license on the mGuard if the voucher is valid This can be used if the license installed in the mGuard has been deleted Click on the Online License Reload button The licenses that were previously issued for this mGuard are then retrieved from the Internet and installed After clicking the Edit License Request Form button an online form is provided which can be used to order the desired license In the request form enter the following information Voucher Serial Number The serial number printed on the voucher Voucher Key The voucher key on the voucher Flash ID Filled out automatically After the form is sent the license file is made available for downloading and can be installed in the mGuard in a sub sequent step File
201. al time clock Trusted Platform Module TPM temperature sensor 10 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Technical Data 10 5 mQGuard smart mGuard smart 266 mGuard smart 533 Hardware properties Platform Network interfaces Other interfaces Drives High availability Power supply Power consumption Temperature range Air humidity range Protection class Dimensions H x W x D Weight Firmware amp performance values Firmware compatibility Data throughput router firewall Hardware based encryption Encrypted VPN throughput AES 256 Management support Diagnostics Other Conformity Intel network processor optionally with 533 MHz or 266 MHz clock rate 1 LAN port 1 WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 Base TX RJ45 Full Duplex Auto MDIX Depends on the firmware used Via USB interface 5 V at 500 mA Optional External power supply unit 110 230 V Max 2 5 W 0 C to 40 C operation 20 C to 70 C storage 20 to 90 during operation non condensing IP 30 27x77x115mm 158g mGuard v5 0 or higher Innominate recommends firmware version 6 x or 7 x with the current patch releases For scope of functions see relevant firmware data sheet 99 Mbit s bi directional 99 Mbit s bi directional DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 35 Mbit s smart 256 bi directional 70 Mbit s smart 533 bi directional Web GUI HTTPS Command Line Interface SSH SNMP v1 2 3 central
202. alid unconditionally for data packets created by the mGuard This definition takes priority over other settings see also Example of a network on page 6 250 Static Stealth Configuration Client IP address The IP address of the computer connected to the LAN port Clients MAC address The physical address of the network adapter in the local computer where the mGuard is connected e The MAC address can be determined as follows On the DOS level Start Programs Accessories Command Prompt enter the following command ipconfig all The entry of a MAC address is not absolutely necessary The mGuard can obtain the MAC address automatically from the client The MAC address 0 0 0 0 0 0 must be entered in order to do this Please note that the mGuard can only forward the network packets through to the client after the MAC address has been determined If no Stealth Management IP Address or Clients MAC address is configured in static Stealth mode then DAD ARP requests are sent to the internal interface see RFC2131 section 4 4 1 Secondary External Interface A Only on Router network mode with static router mode or Stealth This menu item is not network mode included in the scope of Only for mGuard rs4000 mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs functions for the mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta mGuard rs2000 In these network modes the serial port of the mGuard can be configured as an additional secondary external interf
203. alternates between the different IP addresses for the sender address in the data packets it sends This applies to network packets that the computer sends to TCP Port 139 NetBIOS As the mGuard determines the address of the computer from the sender address and thus the address at which the mGuard can be accessed the mGuard would have to switch back and forth and this would hinder its operation considerably To avoid this set this switch to Yes if you have connected the mGuard to a computer that has these properties Stealth Management IP Address Here you can specify additional IP addresses to administrate the mGuard If you have set Stealth configuration to multiple clients remote access will only be possible using this IP address An IP address of 0 0 0 0 disables this feature Note using management VLAN is not supported in Stealth autodetect mode Management IP addresses a ey Netmask Use VLAN VLAN ID 1 HX 192 168 11 1 255 255 255 0 No v 192 168 5 1 255 255 255 0 No v 1 Default gateway 192 168 11 10 An additional IP address can be specified here for the administration of the mGuard Remote access via HTTPS SNMP and SSH is only possible using this address if Stealth configuration is set to the option multiple clients the client does not answer ARP requests or no client is available is always accessible even when the network card of the client PC is not activated With the static stealth co
204. ame variables The IP address of the initiator is hidden from the destination of the data flow In particular the destination does not require any routes in order to respond in a data flow of this type not even a standard route default gateway Set the firewall so that the desired connections are allowed For incoming and outgoing rules the source address must still correspond to the original sender if the firewall rules are used Pay attention to the outgoing rules when using the External External 2 Any External settings see Outgoing Rules on page 6 141 Pay attention to the incoming rules when using the Internal setting see Incoming Rules on page 6 139 From IP 0 0 0 0 0 means that all internal IP addresses are subject to the NAT procedure To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 Comment Can be filled with relevant comments Lists the rules set for 1 1 NAT Network Address Translation With 1 1 NAT the sender IP addresses are exchanged so that every individual address is exchanged with a specific other address and not exchanged with the same address for all data packets as in IP masquerading This enables the mGuard to mirror the addresses from the internal network to the external network The mGuard is connected to network 192 168 0 0 24 using the LAN port and to network 10 0 0 0 24 using the WAN port By using 1 1 NAT the L
205. ange during the session If a computer such as this is to be accessible via the Internet it must have an address that is known to the remote peer This is the only way to establish a connection to the computer If the address of the computer changes constantly then this is not possible The exception to this is when the operator of the computer has an account with a Dynamic DNS provider DNS Domain Name Server In this case the operator can set a host name with this provider under which the system should be accessible e g www example com The Dynamic DNS provider also provides a small program that must be installed and run on the affected computer At each new Internet session this tool informs the Dynamic DNS provider which IP address the local computer has currently been assigned The Domain Name Server registers the current assignment of host name to IP address and also informs the other Domain Name Servers over the Internet 9 2 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Glossary Default route If a remote system now wishes to establish a connection to a system that is registered with the DynDNS provider then the remote system can use the host name of the system as its address This will establish a connection to the responsible DNS Domain Name Server in order to look up the IP address that is currently registered for this host name The corresponding IP address is sent back from the DNS to the remote system which can then use this as t
206. another interface explicitly with Accept before you make the new setting effective by clicking the Apply button Otherwise if you are locked out you must perform the recovery procedure Action Possible settings Accept means that data packets may pass through Reject means that the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been reject ed In Stealth mode Reject has the same effect as Drop Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Comment Freely selectable comment for this rule Log For each individual firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 15 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access continued RADIUS Authentication This menu item is not included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 Use RADIUS authentication for Shell access When No is selected the password of the users who logon via shell access are checked according to the local database on the mGuard Select Yes to have users authenticated using a RADIUS server This applies to users who wish to access the mGuard via shell access using SSH or a serial console The password is only checked locally for the predefined users root a
207. ardware properties Platform Network interfaces Other interfaces Memory High availability Power supply Power consumption Air humidity range Protection class Temperature range Dimensions H x W x D Weight Firmware amp performance values Firmware compatibility Data throughput router firewall Virtual Private Network VPN Hardware based encryption Encrypted VPN throughput AES 256 Management support Diagnostics Other Conformity Special features mGuard rs4000 rs2000 mGuard rs4000 Freescale network processor with 330 MHz clock rate 1 LAN port 1 WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 BaseTX RJ45 Full Duplex Auto MDIX Serial RS232 9 pin D SUB connector 2 digital inputs and 2 digital outputs 128 MB RAM 128 MB Flash SD card Replaceable configuration memory Optional VPN router and firewall Voltage range 9 to 36 V DC redundant Typically 2 13 W 5 to 95 operation storage non condensing IP 20 20 C to 60 C operation 20 C to 70 C storage 130 x 45 x 114 mm to the mounting rail support 725 g TX TX mGuard v7 4 0 or higher mGuard rs2000 Freescale network processor with 330 MHz clock rate 1 LAN port 1 WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 BaseTX RJ45 Full Duplex Auto MDIX Serial RS232 9 pin D SUB connector 2 digital inputs and 2 digital outputs 128 MB RAM 128 MB Flash SD card Replaceable configuration memo
208. art 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at their own expense 7961_en_01 INNOMINATE mGuard 7 4 Issued by Innominate Security Technologies AG Rudower Chaussee 13 12489 Berlin Germany Tel 49 0 30 92 10 28 0 contact innominate com www innominate com Copyright 2012 Innominate Security Technologies AG Innominate document number UG20740241 1 036 INNOMINATE 7961_en_01 Table of Contents T IMtrOGAUCTION o spe a ei thai head a a tied deans a e a E nails 1 1 1 1 D vice yersin Sena e a a A ae oa hoes 1 3 2 Typical Application Scenarios seoeneeeeeeeneeeeenresorettoerrrntrtenrtsttrtsteernnrrttentesttrrserrrn nenen renent 2 1 2 1 Stealth MOUS iiin a E A E E E REEE 2 1 2 2 Network router keia Me ees ee ae eee 2 2 2 3 DMZ voce tote aenean aae teeta ha etn tenon ates rue cent Salty Meet ctn ath 2 3 2 4 VPN Gateway ac iseeciscsccscsce iisesccdecduectnecenpussceeseuiedeaicdeadecadavisldcavessighidivasunedeavuardbess 2 3
209. as Local in the definition of the VPN connection see Defining VPN connection VPN connection channels on page 6 182 Ifthe Enable 1 to 1 NAT of the local network to an internal network option is set to Yes see 1 to 1 NAT on page 6 194 the following applies The internal IP address in Stealth mode the Stealth Management IP Address or the Virtual IP must be located in the network that is entered as Internal network address for local 1 to 1 NAT Ifthe Enable 1 to 1 NAT of the remote network to another network option is set to Yes see 1 to 1 NAT on page 6 194 the following applies 6 46 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration The IP address of the trap recipient must be located in the network that is entered as Remote VPN Management gt gt SNMP gt gt Trap Basic traps SNMP authentication Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardinfo generic trap authenticationFailure specific trap 0 Sent if an unauthorized station tries to access the mGuard SNMP agent Link Up Down Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardinfo generic trap linkUp linkDown specific trap 0 Sent when the connection to a port is interrupted linkDown or restored linkUp Coldstart Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardinfo generic trap coldStart specific trap 0 Sent after cold or warm start Admin access SSH Activate traps Y
210. as an attempt is made to use firewall redundancy Only identical mGuards can be used together in a redundant pair 7 2 1 Components in VPN redundancy The components used in VPN redundancy are the same as described under firewall redundancy One additional component is available here VPN state synchronization Some other components are slightly expanded for VPN redundancy However the connectivity check availability check and state synchronization on the firewall are all made in the same way VPN state synchronization The mGuard supports the configuration of firewall rules for the VPN connection The VPN state synchronization monitors the state of the different VPN connections on the active mGuard It ensures that the mGuard on standby receives a valid up to date copy of the VPN state database As during state synchronization of the firewall VPN state synchronization sends updates from the active mGuard to the mGuard on standby Following a request by the mGuard on standby the active mGuard sends a complete record of all state information Dedicated interface mGuard centerport On the mGuard centerport the third Ethernet interface can be permanently assigned for VPN state synchronization As during state synchronization of the firewall the data traffic for the VPN state synchronization is transmitted for the dedicated interface when a variable is set Under Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy set Inte
211. as the remote peer The setting under Interface to use for gateway setting any is decisive 6 178 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration IPsec VPN gt gt Global gt gt Options continued TCP port to listen on Number of the TCP port where the encapsulated data packets to be received come in The port number entered here must be the same as the one entered at the remote peer s mGuard as TCP Port of the server which accepts the encapsulated connection Psec VPN gt gt Connections menu Edit General tab page The following restrictions apply The port to listen on must not be identical to a port that is being used for remote access SSH HTTPS or SEC Stick Server ID 0 63 The default value 0 usually does not have to be changed The numbers are used to differentiate different centers A different number only has to be used in the following case An mGuard installed before a machine must make connec tions to two or more different maintenance centers and their mGuards with TCP encapsulation activated IP Fragmentation IKE Fragmentation UDP packages can be oversized if an IPsec connection is made between the participants including the exchange of certificates Some routers are not capable of forwarding large UDP packages if they are fragmented during the transfer pro cess e g by DSL in 1500 byte segments Some defective devices forward the first fragment only leading to a connec tion failure If t
212. assword any more proceed as follows Check whether you can read the old password from the other mGuard If the other mGuard is switched off or missing you can simply enter the correct new password on the active mGuard on which you accidentally set the incorrect password Make sure that the other mGuard gets the same password before it starts operating again If the other mGuard is already using the new password you must ensure that the mGuard with the incorrect password is not active or does not become active e g if the cable is disconnected at the LAN or WAN interface For a remote access you can enter a destination for the availability check that will not react First check that there is no error in the redundancy for either of the mGuards One mGuard must be active and the other must be on standby If necessary you must remove any errors displayed Replace the incorrect password with another one Also enter this password for the active mGuard Start operating the non active mGuard again For example by connecting the Ethernet cable again or setting up the old settings for the availability check again 6 228 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy continued Virtual interface External virtual Router 1 2 3 to 255 default 51 Ip Only in Router network mode This ID is sent by the redundant pair with each presence no tification CARP via
213. ate IP networks where the IP devices have configured no useful standard route or differentiated routing settings e g PLC without a corresponding setting The corresponding settings must also be made under 1 1 NAT This method is also known as P Masquerading Factory default NAT is not active If the mGuard is operated in PPPoE PPTP mode NAT must be activated in order to gain access to the Internet If NAT is not activated only VPN connections can be used IP address of the list is always used for IP Masquerading These rules do not apply to Stealth mode If more than one static IP address for the WAN port is used the first Outgoing on Interface External External 2 Any External Internal Specifies over which interface the data packets go out so that the rule applies to them Any External refers to the External and External 2 interfaces 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 103 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt NAT gt gt Masquerading continued 1 1 NAT Example A masking is defined which applies for network data flows in Router mode These data flows are initiated so that they lead to a destination device that can be accessed over the selected network interface on the mGuard To do this the mGuard replaces the IP address of the initiator with a suitable IP address of the selected network interface in all associated data packets The effect is the same as for the other values of the s
214. ateway software is able to establish a VPN connection or if a firewall prevents this Procedure Enter the name or the IP address of the VPN gateway in the Hostname IP Address field e Click on the Ping button e You will then receive an appropriate notification 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 247 mGuard 7 4 6 13 2 Support gt gt Advanced 6 13 2 1 Hardware This page lists the hardware properties of the mGuard Support Advanced Hardware Snapshot Hardware Information Hardware Innominate mGuard rs2000 CPU e300c3 CPU Family mpc83xx CPU Stepping 1 0 CPU Clock Speed 330 MHz System Temperature 34 5 C System Uptime 4 min User Space Memory 126532 kB MAC 1 00 0c be 04 10 3a MAC 2 00 0c be 04 10 3b MAC 3 00 0c be 04 10 3c MAC 4 00 0c be 04 10 3d Product Name mGuard rs2000 TX TX OEM Name innominate OEM SerialNumber 2030749866 SerialNumber 2030749866 Flash ID N205d28323633151c1aa2d7cdc9cceae3e5 Hardware Version 00003200 Version Parameterset 4 Version of the bootloader BootLoader 2 3 5 default Version of the rescue system MGUARD2 Rescue 1 8 1 default Current root filesystem rootfs2 6 13 2 2 Snapshot This function is used for support purposes Support Advanced Hardware snapshot Support Snapshot This will create a snapshot of the mGuard for support purposes It creates a compressed file in tar gz format containing all current configuration settings and log entries that co
215. ating mGuard The Yes setting is not supported in the Stealth network mode No default VPN connections exist separately Yes Hub and Spoke feature activated A control center diverts VPN connections to several branches who can also communicate with each other mGuard remote peers can also exchange data between each other during the establishment of such a star VPN connection topology In this case we recommend that the local mGuard consults CA certificates for the authentication of remote peers see Authentication on page 6 195 Archive diagnostic If errors occur when setting up VPN connections the mGuard messages for VPN logging can be used to find the source of the error on the connections No Only basis of corresponding entries see Logging gt gt Browse local when started via logs menu This error diagnosis is a standard option Set this nph vpn cgi switch to No default if it is sufficient or CMD contact The CMD contact is only available for the mGuard industrial rs Option Only when started via nph vpn cgi or CMD contact If the possibility of diagnosing VPN connection problems using the mGuard logging is seen as too impractical or insufficient select this option This may be the case if the following conditions apply 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 173 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Global gt gt Options continued Incertain application environments e g when the mGuard i
216. ation is resolved automatically The password update was started on all mGuards However one mGuard then fails and has to be replaced Check the remaining mGuard to see whether the password update has already been completed If you see a green checkmark you have to set the new password directly on the mGuard to be replaced If you do not see a green checkmark then no password update has taken place on the remaining mGuard Then you have to change the password again on the mGuard that is still operating Wait until the green checkmark appears Only then replace the mGuard that has failed Configure the replacement mGuard at once when setting up the redundancy with the new password The password update was started but not on all mGuards because they have failed As soon as a failed mGuard is online again the password update has to be started A replacement mGuard first has to be configured with the old password before being connected Procedure for an incorrect password If you accidentally entered an incorrect password for an mGuard you cannot simply enter the password again correctly Otherwise it can happen that both mGuards are active after this If you still know the old password proceed as follows Reconfigure the mGuard for which the incorrect password was entered with the old password Wait until the mGuard shows that the old password is being used Then enter the correct password If you do not know the old p
217. atus Number of check inter vals Kind of check Check interval Timeout per interval and set of targets Results of the last 16 intervals youngest first Success Fail Result of the connectivity check for the external interface The Fail result is also displayed as long as the outcome of the connectivity check is unknown The last two intervals of the connectivity check are taken into consideration for the combined result Success is only dis played when both were successful Shows whether the Ethernet connection has been estab lished Number of completed check intervals When the counter is full a notification is shown in front of the number Repeats the setting for the connectivity check see Kind of check on page 6 233 Shows the time in milliseconds between the starts of the check This value is calculated from the set fail over switching time Shows the time in milliseconds after which a target is classed as unanswered when no response to the ICMP echo request is received This value is calculated from the set fail over switching time A green plus indicates a successful check A red minus indicates a failed check 6 238 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Redundancy gt gt FW Redundancy Status gt gt Connectivity Status continued Results of the primary Only visible when a primary target is set see Primary targets targets for ICMP echo requests on page 6 233 Shows
218. ault 192 168 1 1 A third IP address is used for the mGuard interface to the WAN The connection to an external network e g Internet is made via this IP address 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 31 mGuard 7 4 4 10 3 Hardware installation A ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge AteS Before handling the mGuard pci touch the bare metal case of the PC to discharge the build up of static electricity in your body The module contains components that may be damaged or destroyed due to electrostat ic discharge When handling the module observe the necessary safety measures against electrostatic discharge ESD according to EN 61340 5 1 and EN 61340 5 2 mGuard pci Layout 1 Rescue button 2 Jumper for activating deactivating the driver mode 3 LAN port lt Deactivated in driver mode In Power S over PCI mode the network card is connected to the same or another protected computer or network ah us A 6 us yi 3 pun 4 WAN port Connections to the external network e g Internet are established over this interface Incoming connections are blocked here according to the firewall default settings Use a UTP cable CAT 5 Procedure Configure the mGuard pci for Driver mode or Power over PCI mode see Selection of Driver mode or Power over PCl mode on page 4 28 To enable the required mode set the jumper 2 to the following positions Driver mode Power ov
219. backup on the controller is activated deactivated for this slot R Restore Automatic configuration restoration after replacing the mGuard is activated deactivated for this slot 6 58 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 3 2 Blade Control gt gt Blade 01 to 12 These pages show the status information of each installed mGuard and allow the configuration backup and restoration of the respective mGuard 6 3 2 1 Blade in slot Blade Control Blade 03 Blade in slot 03 Configuration Overview Device type blade ID bus controller ID 0x22 0x3 0x1 0x1 Serial number 2T500087 Flash ID 000c00034100692f Software version 7 4 1 default MAC addresses 00 0c be 02 0e f0 00 0c be 02 0e f1 00 0c be 02 0e 2 00 0c be 02 0e f3 Status ey LAN link status 07 WAN link status U Temperature N A Blade Control gt gt Blade xx gt gt Blade in slot xx Overview Device type Device name e g blade or blade XL ID bus controller ID ID of this slot on the control bus of the bladebase Serial number The serial number of the mGuard Flash ID Flash ID of the mGuard s flash memory Software version Software version installed on the mGuard MAC addresses All MAC addresses used by the mGuard Status Status of the mGuard LAN link status Status of the LAN port WAN link status Status of the WAN port Temperature N A not available 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 59
220. be routed over X Network Gateway alternative gateway ae 192 168 101 0 24 10 1 0 253 Secondary External Interface Network Mode Off v Static Stealth Configuration Client s IP address 192 68 11 1 Client s MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Stealth network mode Network Mode l Only valid when the Stealth network mode is selected Stealth configuration autodetect static multiple clients autodetect The mGuard analyzes the network traffic and independently configures its network connection accordingly It functions transparently static If the mGuard cannot analyze the network traffic e g because the connected local computer only receives data then the Stealth configuration must be set to static In this case further text fields are provided for the static stealth configuration 6 68 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Stealth network mode continued Stealth Management IP Address multiple clients Default As with autodetect but it is possible to connect more than one computer to the mGuard LAN port secure port meaning that several IP addresses can be used here Autodetect ignore Yes No NetBIOS over TCP traffic on TCP Port 139 Only with automatic Stealth configuration If a Windows computer has more than one network card installed it can happen that it
221. both machine certificates The machine certificate is normally also replicated with the corresponding key during the VPN state synchronization In the event of a fail over the other mGuard can take over and even continue the creation of incomplete ISAKMP SAs Switching the remote certificates for a VPN connection The mGuard can be set so that it authenticates VPN partners directly through the X 509 certificates which authenticate them This X 509 certificate must then be set on the mGuard This is known as the Remote CA Certificate If a remote certificate is updated then only one of the mGuards will have a new certificate for a brief period We therefore recommend authenticating the VPN partners using CA certificates instead of remote certificates in VPN redundancy Adding a new CA certificate to identify VPN partners The mGuard can be set so that it authenticates VPN partners using CA certificates see CA Certificates on page 6 133 and Authentication on page 6 195 To do this select Signed by any trusted CA under Psec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt Authentication Remote CA Certificate 7 24 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy With this setting a new CA certificate can be added without affecting the existing VPN connections However the new CA certificates are used immediately The X 509 certificate used by the VPN partner to authenticate itself to the mGuard can then be repla
222. c tunnel connections or ad Protocol Protocol All v Enabled Yes No As above Comment Freely selectable comments Can be left empty Type Tunnel Transport As above When a change to Transport is made the following fields apart from Protocol are hidden as these parameters are omitted Local See Local on page 6 187 Remote See Remote on page 6 187 Virtual IP for the client See Virtual IP for the client on page 6 189 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 189 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt General continued Further settings can be made by clicking More Local NAT NAT With NAT Network Address Translation addresses in data packets are replaced by other addresses The IP addresses of devices can be rewritten that are located at the local end of the VPN tunnel local NAT or the addresses of devices are rewritten that are located at the remote end remote NAT Local NAT for IPsec tunnel connections Internal network address for local 1 to 1 NAT Off 1 to 1 NAT local masquerading Default Off This defines which type of address rewriting is performed for the target address of the received packets and the source address of the sent packets Off No NAT is performed 1 to 1 NAT Local NAT Local NAT for IPsec tunnel 1 4 NAT connections Internal network address for local 1 to 1 NAT 192 168 2 1 With 1 to 1 NAT IP addresses of d
223. ccseeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeee 6 21 6 2 3 Management gt gt LICENSING ccccccceceseeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesereeessnees 6 32 6 2 4 Management gt gt Update cccccscccceseeeeseeeeesneeeceneeesesneeeesereessnees 6 35 6 2 5 Management gt gt Configuration Profiles 0 ceeccesceeseeeeeeeeeteeeneetens 6 39 6 2 6 Management gt gt SNMP cccccccsssceeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeseeescueeeseneeeeseaes 6 43 6 2 7 Management gt gt Central Management ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 6 53 6 2 8 Management gt gt Restart c ccccesccceesseecesneeceeneeeeeseeeseneeeessteeennes 6 57 6 3 Blade Control Menu ice ac nis Se ok a ee et Se pe ees 6 58 6 3 1 Blade Control gt gt Overview c cccscccssccstsecsteesseecsescnseseeeeseeesseeesneees 6 58 6 3 2 Blade Control gt gt Blade 01 to 12 cccecccceseesseestessssesseeesteeseseeeseeees 6 59 6 4 Network Menu ys aciicctare taa taea aE EAn aa Ea aT aaa 6 61 6 4 1 Network gt gt Interfaces ainoinesgcnynig einen n a 6 61 6 4 2 Network s gt NAT iieii a a a An 6 103 6 4 3 Network gt gt DNS irisi e a i i 6 108 6 4 4 Network gt gt DHCP eiicissiyetivs ent oeie a i 6 112 6 4 5 Network gt gt Proxy Settings c ecceseceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesneeeneeeenees 6 116 6 5 Authentication MENU vi sne pa Nod aiid cand 6 117 6 5 1 Authentication gt gt Administrative Users seernes 6 117 6 5 2 Authentication gt gt Firewall Users 2 0 0
224. ce center mGuards at machine controls Required basic settings Required basic settings IPsec VPN menu Global Options tab IPsec VPN menu Global Options tab Listen for incoming VPN connections which are Listen for incoming VPN connections which are encapsulated YES encapsulated NO Submenu Connections Submenu Connections General tab General tab page Address of the remote site s VPN gateway Address of the remote site s VPN gateway Fixed IP address or hostname any Connection startup Initiate or Initiate on traffic Connection startup Wait Encapsulate the VPN traffic in TCP YES Fig 6 2 TCP encapsulation in an application scenario with a maintenance center and machines maintained remotely via VPN connections IPsec VPN gt gt Global gt gt Options TCP Encapsulation Listen for incoming Default setting No Only set to Yes if the TCP Encapsulation VPN connections function is being used Only then can the mGuard accept which are connection setups with encapsulated packets lat z 7 encapsulated Due to technical reasons the main memory RAM requirements increase with each interface that needs to be listened on for VPN connections encapsulated in TCP If multiple interfaces need to be listened on then the device must have at least 64 MB RAM The interfaces to be listened on are determined by the mGuard according to the settings on the active VPN connec tions that have configured any
225. ced with a minimal interruption The only requirement is ensuring that the new CA certificate is available first The mGuard can be set so that it checks the validity period of the certificates provided by the VPN partner see Certificate settings on page 6 129 In this case new trusted CA certificates must be added for configuring the mGuard These certificates should also have a validity period If the CRL check is activated under Authentication gt gt Certificates gt gt Certificate settings then one URL per CA certificate must be maintained where the corresponding CRL is available The URL and CRL must be published before the mGuard uses the CA certificates in order to confirm the validity of the certificates displayed by the VPN partners Using X 509 certificates with limited validity periods and CRL checks The use of X 509 certificates is described under Certificate settings on page 6 129 Authentication gt gt Certificates gt gt Certificate settings menu If X 509 certificates are used here and Check the validity period of certificates and CRLs is set then the system time must be correct We recommend synchronizing the system time using a trusted NTP server Each mGuard in a redundant pair can use the other as an additional NTP server but not as the only NTP server 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 25 mGuard 7 4 7 3 Ring Network Coupling The Ring Network Coupling function is not supported
226. ces on page 6 61 and General on page 6 62 In this case the data traffic is also made over the serial port PPP dial in options For the PPP dial in option see Options for using the serial port on page 6 96 Note that the serial port of the device also provides similar usage options see above Thus with the mGuard industrial rs with a built in modem the normal data traffic can be made over a modem connection Modem network mode and simultaneously a second modem connection can be used for the PPP dial in option for example 6 100 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Additionally for mGuard industrial rs with built in modem analog For mGuard industrial rs with built in modem External Modem Hardware handshake RTSICTS Baudrate Handle modem transparently for dial in only Modem init string Built in Modem analog Country Extension line regarding dial tone Speaker volume built in speaker Speaker control built in speaker Of v 57600 Yes v d dATH OK Germany v No w Low volume v Speaker is on during call establishment but off when receiving carrier w Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Modem Console for mGuard industrial rs with built in modem External Modem Built in Modem analog As for mGuard industrial rs without a built in modem mGuard centerport mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard and mGuard delta Configuration as above for External M
227. cess type For the user firewall see Network Security gt gt User Firewall on page 6 154 The factory defaults for administration purposes are as follows pay attention to capitalization Login admin Password mGuard To configure the device make the desired or necessary entries on the individual pages of the mGuard interface see Configuration on page 6 1 For security reasons we recommend that you change the default Root and Administrator passwords during the first configuration see Authentication gt gt Administrative Users on page 6 117 5 4 Remote configuration The mGuard must be configured to permit remote configuration Remote configuration is disabled by default To enable remote configuration see Management gt gt Web Settings on page 6 21 and Access on page 6 22 To configure the mGuard from a remote computer using the web interface first establish a connection to the mGuard from there Proceed as follows e Start the web browser on the remote computer e g Mozilla Firefox MS Internet Explorer Google Chrome or Apple Safari the web browser must support HTTPS e Under address enter the IP address where the mGuard is available externally over the Internet or WAN together with the port number if required If this mGuard is accessible over the Internet at the address https 123 45 67 89 and port number 443 has been set for remote access then you need to enter t
228. ch then the smallest network defined in the routing entries that matches the data packet decides which route this packet takes Example The external route of the primary external interface is entered as 10 0 0 0 8 while the external route of the secondary external interface is entered as 10 1 7 0 24 Data packets to network 10 1 7 0 24 are then routed over the secondary external interface although the routing entry for the primary external interface also matches them Reason The routing entry for the secondary external interface indicates a smaller network 10 1 7 0 24 lt 10 0 0 0 8 This rule does not apply in Stealth network mode regarding the Stealth Management IP Address see Stealth Management IP Address on page 6 69 Ifthe routing entries for the primary and secondary external interfaces are identical then the secondary external interface wins i e the data packets with a matching destination address are routed over the secondary external interface The routing settings for the secondary external interface only become effective when the secondary external interface is activated Particular attention must be paid to this if the routing entries for the primary and secondary external interfaces overlap or are identical whereby the priority of the secondary external interface has a filter effect with the following result Data packets whose destination matches both the primary and secondary external i
229. changes are automati cally saved on an ECS so that the currently used profile is always saved on the ECS Automatically saved configuration profiles are only used by an mGuard on start up when the mGuard has set the original password root as the password for the root user see Loading a profile from an external storage medium on page 6 42 Configuration changes are also carried out when the ECS is disconnected full or defective Corresponding error mes sages appear in Logging see Chapter 6 12 2 The activation of the new setting extends the reaction time on the user interface when settings are changed Profiles on external storage medium mGuard rs4000 2000 EAGLE mGuard mGuard centerport EAGLE mGuard Configuration profiles can also be stored on an external config storage ECS mGuard centerport and EAGLE mGuard with USB interface Configuration profiles can also be stored on a USB memory stick This must have the following properties vfat file system on the initial primary partition with at least 64 MB memory 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 41 mGuard 7 4 mGuard rs4000 rs2000 Configuration profiles can also be stored on an SD card up to 2 GB capacity This must have the following properties Certified and released by Innominate Security Technologies AG current release list is available under www innominate de Saving profiles on an external storage medium e EAGLE mGuard Connect the
230. check The virtual IP address of the router would then not be a sensible target Redundant group Several redundant pairs can be connected within a LAN segment redundant group A value is defined as an identifier through the router ID for each virtual presence of the redundant pair As long as these identifiers are different the redundant pairs do not come into conflict with each other Data traffic The mGuard on standby is assigned the outdated state as a result of a high latency period in a network used for updating the state synchronization or a serious data loss in this network Provided no more than two back to back updates are lost this does not occur The mGuard on standby automatically requests a repeat of the update The latency period requirements are the same as those detailed under Fail over switching time on page 7 5 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 11 mGuard 7 4 Sufficient bandwidth The data traffic generated as a result of the connectivity check availability check and state synchronization uses bandwidth in the network The connectivity check also generates complicated calculations There are several ways to limit this or stop it completely If the influence on other devices is unacceptable The connectivity check must either be deactivated or must only relate to the actual IP address of the other mGuard The data traffic generated by the connectivity check and state synchronization must be m
231. cific trap mGuardTrapUserFirewallLogin 1 additional mGuardTResUserFirewallUsername mGuardTResUserFirewallSrclP mGuardTResUserFirewallAuthenticati onMethod Sent when user logs in to a user firewall enterprise oid generic trap specific trap additional mGuardTrapUserFirewall enterpriseSpecific mGuardTrapUserFirewallLogout 2 mGuardTResUserFirewallUsername mGuardTResUserFirewallSrclP mGuardTResUserFirewallLogoutReas on Sent when user logs out of a user firewall enterprise oid generic trap specific trap mGuardTrapUserFirewall enterpriseSpecific mGuardTrapUserFirewallAuthError TRAP TYPE 3 mGuardTResUserFirewallUsername mGuardTResUserFirewallSrclP mGuardTResUserFirewallAuthenticati onMethod Sent during an authentication error additional 6 50 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt SNMP gt gt Trap continued VPN traps Trap destinations IPsec connection status changes L2TP connection status changes Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardTrapVPN genericTrap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapVPNIKEServerStatus 1 additional mGuardTResVPNStatus Sent during starting and stopping of IPsec IKE server enterprise oid mGuardTrapVPN genericTrap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapVPNIPsecConnStatus 2 additional mGuardTResV
232. condary external interface The result of a probe run is runs before the negative if none of the ping probes it contains were successful secondary external The number specified here also indicates how many interface is activated consecutive probe runs must be successful after the secondary external interface has been activated before this interface is deactivated again DNS Mode Only relevant if the secondary external interface is activated in the temporary operation mode The DNS mode selected here specifies which DNS server the mGuard uses for temporary connections set up over the secondary external interface Use primary DNS settings untouched DNS Root Servers Provider defined via PPP dial up User defined servers listed below Use primary DNS settings untouched The DNS servers defined under Network gt DNS Server see Network gt gt NAT on page 6 103 are used DNS Root Servers Queries are sent to the root servers in the Internet whose IP addresses are stored in the mGuard These addresses rarely change Provider defined via PPP dial up The domain name servers of the Internet Service Provider that provide access to the Internet are used User defined servers listed below If this setting is selected the mGuard will connect to the domain name servers shown in the subsequent list of User defined name servers User defined name You can enter the IP addresses of domain name
233. condary mGuard Fig 7 1 Firewall redundancy example Basic requirements for firewall redundancy A license is required for the firewall redundancy function It can only be used if the corresponding license has been purchased and installed Only identical mGuards can be used together in a redundant pair In Router network mode firewall redundancy is only supported with the static router mode The Stealth network mode is currently not supported For further restrictions see Requirements for firewall redundancy on page 7 4 and Limits of firewall redundancy on page 7 14 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 1 mGuard 7 4 7 1 1 Components in firewall redundancy Firewall redundancy is comprised of several components Connectivity check Checks whether the necessary network connections have been established Availability check Checks whether an active mGuard is available and whether this should remain active State synchronization of the firewall The mGuard on standby receives a copy of the current firewall database state Virtual network interface Provides virtual IP addresses and MAC addresses that can be used by other devices as routers and default gateways State monitoring Coordinates all components State display Shows the user the state of the mGuard Connectivity check On each mGuard in a redundant pair checks are constantly made as to whether a conn
234. cted against unauthorized access To do this each IPsec channel is provided with an independent sequential number The mGuard drops ESP packets which have the same sequential number as a packet that has already been decrypted for a specific IPsec channel by the mGuard This mechanism is known as the IPsec replay window It prevents replay attacks where an attacker sends previously recorded data to simulate a different identity The IPsec replay window is only replicated sporadically during the state synchronization as it uses a great deal of resources It can thus occur that the active mGuard has an obsolete IPsec replay window following a fail over An attack is then possible for a brief period until the real VPN partner has sent the next ESP packet for the corresponding IPsec SA or until the IPsec SA has been updated However traffic must be captured completely for this to occur Dead Peer Detection Please note the following point for Dead Peer Detection In Dead Peer Detection set a higher timeout than the upper limit of the Fail over switching time on the redundant pair See under Psec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt IKE Options Delay between requests for a sign of life Otherwise the VPN partner may think that the redundant pair is dead although it is only dealing with a fail over 7 20 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy Data traffic A high latency period in a network used for up
235. cted directly to communication connection points Use a serial cable with an RJ12 connector to connect a serial terminal or a modem The serial cable can have a maximum length of 30 meters The serial port Serial interface can be used as described under Serial port on page 4 19 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 23 mGuard 7 4 4 8 Installing the EAGLE mGuard WARNING Do not open the housing WARNING This is a Class A device which may cause radio interference in residential areas In this case the operator may be requested to take appropriate preventative measures When installed in residential or office environments the EAGLE mGuard may only be operated in switch cabinets with fire protection properties in accordance with EN 60950 1 gt D ATTENTION The shielding ground of the connectable industrial twisted pair lines is electrically connected to the front faceplate Connecting the power supply and signal contact Terminal block The power supply and signal contact are connected via a 6 pin terminal block Signal contact 24 V P1 ov OV 24 V P2 Fig 4 15 Terminal block WARNING The EAGLE mGuard is intended for safety extra low voltage SELV opera tion Therefore power supply and signal contact connectors may only be connected with PELV or SELV circuits with voltage restrictions in accordance with EN 60950 1 The EAGLE mGuard can
236. ctions Mannheim Leipzig General Authentication Firewall IKE Options Authentication Authentication method Pre Shared Secret PSK w Pre Shared Secret Key PSK complicated_like_SDy0qoD_and_long VPN Identifier Local By default the IP address of the peer is used Other possible settings are a hostname hostname or an e mail address name hostname Remote By default the IP address of the peer is used Other possible settings are a hostname hostname or an e mail address name hostname This method is mainly used by older IPsec implementations In this case both sides of the VPN authenticate themselves with the same PSK To make the agreed key available to the mGuard proceed as follows Enter the agreed character string in the Pre Shared Secret Key PSK entry field To achieve security comparable to that of 3DES the string should consist of about 30 randomly selected characters and should include upper and lower case characters and digits l Pre Shared Secret Key cannot be used with dynamic any IP addresses Only fixed IP addresses or hostnames at both ends are supported However changing IP addresses DynDNS can be hidden behind the hostnames Pre Shared Secret Key cannot be used if at least one or both of the communication partners is located behind a NAT gateway VPN gateways use the VPN Identifier to recognize which configurations belong to the same
237. cupied internally by the host computer Fig 4 18 Driver mode Stealth mode In Stealth mode the mGuard acts as a normal network card The IP address configured for the network interface of the operating system LAN port is also used by the mGuard for its WAN port By doing this the mGuard does not appear as an individual device with its own address for data traffic to and from the computer It is not possible to use PPPoE or PPTP in Stealth mode Router mode in Driver mode Operating system P 2 D ee 192 168 1 2 D PER z as 192 168 1 1 eS ENR mGuard pci External IP If the mGuard is in Router mode or PPPoE or PPTP mode it forms its own network together with the operating system on the computer on which the mGuard is installed Fig 4 19 Driver mode Router mode This has the following significance for the IP configuration of the operating system network interface The network interface must be assigned an IP address that is different to the internal IP address of the mGuard according to the factory default of 192 168 1 1 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 29 mGuard 7 4 This is represented in the above figure by two black spheres A third IP address is used for the mGuard interface to the WAN The connection to an external network e g Internet is made via this IP address 4 10 2 Power over PCI mode Stealth mode in Power over PCI mode Network ca
238. d it immediately repeats the last IKE message which should have been sent from the previously active mGuard This compensates for cases where the previously active mGuard has sent the state synchronization but has failed before it could send the corresponding IKE message In this way the establishment of the ISAKMP SA or IPsec SA is only delayed by the switching time during a fail over An error interrupts the replacement of an ISAKMP SA If an error interrupts the replacement of an ISAKMP SA then this is compensated in the same way as during the initial establishment of the SA The old ISAKMP SA is also kept for Dead Peer Detection until the replacement of the ISAKMP SA is completed An error interrupts the replacement of an IPsec SA If an error interrupts the replacement of an IPsec SA then this is compensated in the same way as during the initial establishment of the SA As long as the replacement of the ISAKMP SA is not completed the old outgoing and incoming IPsec SAs are kept until the VPN partner notices the change The VPN state synchronization ensures that the old IPsec SAs are kept as long as the mGuard is on standby When the mGuard is enabled it can then continue with the decryption and encryption of the data traffic without the need for further action Loss of data packets during VPN state synchronization The state synchronization is resistant against the loss of one of two back to back update packets If more data packet
239. d 7 4 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Time and Date continued NTP Server NTP Network Time Protocol The mGuard can function as an NTP server for comput ers connected at its LAN port In this case the computers are configured so that the local address of the mGuard is entered as the address of the NTP server If the mGuard is operated in Stealth mode the management IP address of the mGuard if this is configured must be used for the computers or the IP address 1 1 1 1 must be entered as the local address of the mGuard For the mGuard to function as an NTP server it must get the current date and time from an NTP server time server In order to do this the address of at least one NTP server must be entered This feature must also be activated Enable NTP time synchronization Yes No NTP State NTP Server Once the NTP is enabled the mGuard obtains the date and time from one or more time server s and synchronizes itself with it or them The initial time synchronization can take up to 15 minutes During this period the mGuard repeatedly compares the time entry in the external time server and its own clock in order to match them as closely as possible Only then can the mGuard function as an NTP server for the computers con nected at its LAN port and supply them with the system time An initial time synchronization with the external time server is performed after every booting process unless
240. d over modem Fault Red The signal contact is open due to error see Installing the mGuard industrial rs on page 4 13 under Signal contact on page 4 17 The signal contact is interrupted during a reboot State Green flashing Heartbeat The device is correctly connected and functioning Error Red flashing System error Reboot the system Press the Rescue button briefly 1 5 seconds Alternatively disconnect the device from its power supply briefly then reconnect it If the error continues to occur start the recovery procedure see Performing a recovery procedure on page 8 2 or contact the support department State Flashingalternately Boot process After connecting the device to the power supply The LED switches Error green red to heartbeat mode after a few seconds LAN Green Ethernet status Shows the status of the LAN and WAN ports As soon as the device WAN Green is connected to the relevant network the LEDs are illuminated continuously to indicate the presence of a network connection over LAN or WAN The LEDs are extinguished briefly when data packets are transferred 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 3 3 mGuard 7 4 3 4 Rescue button Located in the opening Can be pressed with a straightened paper clip m Guard smart mGuard smart LED1 LED2 LED3 Fig 3 5 Control elements and displays on mGuard smart Table 3 4 Displays on mGuard smart LEDs Color State Meaning 2 R
241. d time related to the configured time zone Server IP or hostname of the server that provides the configurations Directory The directory folder on the server where the configuration is located Filename The name of the file in the directory defined above If no file name is defined here the serial number of the mGuard is used including the ending atv 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 53 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt Central Management gt gt Configuration Pull continued Number of times a Default 10 configuration profile is ignored after it was rolled back After a new configuration is retrieved it can occur that the mGuard is no longer accessible after the configuration is put into force A new remote configuration for correction purposes is then no longer possible In order to rule this out the mGuard makes the following checks After the retrieved configuration is enforced the mGuard tries to connect again to the configuration server based on the new configuration The mGuard then attempts to download the newly enforced configuration once again If this is successful the new configuration remains If this check is unsuccessful for whatever reason the mGuard assumes that the newly enforced configuration profile is defective The mGuard memorizes the MD5 total for identification purposes then performs a rollback Rollback means that the last working configuration is restored This assumes that the new n
242. d v5 0 or higher Innominate recommends firmware version 6 x or 7 x with the current patch releases For scope of functions see relevant firmware data sheet 99 Mbit s bi directional 99 Mbit s bi directional DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 35 Mbit s blade 256 bi directional 70 Mbit s blade 533 bi directional Web GUI HTTPS Command Line Interface SSH SNMP v1 2 3 central Device Management Software LEDs 2 x LAN 2 x WAN in combination for boot process heartbeat system errors Ethernet status recovery mode log file remote Syslog CE FCC 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 10 7 mGuard 7 4 10 8 Hardware properties Platform Network interfaces Other interfaces Drives High availability Power supply Power consumption Air humidity range Protection class Temperature range Dimensions H x W x D Weight Firmware amp performance values Firmware compatibility Data throughput router firewall Hardware based encryption Encrypted VPN throughput AES 256 Management support Diagnostics Other Other Conformity EAGLE mGuard Intel network processor with 533 MHz clock rate 1 LAN port 1 WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 Base TX RJ45 Full Duplex Auto MDIX Optional 100 Base FX FO Serial RS 232 RJ11 socket USB Depends on the firmware used 24 V DC max 300 mA PELV SELV redundant 25 to 25 voltage range Max 7 2 W at 24 V 10 to 95 during opera
243. dant pair is located in a different area A and B The mGuard in area A is connected to switch A1 through its external Ethernet interface and to switch A2 through its internal Ethernet interface mGuard B is connected accordingly to switches B1 and B2 In this way the switches and mGuards connect an external Ethernet network to an internal Ethernet network The connection is established by forwarding network packets in Router network mode Firewall redundancy compensates for errors displayed in Fig 7 2 when only one occurs at the same time If two errors occur simultaneously then these are only compensated for when they occur in the same area A or B For example if one of the mGuards fails completely due to a power outage then this is intercepted A connection failure is compensated for when this fails completely or partially When the connectivity check is set correctly then an incorrect connection resulting from the loss of data packets or an excessive latency period is detected and compensated for Without the connectivity check the mGuard cannot decide which area caused the error A connection failure between switches on a network side internal external is not compensated for 7 and 8 in Fig 7 2 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 7 mGuard 7 4 7 1 7 Handling firewall redundancy in extreme situations The situations described here only occur rarely Restoration in the event of a network lobotomy A network lobo
244. date is canceled and the mGuard keeps running with the existing firmware version Carrying out a firmware update There are two possibilities for carrying out a firmware update 1 You have the current package set file on your computer the file name ends with tar gz and you perform a local update 2 The mGuard downloads and installs a firmware update of your choice from the Internet via the update server Management Update Overview Update Local Update ioe Durchsuchen D The filename of the package set has the extension tar gz The format of the filename you have to enter is update a b c e f tar gz Online Update Pose setrane Automatic Update meee xyZ Install the latest minor release 2 forthe currently gS a installed major version Note It might be possible that there is no direct update from the currently installed version to the latest published minor release available Therefore after updating the system to a new minor release press this button again until you receive the message that there is no newer update available men Xyz Note It might be possible that there is no direct update from the curently installed version to the next major release available Therefore execute the minor release update first and repeat this step until you receive the message that there is no newer minor release available Then install the next major release Update Servers f E https
245. dating the state synchronization results in the mGuard on standby being assigned the outdated state This also occurs in the event of serious data loss in this network Provided no more than two back to back updates are lost this does not occur The mGuard on standby automatically requests a repeat of the update The latency period requirements are the same as those detailed under Fail over switching time on page 7 5 Actual IP addresses VPN partners may not send ESP traffic to the actual IP address of the redundant pair VPN partners must always use the virtual IP address of the redundant pair to send IKE messages or ESP traffic 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 21 mGuard 7 4 7 2 8 Transmission rate in VPN redundancy These values apply to the Router network mode when the data traffic for the state synchronization is transmitted without encryption If the transmission rate described here is exceeded then the activation time may be longer than set in the event of errors Platform m Guard centerport mGuard industrial rs mGuard smart mGuard core With 533 MHz mGuard pci mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta mGuard industrial rs mGuard smart mGuard core mGuard pci With 266 MHz mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta mGuard smart mGuard core mGuard rs4000 1 Transmission rate in firewall redundancy 220 Mbit s bi directional not more than 60 000 frames s 50 Mbit s bi directional
246. dialog that opens 6 132 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 5 4 3 CA Certificates CA certificates are those from a Certificate Authority CA CA certificates are used to check whether the certificates shown by remote peers are authentic The check is made as follows The issuing authority CA is entered as Issuer in the certificate shown by the remote peer These details can be checked for authenticity by the same Issuer using the local CA certificate For more details see Authentication gt gt RADIUS Servers on page 6 122 Example of imported CA certificates Authentication Certificates a Certificate settings Machine Certificates CA Certificates Remote Certificates CRL Trusted CA Certificates 5x Subject CN VPN RootCA 01 0 Beispiel Lieferant C DE Subject Alternative Names Issuer CN VPN RootCA 01 0 Beispiel Lieferant C DE Wi Validity From Mar 20 15 56 38 2007 GMT to Mar 20 15 56 38 2022 GMT Fingerprint MDS 49 13 FB 16 C8 34 DE C3 F7 70 AB F9 5B 76 BD 40 SHA 12 C2 4C 53 7B 60 62 FA C0 83 61 C4 92 98 03 82 75 1D 29 75 Shortname WPN RootCA 01 Upload Certificate Filename Durchsuchen J mpor oon cee Authentication gt gt Certificates gt gt CA Certificates Trusted CA Certificates Shows the current imported CA certificates To import a new certificate please proceed as follows Importing a CA certificate Requirement The file file name extension cer
247. ding connection tracking is activated on the mGuard see Advanced on page 6 147 then complex connections of this type are tracked In this case the administrator only needs to create a firewall rule on the mGuard which allows the client to establish a control channel to the FTP server The mGuard permits the establishment of a data channel by the server automatically regardless of whether this is planned by the firewall rules The tracking of complex connections is a part of the firewall state synchronization However to establish a short latency period the mGuard forwards the network packets independently from the update of the firewall state synchronization which they caused themselves Therefore it can occur that a state change for the complex connection is not forwarded on to the mGuard on standby for a very brief period when the active mGuard fails In this case tracking of the connection to the mGuard which is active after the fail over is not continued correctly This cannot be corrected by the mGuard The data connection is then reset or interrupted Fail over when establishing semi unidirectional connections A semi unidirectional connection relates to a single IP connection such as UDP connections where the data only travels in one direction after the connection is established with a bidirectional handshake The data flows from the responder to the initiator The initiator only sends data packets at the very start The
248. dmin netadmin and audit When Enable X 509 certificates for SSH access is set to Yes under X 509 Authentication the X 509 authentication procedure can be used alternatively The procedure actually used by a user depends on how he uses his SSH client When setting up RADIUS authentication for the first time select Yes The selection of As only method for password authentication is only suitable for experienced users as access to the mGuard may be com pletely blocked If you intend to use RADIUS authentication As only method for password authentication then we recommend creating a Customized Default Profile which resets the authentica tion method The predefined users root admin netadmin and audit can then no longer logon to the mGuard via SSH or the serial console Only exception Authentication via an externally accessible serial console remains possible when the local password for the root user name is entered correctly 6 16 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration X 509 Authentication X 509 Authentication Enable X 509 certificates for SSH Yes v access SSH server certificate mguard hh kunde de X ex CA certificate SSH RootCA 01 v ba SSH SubCA 01 w A a Authorized for accses as y a CN OU Admin O in px Client certificate Authorized for access as X Pa Krafti Herbert v root Findig Petra X root X Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Acc
249. down the list these are ignored Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Sets of Rules Sets of Rules Lists all defined firewall rule records Sets of rules are only used when they are referred to on the Incoming Rules or Outgoing Rules tab page Only if all the criteria of a firewall rule are fulfilled is a set of rules that is referred to in this firewall rule used Enabled Activates deactivates the relevant rule record Name Name of the rule record The name is defined during creation of the rule record The Set of Rules page is displayed after clicking on the Edit button Network Security Packet Filter Rule Record Generic Rule Record General A descriptive name for the set Generic Enabled Yes v Firewall rules Log ID tw NP 24ata51 3649 14 0 2355 0006D205000 DX E EE TO TOT Acti Comment Loa 1 Tce v 0 0 0 0 any 0 0 0 0 0 any Accept v No 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 143 mGuard 7 4 Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Sets of Rules continued General A descriptive name for the set Enabled Firewall rules Protocol From To IP From Port To Port Action Comment Log Freely selectable name It must clearly define the rule record in question A rule record can be referred to in the incoming and outgoing rule lists using this name To do this the relevant rule record name is selected in the Action column Activates deactivates the
250. dundancy is described in detail in Chapter 7 Redundancy 6 11 1 Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy This menu is not available on the mGuard rs2000 Redundancy Firewall Redundancy 6 11 1 1 Redundancy Redundancy Connectivity Checks General Enable redundancy Yes v Failover switching time 3 second s Priority of this device high v Passphrase for availability checks Virtual interfaces External virtual Router ID 190 Internal virtual Router ID 190 Encrypted state synchronisation Encrypt the state messages Yes v Encryption Algorithm 3DES v Hash Algorithm SHA 1 w Interface for state synchronisation Interface which is used for state synchronization IP of the dedicated interface 192 168 68 29 Disable the availability check at the external interface Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy General Redundancy state Enable redundancy Fail over switching time active The mGuard is actively forwarding and filtering network traffic aitheeweesoom0yocoh7jail 4kaono7phae3Nah of External vito crosses SS 2X internal vital adresses gt Passphrase da3ooNaihaiWeucSwu4bo4voh7ugiiQuoo0gifs of Dedicated Interface w 172 16 66 48 192 168 66 48 Use VLAN VLANID 255 255 255 0 No v 1 Shows the current state No default Firewall redundancy is disabled Yes Firewall redundancy is enabled This function can on
251. dure or if the condenser mGuard industrial rs or the battery mGuard delta did not supply the installed clock with sufficient voltage for a period with the device switched off Here you can set the mGuard time if no NTP server has been specified See below or the NTP server is not available The date and time are specified in the format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss YYYY Year MM Month DD Day hh Hour mm Minute ss Second If the Current system time above should display a current local time that is different to Greenwich Mean Time then you must enter the number of hours that your local time is in front of or behind Greenwich Mean Time Examples In Germany the time is one hour after GMT Therefore enter CET 1 In New York the time is five hours behind Greenwich Mean Time Therefore enter CET 5 The only important thing is the 1 2 or 1 value as only these are evaluated not the preceding letters They can be substi tuted with CET or any other designation such as UTO If you wish to display Central European Time e g for Germany and have it automatically switch to from daylight saving time enter CET 1CEST M3 5 0 M10 5 0 3 If this option is set to Yes the mGuard will save the current system time in its memory every two hours If the mGuard is switched off and then back on a time from this two hour time period is displayed not a time on January 1 2000 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 9 mGuar
252. e Package Versions oo pecka OOOO o umber version Favour authdaemon 0 022 default a beron 0 1 3 0 default E bridge utils 0 14 0 default brnetiink 0 0 1 0 default busybox 0 1 71 default chat 0 27 0 default conntrack 0 1 0 6 default a nan dneni Management gt gt Update gt gt Overview System Information Package Versions Version The current software version of the mGuard Base The software version that was originally used to flash this mGuard Updates List of updates that have been installed on the base Lists the individual software modules of the mGuard Can be used for support purposes 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 35 mGuard 7 4 6 2 4 2 Update Firmware updates with firewall redundancy activated Future updates from version 7 3 1 onwards can be made while an mGuard redundant pair is connected and in operation This does not apply to the following devices mQGuard industrial rs mGuard smart mQGuard pci mGuard blade mGuard delta These devices must be updated successively while the other redundant device is disconnected When firewall redundancy is activated both mGuards in a redundant pair can be updated at the same time The paired mGuards decide independently which mGuard is updated first while the other device remains active If the active mGuard cannot boot within 25 minutes of receiving the update command as the other mGuard has not yet taken over then the up
253. e mGuard as it uses a hardware based encryption technique This aspect may be of significance for the remote peer All algorithms designated as Null contains no encryption Hash Keep the setting All algorithms It then does not matter whether the remote peer works with MD5 SHA 1 SHA 256 SHA 384 or SHA 512 The encryption algorithms SHA 256 and SHA 512 are supported on all mGuards However not all mGuards accelerate the algorithms via hardware The mGuard centerport neither supports nor requires hardware acceleration On the other mGuards MD5 and SHA1 are accelerated with hardware Only the mGuard smart additionally accelerates SHA 256 via hardware IPsec SA Data Exchange In contrast to ISAKMP SA Key Exchange see above this setting determines the data exchange method This may or may not be different from the Key Exchange method Algorithms See above Perfect Forward This method is used to increase the security of the data Secrecy PFS transfer In IPsec the key used for the data exchange is changed at certain intervals With PFS a new random number is negotiated with the re mote peer instead of deriving it from a previously agreed random number The remote peer must have the same entry We recommend activation for security reasons a Set this to Yes if the remote peer supports PFS Set Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS to No if the remote peer is an IPsec L2TP client 6 204 IN
254. e via the secondary external gt interface please configure a route for them If the operation mode of the secondary external interface is set to temporary then the following is checked using periodic ping probes Can a particular destination or destinations be reached when data packets take the route based on all the routing settings defined for the mGuard apart from those defined for the secondary external interface Only if none of the ping probes is successful does the mGuard assume that it is currently not possible to reach the destination s over the primary external interface Ethernet interface over WAN port of the mGuard In this case the secondary external interface is activated which results in the data packets being routed over this interface The secondary external interface remains activated until the mGuard detects in subsequent ping probes that the destination s can be reached again When this condition is fulfilled the data packets are routed over the primary external interface again and the secondary external interface is deactivated Therefore the purpose of the ongoing ping probes is to check whether specific destinations can be reached over the primary external interface When they cannot be reached the secondary external interface is activated until they can be reached again Type Destination Specify the ping Type for the ping request packet that the mGuard will send to the device with the IP address that y
255. e IPsec protocol The following options allow you to reduce the size of the UDP packets generated by IPsec to traverse such routers IKE Fragmentation The IKE Main Mode with X 509 certificates usually generates large UDP packets With this option enabled IKE Main Mode packets will be fragmented within the IKE protocol itself and thereby avoid large UDP packets Yes v IPsec MTU default is 16260 The internal IPsec MTU is usually set to a large value like 16260 to avoid fragmentation of IP packets within IPsec When IPsec has to traverse NAT routers encrypted IP packets will be transfered via UDP By reducing the IPsec MTU the IP packets will be fragmented before they are encapsulated in UDP and thereby avoid large UDP packets A recommended value in such situations is 1414 or smaller 16260 Note This applies to VPN tunnels only 6 172 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration IPsec VPN gt gt Global gt gt Options Options Allow packet forwarding between The Yes setting is only needed for an mGuard VPN connections communicating between two different VPN remote peers must be configured so that the remote networks containing the VPN remote peers are included This is necessary for the correct communication between two VPN remote peers The opposite set up local and remote network interchanged must also be established for VPN remote peers see Remote on page 6 187 The local network of the communic
256. e LED lights up red mGuard blade mGuard pci Until both red LEDs light up mGuard EAGLE mGuard Until the status LED and the link LEDs are extinguished e mGuard delta Until the status LED stops blinking Alternatively e Briefly disconnect the power supply mGuard pci Restart the computer containing the mGuard pci card 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 8 1 mGuard 7 4 Objective Action 8 2 Performing a recovery procedure To reset the network configurations but not the remaining configuration to the factory defaults in case it is no longer possible to access the mGuard When carrying out the recovery procedure the factory defaults are established for all mGuard models according to the following table Table 8 1 Preset addresses Factory default Network Management IP 1 Management IP 2 Mode mGuard rs4000 rs2000 Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard industrial rs Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard smart Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard pci Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard blade Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 EAGLE mGuard Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard centerport Router https 192 168 1 1 mGuard blade controller Router https 192 168 1 1 mGuard delta Router https 192 168 1 1 The following applies for mGuard models reset in Stealth mode with the multiple
257. e Proxy for HTTP and HTTPS itis also used for VPN in TCP encapsulation No v HTTP S Proxy Server proxy example com Port 3128 Proxy Authentication Login Password A proxy server can be entered for the following activities performed by the mGuard itself CRL download Firmware update Regular configuration profile retrieval from central peer Restoring licenses Network gt gt Proxy Settings gt gt HTTP S Proxy Settings HTTP S Proxy Settings Proxy Authentication Use Proxy for HTTP When Yes is selected connections using HTTP or HTTPS and HTTPS are transferred over a proxy server whose address and port are defined in the corresponding two fields HTTP S Proxy Server Hostname or IP address of the proxy server Port Port number to be used e g 3128 Login User name for proxy server registration Password Password for proxy server registration 6 116 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 5 Authentication menu 6 5 1 Authentication gt gt Administrative Users 6 5 1 1 Passwords Authentication Administrative Users admin Administrator Password Account admin user authenticated via HTTP Passwords RADIUS Filters root Root Password Old Password Account root New Password COTTI Disable VPN until the user is Wo e Yes User Password word New Password again essees New Password New Password again New Password again Admi
258. e device could be damaged and may be left inoperable This will require the device to be reactivated by the manufacturer Keep the Rescue button pressed until the Recovery status is entered as follows The mGuard is restarted after approx 1 5 seconds After another 1 5 seconds the mGuard enters the Recovery status mode The device reaction depends on the model mGuard rs4000 rs2000 The STAT MOD and SIG LEDs light up green mGuard industrial rs The State LAN and WAN LEDs light up green mGuard smart The LEDs light up green mGuard blade mGuard pci The green LEDs and red LAN LED light up EAGLE mGuard The 1 2 and V 24 LEDs light up mGuard delta The status LED fades slowly Release the Rescue button not later than one second after the Recovery status is reached The mGuard restarts if the Rescue button is not released quickly enough The mGuard will now start the Recovery system It searches for a DHCP server over the LAN port in order to obtain an IP address The device reaction depends on the model mGuard rs4000 rs2000 The STAT LED flashes mGuard industrial rs The State LED flashes mGuard smart The middle LED heartbeat flashes mGuard blade mGuard pci The red LAN LED flashes EAGLE mGuard The 1 2 and V 24 LEDs light up orange
259. e following entry from the list No CA certificate but the Remote Certificate below e Install the remote certificate under Remote Certificate see Installing the remote certificate on page 6 197 It is not possible to refer to a remote certificate loaded in the Authentication gt gt Certificates menu When the VPN remote peer authenticates itself with a machine certificate signed by a CA It is possible to authenticate the machine certificate shown by the remote peer as follows Using a CA certificate Using the corresponding remote certificate Using a CA certificate Only the CA certificate from the CA that signed the certificate shown by the VPN remote peer should be referred to here selection from list The additional CA certificates that build the chain to the root CA certificate together with the certificate shown by the remote peer must be installed in the mGuard under Authentication gt gt Certificates The selection list shows all CA certificates that were loaded in the mGuard under the Authentication gt gt Certificates menu The other option is Signed by any trusted CA With this setting all VPN remote peers are accepted providing that they log on with a certificate signed by a recognized Certificate Authority CA The CA is recognized when the relevant CA certificate and all other CA certificates are stored in the mGuard These then build the chain to the root certificate together with
260. e it again see Setting up a local configuration connection on page 5 12 After a restart the mGuard pci is automatically assigned a management IP address It receives this address from a TFTP server or from a BootP server that can be reached in the network and that was used during the flashing On the mGuard centerport Proceed as follows to flash the firmware or carry out the rescue procedure ATTENTION Do not disconnect the power supply to the mGuard during the flashing procedure The device could be damaged and may be left inoperable This will require the device to be reactivated by the manufacturer 8 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware 1 Restarting booting the mGuard centerport 2 As soon as the boot menu of the mGuard centerport is shown on the monitor press one of the arrow keys on the keyboard tT lt or gt The boot menu then remains on display GNU GRUB version 0 97 639K lower 7 64448K upper memory Boot firmware A Boot firmware B Check the file system s of firmware A Check the file system s of firmware B Start rescue procedure via DHCP BOOTP TFTP Start rescue procedure from CD 7 DUD Start rescue procedure from USB mass storage Use the ft and keys to select which entry is highlighted Press enter to boot the selected OS e to edit the Poa commands before booting or c for a command line
261. e mGuard authenti cates the remote peer Tt T using All CA certificates that build Remote certificate the chain to the root CA certificate together with the certificates displayed by the remote peer or ADDITIONALLY Remote certificates if used as a filter The remote peer can additionally provide sub CA certificates In this case the mGuard can form the set union for building the chain from the CA certificates provided and the self configured CA certificates The corresponding root certificate must always be available on the mGuard According to this table the certificates must then be provided that the mGuard uses to authenticate a remote user access over HTTPS or their browser 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 27 mGuard 7 4 The following instructions assume that the certificates have already been correctly installed in the mGuard see Authentication gt gt Certificates on page 6 124 If the use of block lists CRL checking is activated under the Authentication gt gt Certificates Certificate settings menu then each certificate signed by a CA that a HTTPS client presents is checked for blocking Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access CA certificate The configuration is only necessary when a user with HTTPS access displays a certificate signed by a CA All CA certificates needed by the mGuard to build the chain to the respective root CA certificate together with
262. e networks are then routed to the correspond ing network over the secondary external interface in permanent or temporary mode 6 72 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Stealth network mode continued Gateway Enter the IP address of the gateway over which the transfer is made in the above named external network if this IP address is known When you are dialing in to the Internet using the phone num ber of the ISP the address of the gateway is usually only known after the dial in In this case you enter gateway in the field as a placeholder 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 73 mGuard 7 4 Operation Mode permanent temporary In both the permanent and temporary operation modes the modem must be available to the mGuard for the secondary external interface so that the mGuard can make a connec tion to the WAN Internet over the telephone network connected to the modem Which data packets are transferred over the primary external interface Ethernet interface and which are transferred over the secondary external interface is determined by the routing settings in effect for these two external interfaces Therefore an interface can only take a data packet if the routing setting for that interface matches the destination of the data packet The following rules apply to the use of routing entries If multiple routing entries for the destination of a data packet mat
263. e only become effective if Enable SSH remote access is set to Yes nternal access is also possible when this option is set to No A firewall rule that would refuse nternal access is therefore not effective in this case You have the following options From IP Enter the address of the system or network where remote access is permitted or forbidden in this field You have the following options IP address 0 0 0 0 0 means all addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 6 14 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access continued Interface External Internal External 2 VPN Dial in External 2 and Dial in are only for devices with serial ports see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 Specifies which interface the rules apply to If no rules are set or if no rule takes effect the following default settings apply SSH access is permitted over nternal VPN and Dial in Access over External and External 2 is refused Specify the access possibilities according to your requirements O ATTENTION If you want to refuse access over Internal VPN or Dial in you must imple ment this explicitly through corresponding fire wall rules by specifying Drop as an action for example To avoid locking yourself out you may have to simultaneously allow access over
264. e rewritten the opposite way Such packets come with a source address from the network defined under Remote This address is rewritten using the Network address for remote 1 to 1 NAT 6 192 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt General continued Further settings can be made by clicking More Remote NAT Remote NAT for IPsec Masquerading of the remote network tunnel connections Remote NAT Remote NAT for IPsec tunnel SS Masquerading of remote net w Internal IP address used for 445 4654 4 remote masquerading The source addresses of data packets that the mGuard receives via the VPN tunnel are masked with the IP address defined under Internal IP address for masking the remote network The original and the converted source address and the source port are recorded Responses for which a suitable record is found thus get their original destination address back If necessary the destination address is also rewritten see Local NAT Protocol Protocol All TCP UDP ICMP Select whether the VPN is restricted to a certain protocol or it is valid for all data traffic TCP or UDP Protocol Protocol TCP w Local Port all for all ports a number between 1 and65535 or all any to accept any proposal Remote Port all for all ports a number between 1 and65535 or all any to accept any proposal Local Port all default specifies t
265. e started using a configuration profile Download timeout seconds Login Password Server Certificate Default 120 Defines the maximum length of a timeout i e time of inactivity during the download of a configuration file The download is canceled if this time is exceeded If and when a new download attempt is made depends on the setting in Pull Schedule see above The login user name on the HTTPS server The password on the HTTPS server The certificate that the mGuard uses to check the authentica tion of the certificate suggested by the configuration server It is used to prevent unauthorized configurations from being installed on the mGuard The following may be entered here A self signed certificate of the configuration server The root certificate of the CA that created the server cer tificate This is valid when the configuration server certif icate is signed by a CA instead of a self signed one 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 55 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt Central Management gt gt Configuration Pull continued Download Test a If the configuration profiles also contain the a The IP address or the hostname specified under private VPN key for VPN connections or VPN connections with PSK the following conditions must be fulfilled The password should consist of at least 30 random upper and lower case letters and numbers to prevent unautho rized access
266. e the desired entries in the dialog that opens 6 134 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 5 4 4 Remote Certificates A remote certificate is a copy of the certificate that is used by a remote peer to authenticate itself to the mGuard Remote certificates are files received through a trustworthy channel from operators of possible remote peers file name extension cer pem or crt Load these files onto the mGuard so that bilateral authentication can take place The remote certificates of several possible remote peers can be installed The remote certificate for authentication of a VPN connection or VPN connection channels is installed in the Psec VPN gt gt Connections menu For more details see Authentication gt gt Certificates on page 6 124 Example of imported remote certificates Authentication Certificates a Certificate settings Machine Certificates CA Certificates Remote Certificates cRL Trusted remote Certificates gt x Subject CN Battaglia Mauro L KS OU Spezialwartung O Beispiel Lieferant C DE Subject Alternative Names Issuer CN SSH SubCA 01 0 Secure Access GmbH C DE Validity From Mar 20 19 37 46 2007 GMT to Mar 20 19 37 46 2010 GMT Fingerprint MDS S2 E5 2D BE 00 88 0B F8 39 1E BF 92 9F 2E B9 7C SHA1 68 52 FB FF E2 0D 8A 7A 69 D8 B3 D6 CB 7E 82 4E CD DE SA CE Ww Shortname Battaglia Mauro Upload Certificate Filename Durchsuchen _ import P Downes ent
267. ected to the mGuard via the local network For remote configuration The mGuard must be configured to permit remote configuration The mGuard must be connected i e the required connections must be working mGuard delta The mGuard delta must be connected to its power supply For local configuration The computer used for configuration must either be connected to the mGuard LAN switch Ethernet socket 4 to 7 or connected to the mGuard via the local network For remote configuration The mGuard must be configured to permit remote configuration The mGuard must be connected i e the required connections must be working mGuard rs4000 rs2000 The mGuard rs4000 rs2000 must be connected to at least one active power supply unit For local configuration The computer used for the configuration must be connected to the LAN socket of the mGuard For remote configuration The mGuard must be configured to permit remote configuration The mGuard must be connected i e the required connections must be working 5 2 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Preparing the Configuration 5 2 Easy Initial Setup EIS Local configuration at startup The initial setup of products delivered in Stealth Mode has been significantly simplified From version 7 2 onwards the Easy Initial Setup procedure allows setup either via preset or user defined management addresses even without connection to an external network The mG
268. ection is established through which the network packets can be forwarded Each mGuard checks their own internal and external network interfaces independently from each other Both interfaces are tested for a continuous connection This connection must be in place otherwise the connectivity check will fail ICMP echo requests can also be sent optional The ICMP echo requests can be set using the Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Connectivity Checks menu Availability check On each mGuard in a redundant pair checks are also constantly made as to whether an active mGuard is available and whether this should remain active A variation of the CARP Common Address Redundancy Protocol is used here The active mGuard constantly sends presence notifications through its internal and external network interface while both mGuards listen If a dedicated Ethernet link for the state synchronization of the firewall is available then the presence notifications are also sent through this link In this case the presence display for the external network interface can also be suppressed The availability check fails if an mGuard does not receive any presence notifications within a certain time The check will also fail if an mGuard receives presence notifications with a lower priority than its own The data is always transmitted through the physical network interface and never through the virtual network interface 7 2 INNOMINATE 7
269. ed Cancel the creation of the integrity database Only shown when a database is currently being created Erase reports and the integrity database The creation of the integrity database is stopped by pressing Cancel The old database is no longer used A new database must be created manually otherwise it is created automatically at the next scheduled check of the drive The contents of the network drive may be manipulated e g infected without being detected when no integrity database is in place All reports databases are deleted by pressing Erase A new integrity database must be created for any further integrity checks This can be triggered by pressing Initialize Otherwise a new integrity database is created automatically at the next scheduled check This procedure cannot be seen 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 167 mGuard 7 4 CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector a 6 7 4 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS AV Scan Connector The CIFS server for the antivirus scan is not supported in Stealth network mode without a management IP address In the CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector the mGuard allows an antivirus scan of drives that are otherwise not externally accessible e g production cells The mGuard mirrors a drive externally in order to carry out the antivirus scan Additional antivirus software is necessary in this procedure Set the necessary read access for your antivirus software 6
270. ed Yes Feature is enabled Data packets will only be transferred to the mGuard for further processing when they conform to the following filter rules Filters can be set for the LAN port Internal tab page and the WAN port External tab page Measurement Unit kbit s packets s Defines the unit for the numerical values entered below under Guaranteed and Upper Limit Filter Use VLAN If VLAN is configured then the VLAN ID can be entered to allow the affected data packets to pass through To do so the option must be set to Yes VLAN ID Defines that the VLAN data packets that have this ID may pass through The Use VLAN option must be set to Yes Ethernet Protocol Defines that only data packets from the given Ethernet protocol may pass Possible entries ARP IPV4 any Other entries must be given in hexadecimal form up to 4 figures The entry here is the ID of the affected protocol that can be found in the Ethernet header This can be found in the publi cation of the affected standard IP Protocol All TCP UDP ICMP ESP Defines that only data packets from the selected IP protocol may pass When All is selected no filtering is performed on the basis of the IP protocol From IP Defines that only data packets from the given IP address may pass 0 0 0 0 0 stands for all addresses This means that no filtering is performed on the basis of the IP address of the sender To enter an address use CIDR notation see
271. ed as part of the support snapshot Support gt gt Advanced menu Snapshot tab page A snapshot gives the Innominate Support additional options to search for and find the causes of problems more efficiently than would be possible without archiving and is used for support purposes Archive diagnostic Only visible when archiving is enabled If only those log messages only upon entries should be archived that are generated for failed failure Yes No connection attempts set this switch to Yes With No all log entries are archived 6 174 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration IPsec VPN gt gt Global gt gt Options continued VPN Switch Only for mGuard rs4000 rs2000 and m Guard industrial rs VPN connection The mGuard rs4000 rs2000 and the mGuard industrial rs have connections where an external pushbutton or on off switch and a signal LED can be connected One of the con figured VPN connections can be established or released using the pushbutton or the on off switch The VPN connec tion in question is defined here If VPN connections are defined and listed under the Psec VPN gt gt Connections menu see page 6 181 then these are displayed in the selection list If you want the connection to be established or released manually by pressing the button or using the switch then you select this here a If starting and stopping the VPN connection via the CMD contact is activated only the CMD contact is a
272. ed green Red green Boot process After connecting the device to the power supply flashing The LED switches to heartbeat mode after a few seconds Green Flashing Heartbeat The device is correctly connected and functioning Red Flashing System error Reboot the system e Press the Rescue button briefly 1 5 seconds Alternatively disconnect the device from its power supply briefly then reconnect it If the error continues to occur start the recovery procedure see Performing a recovery procedure on page 8 2 or contact the support department 1and3 Green On or flashing Ethernet status LED 1 shows the status of the LAN port LED 3 shows the status of the WAN port As soon as the device is connected the LEDs are illuminated continuously to indicate the presence of a network connection The LEDs are extinguished briefly when data packets are transferred 1 2 3 Various LED illumination codes Recovery mode After pressing the Rescue button See Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware on page 8 1 3 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Control Elements and Displays Table 3 5 Displays on mGuard pci 3 5 Fig 3 6 mGuard pci LAN green LAN red WAN green WAN red sm Control elements and displays on mGuard pci LEDs Color State Meaning WAN LAN Red Flashing Boot process After starting or restarting the computer WAN Red Flashing System error
273. edule Internet disconnection and reconnection as required by many ISPs so that they do not interrupt normal business operations When this function is activated it only comes into effect when synchronization with a time server has been made see Management gt gt System Settings on page 6 4 Time and Date on page 6 7 Re connect daily at Time when Automatic Re connect see above takes place Internal Networks See Internal Networks on page 6 78 Secondary External See Secondary External Interface on page 6 71 Interface 6 82 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration When Router network mode and PPTP router mode are selected Network Mode Router Router Mode PPTP General Ethernet Dial out Dial in Modem Console Network Status External IP address 172 16 66 49 Active Defaultroute 172 16 66 18 Used DNS servers 10 1 0 253 Network Mode Network Mode Router v Router Mode PPTP v PPTP PPTP Login user provider example n PPTP Password Local iP Mode Static from field below w LocaliP 10 0 0 140 ModemIP 10 0 0 138 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Router network mode PPTP router mode PPTP Internal Networks Secondary External Interface This menu item is not included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 For access to the Internet the Internet Service Provider ISP gives the user a login name and password These are required fo
274. ee glossary under Subject certificate on page 9 5 a The X 509 Subject field must not be left empty Release for all subjects individuals With an asterisk in the X 509 Subject field you can define that all subject entries are allowed in the certificate provided by the browser HTTPS client It is then no longer necessary to identify or define the subject in the certificate 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 29 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access continued Limitation to certain subjects individuals or to subjects that have certain attributes In the certificate the certificate owner is entered in the Subject field The entry is comprised of several attributes These attributes are either expressed as an Object Identifier e g 182 3 7 32 1 or more commonly as an ab breviation with a relevant value Example CN John Smith O Smith and Co C UK If certain subject attributes have very specific values for the acceptance of the browser by the mGuard then these must be specified accordingly The values of the other freely selectable attributes are entered using the wildcard Example CN O C UK with or without spaces between attributes In this example the attribute C UK must be entered in the certificate under Subject Only then does the mGuard accept the certificate owner Subject as a communication partner The other attributes in the certificates
275. eived header The TCP UDP header contains the following information The sender s port Source port The recipient s port destination port A checksum covering the TCP header and information from the IP header e g source and destination IP addresses The DES symmetrical encryption algorithm gt Subject certificate on page 9 5 was developed by IBM and checked by the NSA It was set in 1977 by the American National Bureau of Standards which was the predecessor of the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST as the standard for American governmental institutions As this was the very first standardized encryption algorithm it quickly won acceptance in industrial circles both inside and outside America DES uses a 56 bit key length which is no longer considered secure as the available processing power has greatly increased since 1977 3DES is a variant of DES It uses keys that are three times as long i e 168 bits long This is still considered to be secure and is also included in the IPsec standard Also known as Dynamic DNS provider Every computer connected to the Internet has an IP address IP Internet Protocol If the computer accesses the Internet via a dial up modem ISDN or ADSL its ISP will assign it a dynamic IP address In other words the address changes for each online session Even if the computer is online 24 hours a day without interruption e g flat rate the IP address will ch
276. ell c example com 10 1 32 2 24 Switch 10 1 32 0 24 a Hostname Domain name fill cell c example com 10 1 32 3 24 pack cell c example com Fig 6 1 Local Resolving of Hostnames 6 110 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt DNS gt gt DynDNS DynDNS 6 4 3 2 DynDNS DNS server DynDNS DynDNS Register this mGuard at a No v DynDNS Service Status Refresh Interval sec 420 DynDNS Provider DNS4BIZ X DynDNS Server dyndns example com DynDNS Login DynDNS Password DynDNS Hostname host example com At least one partner IP address must be known in order to establish a VPN connection so that they can connect to each other This condition is not fulfilled if both participants are assigned IP addresses dynamically by their respective Internet Service Providers In this case a DynDNS service such as DynDNS org or DNS4BIZ com can be of assistance The currently valid IP address is registered under a fixed name for a DynDNS service If you have registered with one of the DynDNS services supported by mGuard you can enter the corresponding information in this dialog Register this mGuard at a DynDNS Service Select Yes if you have registered with a DynDNS provider and the mGuard should utilize this service The mGuard reports its current IP address to the DynDNS service i e the one assigned for Internet access by the Internet Service Provider Refresh Interval sec Default 420
277. emote site s VPN gateway must be entered as any 6 184 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt General Options Interface to use for Internal External External 2 Dial in i 9 gateway setting any External 2 and Dial in are only for devices with serial ports see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 The selection of Internal is not allowed in Stealth mode This interface setting is only considered when any is en tered as the address of the VPN gateway on the remote peer In this case the interface of the mGuard through which the mGuard answers and permits requests for the establishment of this VPN connection is set here The VPN connection can be established through the LAN and WAN port on all Stealth modes when External is selected The interface setting allows encrypted communication to be made over a specific interface for VPN remote peers without a known IP address If an IP address or hostname is entered for the remote peer then this is used for the implicit assign ment to an interface The mGuard can be used as a single leg router in Router mode when Internal is selected as both encrypted and decrypted VPN traffic for this VPN connection are fed over the internal interface IKE and IPsec data traffic is only possible through the primary IP address of the individual assigned interface This also applies to VPN connections wit
278. emote certificate To do this proceed as follows e Click on the Current Certificate File button on the remote certificate next to the Download Certificate row title Make the desired entries in the dialog that opens 6 136 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 5 4 5 CRL Certificate settings Machine Certificates CA Certificates Remote Certificates CRL CRL DX CRL Issuer Last Update Next Update URL Download via VPN if applicable F Upload Authentication gt gt Certificates gt gt CRL CRL Certificate Revocation List CRL X _ Durchsuchen import The CRL is a list containing the serial numbers of blocked revoked certificates This page is used for the configuration of sites where the mGuard should download CRLs in order to use them Certificates are only checked when Yes is set under Enable CRL checking see Certificate settings on page 6 129 A CRL with the same issuer name must be present for each issuer name entered in the checked certificate If a CRL is absent and CRL checking is enabled then the certificate is declared invalid Issuer Last Update Next Update URL Download via VPN if applicable Upload Information read directly from the CRL by the mGuard Shows the issuer of the affected CRL Information read directly from the CRL by the mGuard Time and date of creation for CRL currently present on the mGuard Information read directly from the CR
279. ently switching to standby No other mGuard available Unknown state Check of all components was successful Check of at least one component has failed Unknown state Database is up to date Database is obsolete Database switching to on_standby Database switching to active 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 237 mGuard 7 4 6 11 2 2 Connectivity Status Redundancy Status Connectivity Status External Interface Summarized result Ethernet link status Number of check intervals Kind of check Check interval Timeout per interval and set of targets Results of the last 16 intervals youngest first Results of the primary targets Internal Interface Summarized result Ethernet link status Number of check intervals Kind of check Check interval Timeout per interval and set of targets Results of the last 16 intervals youngest first success connected N 65536 32456 at least one target must respond 300 milliseconds 420 milliseconds HHFHF444444444444 172 16 66 18 sRsRsRsRsRsRsRsRsRsRsRsRsRsRsRsR Legend ICMP echo request sent R ICMP echo response received 7 missing ICMP echo response no ICMP echo request sent success connected N 65536 32456 Ethernet link detection only 300 milliseconds 420 milliseconds HHFEEEA FETE Redundancy gt gt FW Redundancy Status gt gt Connectivity Status External interface Summarized result Ethernet link st
280. er PCI mode BE 2 2 e A i Fig 4 22 Jumpers for Driver mode or Power over PCI mode e Turn off the power to the computer and any other connected peripheral devices Observe the safety instructions regarding electrostatic discharge e Unplug the power cable 4 32 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup Requirements Open the computer cover please consult your computer manual Select a free PCI slot 3 3 V or 5 V for the mGuard pci Remove the relevant slot plate by loosening the holding screw and pulling it out Keep this screw safe for securing the mGuard pci card after installation Carefully align the connection plug board of the mGuard pci card with the selected PCI slot on the motherboard then push the card down evenly Tighten the card slot plate Close the computer cover Reconnect the power cable and turn on the computer 4 10 4 Driver installation Installation of the driver is only necessary when the mGuard pci is operating in Driver mode see Driver mode on page 4 28 Please first complete the steps described under Hardware installation on page 4 32 if not done so already You have the driver files on a data carrier If this is not the case Download the driver files from the corresponding download area under www innominate com Unpack the ZIP archive Copy the unpacked files onto a data carrier e g CD USB memory stick 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 33 mGuard 7 4 In Windo
281. er files for your new device To locate driver files and complete the installation click Next What do you want the wizard to do Search for a sutabi 0 Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that can choose a specific driver lt Back 3 Found New Hardware Wizard E Locate Driver Files Where do you want Windows to search for driver files gi 4 errr Driver Files Search Results Se omen The wizard has finished searching for driver files for your hardware device ey Search for driver files for the following hardware device Bai Innominate mGuardPCl The wizard searches for suitable drivers in its driver database on your computer and in any of the following optional search locations that you specify To start the search click Next If you are searching on a floppy disk or CD ROM drive insert the floppy disk or CD before clicking Next Optional search locations I Floppy disk g I Specify a location IT Microsoft Windows Update The wizard found a driver for the following device Bai Innominate mGuardPCl Windows found a driver for this device To install the driver Windows found click Next BD 4 windows netmgpei int lt Back Corci lt Back Fig 4 24 Driver installation in Windows 2000 1 1 Click on Next 2 Select Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended and click on Next 3 Select Specify a
282. er mode It can also be used as a normal network card An existing network card or another computer network can be connected in Power over PCI mode Fig 1 4 mGuard pci The mGuard bladepack includes the mGuard bladebase This can be easily installed into standard 3 U racks 19 inch and can accommodate up to 12 mGuard blades in addition to an mGuard blade controller This device version is thus ideally suited for use in an indus trial environment where it can protect several server systems individually and indepen dently of each other An additional serial port enables remote configuration using a telephone dial up connection or a terminal CRIL 1 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Introduction EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta The EAGLE mGuard is designed for assembly on mounting rails according to DIN EN 60715 and is therefore especially suitable for use in industrial environments Further application options are provided by the optional configuration connection and the option to establish a telephone dial up connection via the V 24 interface hi Le n r unece suus 1 FVA en Fig 1 6 EAGLE mGuard The mGuard delta is a compact LAN switch Ethernet Fast Ethernet designed for con necting up to 4 LAN segments This device is especially suited for logically segmented net work environments where locally connected computers networks share mGuard functions An additional serial port enables configuration
283. ere the mGuard is located In automatic and static Stealth modes the mGuard adopts the default gateway of the computer connected to its LAN port This does not apply when a management IP address is configured with the default gateway Alternative routes can be defined for data packets into the WAN created by the mGuard Among others the following data traffic packets belong here The download of certificate revocation lists CRL The download of a new configuration Communication with an NTP server for time synchronization Dispatch and receipt of encrypted data packets from VPN connections Queries to DNS servers Syslog messages The download of firmware updates The download of configuration profiles from a central server if configured SNMP traps If this option is used make the relevant entries afterwards If it is not used the affected data packages are transmitted over the default gateway defined by the client Static routes The following settings are applied to traffic generated by the mGuard Networks toe routed over eD I alternative gateways Network Enter the network using CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 6 70 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Stealth network mode continued Gateway The gateway where this network can be accessed The routes defined here are v
284. erfaces Other interfaces Drives High availability Power supply Power consumption Air humidity range Protection class Temperature range Dimensions H x W x D Weight Firmware amp performance values Firmware compatibility Data throughput router firewall Hardware based encryption Encrypted VPN throughput AES 256 Management support Diagnostics Other Conformity m Guard industrial rs Intel network processor with 533 MHz clock rate 1 LAN port 1 WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 Base TX RJ45 Full Duplex Auto MDIX Serial RS 232 RJ11 socket Optional analog modem optional ISDN TA Depends on the firmware used 24 V DC 170 mA SELV redundant 9 36 V voltage range Typically 4 1 W 10 to 95 during operation non condensing IP 20 0 C to 55 C operation 20 C to 70 C storage 100 x 45 x 112 mm 250 g mGuard v5 0 or higher Innominate recommends firmware version 6 x or 7 x with the current patch releases For scope of functions see relevant firmware data sheet 99 Mbit s bi directional 99 Mbit s bi directional DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 70 Mbit s bi directional Web GUI HTTPS Command Line Interface SSH SNMP v1 2 3 central Device Management Software optional key switch VPN LEDs P1 P2 Modem Fault State Error LAN WAN signal contact SELV service contacts L CMD ACK log file remote Syslog CE FCC UL 508 7961_en
285. ernai2 pianin Default Default Queue Defaut Rules baa Protocot Fromip_ rromrot Ter toot Current rosiscp New TOS DSCP eH 1 Ar 0 0 0 00 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Minimize Delay w Unchanged Urgent pl a v 000 070 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Maximize Reliability Unchanged Important v es 3 ar v 00000 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Minimize Cost w Unchanged Low Priority Dial in Setting of Egress Queue rules QoS Egress Rules f Internal Li External External 2 ii Dial in Default Default Queue Default v Rules C 1 All w 00 0 00 any Jooo any TOS Minimize Delay w Unchanged v Urgent X 7 FJ 2 ar 0 0 0 0 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Maximize Reliability w Unchanged v important v pE 3 ar v 00000 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Minimize Cost w Unchanged w Low Priority 6 222 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 QoS Egress Rules Configuration 6 10 4 2 Egress Rules VPN VPN via Internal VPN via External VPN via External 2 VPN via Dial in VPN via Internal Setting of Egress Queue rules QoS Egress Rules VPN VPN via Internal If VPN via External T VPN via External 2 L VPN via Dial in Default Default Queue Default v Rules a TIE New TOSDSCP m1 ary 00 0 00 ay diC LOO any TOS Minimize Delay w Unchanged Urgent X on 2 All v 0 0 0 0 0 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Maxim
286. errno 104 Connection reset by INFO transitioned to state active INFO enabled virtual interface eth0 vif INFO enabled virtual interface ethl vif INFO enabled ARP daemon 0 INFO terminating INFO ham vsr 3459 terminated INFO terminating INFO ham fsr 3453 terminated ham ssv WARN call read func receive_report line 444 errno 104 Connection reset by ham ssv INFO transitioned to state active waiting SNMP LLDP X Network Security i CIFS AV Scan Connector 7 D m The corresponding checkboxes for filtering entries according to category are displayed below the log entries depending on which mGuard functions were active To display one or more categories enable the checkboxes for the desired categories and click the Reload logs button 6 242 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 12 2 1 Log entry categories General Log entries which are not assigned to other categories Network Security Accesses through its firewall are not logged in the mGuard rs2000 Logged events are shown here when the logging of firewall events was selected during the definition of firewall rules Log Yes Log ID and number for tracing errors Log entries that refer to the firewall rules listed below have a log ID and number Using this log ID and number it is possible to trace the firewall rule that the corresponding log entry refers to and that led to the corresponding event Firewall rules and their l
287. es No HTTPS new DHCP enterprise oid mGuard client generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardHTTPSLoginTrap 1 additional mGuardHTTPSLastAccessIP Sent when someone has tried to open a HTTPS session successfully or unsuccessfully e g using an incorrect pass word The trap contains the IP address from which the at tempt originated enterprise oid mGuard generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardShellLoginTrap 2 additional mGuardShellLastAccessIP Sent when someone opens the shell using SSH or the serial port The trap contains the IP address of the login request If this request is made over the serial port then the value is 0 0 0 0 enterprise oid mGuard generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap pac additional mGuardDHCPLastAccessMAC Sent when a DHCP request from an unknown client is received 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 47 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt SNMP gt gt Trap continued Chassis power signal relay Hardware related traps mGuard industrial rs and EAGLE mGuard only Agent external config storage temperature enterprise oid mGuard generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapSSHLogin mGuardTResSSHUsername mGuardTResSSHRemotelP additional Sent when someone accesses the mGuard via SSH enterprise oid mGuard generic trap enterpriseSpecific
288. es Options A descriptive name for the template Enabled Yes v BluePrint Comment Timeout 28800 Timeout type static v A descriptive name for You can name or rename the user firewall template the template as desired Enabled Yes No When Yes is selected the user firewall template becomes active as soon as firewall users log into the mGuard who are listed on the Template users tab page see below and who have been assigned this template It does not matter from which computer and under which IP address the user logs in The assignment of user firewall rules is based on the authen tication data that the user enters during login user name password 6 154 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network Security gt gt User Firewall gt gt User Firewall Templates continued Comment Optional Explanatory text Timeout Default 28800 Indicates the time in seconds at which point the firewall rules are deactivated If the user session lasts longer than the timeout time defined here then the user has to login again Timeout type static dynamic With a static timeout users are logged out automatically as soon as the specified timeout expires With a dynamic time out users are logged out automatically after all connections are closed by the user or have expired on the mGuard and the timeout has elapsed An mGuard connection expires when no data is sent for the connection over the following periods
289. ess Session Timeout 0 seconds Enable SSH remote access Yes w remote administration only 7 The value 0 indicates that these Maximum number of concurrent messages will not be sent Maximum number of missing signs 3 of life Concurrent Session Limits sessions for role admin Maximum number of concurrent Maximum number of concurrent Enable X 509 certificates for SSH x x N sessions for role netadmin sessions for role audit Allowed Networks ag 1D torantraccum VF aera 24014002T CONES Se p ee a a Extemal w Accept w No v 1 10 1 0 0 16 2 192 168 67 0 24 Extemal ow Accept v No v RADIUS Authentication Use RADIUS authentication for Shell access Please note Even if RADIUS is the only method for password authentication root is still able to authenticate with the local password at the serial console X 509 Authentication Yes v SSH server certificate mguard hh kunde de v SSH RootCA 01 w SSH SubCA 01 w X 509 subject CN OU Admin O admin bd eee Kraft Herbert v root Y Findig Petra root v Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access When SSH remote access is enabled the mGuard can be configured from a remote system using the command line interface Shell Access This option is disabled by default O ATTENTION If remote access is enabled ensure secure root and admi
290. ess X 509 Authentication Enable X 509 If No is selected then only normal authentication proce This menu itemi is not certificates for SSH dures user name and password or private and public included in the scope of access keys are allowed not the X 509 authentication procedure functions for the If Yes is selected then the X 509 authentication mGuard rs2000 procedure can be used in addition to normal procedures as seen under No When Yes is selected the following points must be defined How the mGuard authenticates itself to the SSH client according to X 509 see SSH server certificate 1 How the mGuard authenticates the remote SSH client according to X 509 see SSH server certificate 2 SSH server Specifies how the mGuard identifies itself to the certificate 1 SSH client Select one of the machine certificates from the list or the None entry None When None is selected the SSH server of the mGuard does not authenticate itself to the SSH client via the X 509 certificate Instead it uses a server key and thus behaves like older versions of the mGuard If one of the machine certificates is selected this is also offered to the SSH client The client can then decide whether to use the normal authentication procedure or the procedure according to X 509 The selection list gives a selection of machine certificates that are loaded in the mGuard under the Authentication gt gt Certificates menu See page 6
291. evices at the local end of the tunnel are exchanged so that every individual address is rewritten as a specific other address and not exchanged with an identical IP address for all devices as in IP masquerading When local devices send data packets only those packets are considered which the mGuard actually encrypts the mGuard only forwards packets via the VPN tunnel if they come from a trustworthy source which are from a source address within the network that is defined under Internal network address for local 1 to 1 NAT in combination with the netmask under Local whose destination address is in the Remote network see Remote on page 6 187 if no 1 to 1 NAT is set for the remote NAT whose destination address is in the Network address for remote 1 to 1 NAT area if 1 to1 NAT is set for the remote NAT The data packets from local devices are assigned a source address according to the address set under Local see Local on page 6 187 and are sent via the VPN tunnel Data packets received via the VPN tunnel are assigned in the opposite way Destination addresses belonging to the Local network are rewritten to the corresponding address under Internal network address for local 1 to 1 NAT 6 190 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt General continued Further settings can be made by clicking More Local NAT for IPsec tunnel connectio
292. fault gateway IP of default gateway 192 168 1 253 2 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Typical Application Scenarios 7961_en_04 2 6 Solving network conflicts 10 0 0 0 16 gt gt 10 0 0 0 16 gt 10 0 0 0 16 i 0 i TD ia TO Solving network conflicts In the example above the networks on the right hand side should be accessible from the network or the computer on the left hand side However due to historical or technical reasons the networks overlap on the right hand side The conflict can be solved by rewriting these networks using the mGuard 1 to 1 NAT feature 1 to 1 NAT can be used in normal routing and in IPsec tunnels INNOMINATE 2 5 mGuard 7 4 2 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Control Elements and Displays 3 Control Elements and Displays Connections below 9 pin serial interface console Configuration 3 1 mGuard rs4000 rs2000 COMBICON connectors for connections see Page 4 5 LEDs see Table 3 1 SD card Fig 3 1 Control elements and displays on mGuard rs4000 Table 3 1 Displays for mGuard rs4000 and rs2000 LED State Meaning P1 Green Power supply 1 is active P2 Green Power supply 2 is active mGuard rs2000 unconnected STAT Green flashing Heartbeat The device is correctly connected and functioning ERR Red flashing
293. fies the person or object that the certificate belongs to Example CN server1 E E mail address Shows the e mail address of the certificate owner OU Organizational Unit Shows the department within an organization or company Example O Development O Organization Shows the organization or company Example O Innominate L Locality Shows the place locality Example L Hamburg ST State Shows the federal state county Example ST Bavaria C Country Two letter code that identifies the country Germany DE Example C DE A filter can be set for the subject i e certificate owner during VPN connections and remote service access to the mGuard by SSH or HTTPS After this only certificates from remote peers are accepted that have certain attributes in the subject line Normally a company network with access to the Internet is only officially assigned a single IP address e g 123 456 789 21 Based on the first byte of this sample address one can see that this company network is a Class B network This means that the last 2 bytes are free to be used for host addresses This produces an address space for up to 65 536 possible hosts 256 x 256 Such a huge network is not practical There is a need to build subnetworks here The sub net mask can be used for this Like an IP address this mask is 4 bytes long The bytes that represent the network address are each assigned the value 255 This can mainly be used to borrow
294. fig folder on the CD Rescue Config licence lic License file imported to the device during the rescue procedure Rescue Config lt serial gt lic As above but the lt serial gt placeholder is replaced by the device serial number The same CD can then be used simultaneously for various devices Rescue Config preconfig atv Configuration profile used in the firmware during the rescue procedure The file must be used by the Rescue Config preconfig sh script see below Rescue Config lt serial gt atv Same as lt serial gt lic Rescue Config preconfig sh Script file executed immediately after installation of the new firmware More details can be found in Innominate mGuard Application Note Rollout Support which is available from the Innominate website www innominate com 8 8 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware 8 3 1 Installing the DHCP and TFTP server ATTENTION The installation of an additional DHCP server in a network can affect the configuration of the entire network In Windows Install the program which can be found in the download area under www innominate com e Disconnect the Windows computer from all networks e Copy the firmware into any empty folder on the Windows computer Start the TFTPD32 EXE program The set host IP is 192 168 10 1 This must also be the network card address e Click on Browse to
295. gement application to values between 3 and 5 seconds 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 43 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt SNMP gt gt Query Settings Enable SNMPv3 access Yes No Enable SNMPv1 v2 access Yes No Port for SNMP connections SNMPv1 v2 Community Read Write Community If you wish to allow monitoring of the mGuard via SNMPv3 set this option to Yes a You must define the firewall rules for the available interfaces on this page under Allowed Networks in order to specify access and monitoring options for the mGuard Access via SNMPv3 requires authentication with a login and password The factory defaults for the login parameters are Login admin Password SnmpAdmin please pay attention to capitalization MD5 is supported for the authentication process DES is supported for encryption The login parameters for SNMPv3 can only be changed using SNMPv3 If you wish to allow monitoring of the mGuard via SNMPv1 v2 set this option to Yes You must also enter your login data under SNMPv1 v2 Community You must define the firewall rules for the available interfaces on this page under Allowed Networks in order to specify access and monitoring options for the mGuard Default 161 If this port number is changed the new port number only ap plies for access over the External External 2 VPN and Dial in interface Port number 161 still applies for internal acce
296. ger than the time for presence notifications CARP but shorter than the upper limit of the fail over switching time Loss of presence notifications CARP during transmission A single loss of presence notifications CARP is tolerated by the mGuard but not for the next presence notifications CARP This applies to the availability check on each individual network interface even when these are checked simultaneously It is therefore very unlikely that the availability check will fail as a result of a very brief network interruption Loss of ICMP echo requests replies during transmission ICMP echo requests or replies are important for the connectivity check Losses are always observed but are tolerated under certain circumstances The following measures can be used to increase the tolerance level on ICMP echo requests Select at least one target must respond under Kind of check in the Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Connectivity Checks menu Also define a secondary set of targets here The tolerance for losing ICMP echo requests can be further increased when the targets of unreliable connections are entered under both sets primary and secondary or listed several times within a set Restoring the primary mGuard following a failure If a redundant pair with different priorities is defined then the secondary mGuard becomes active if the connection fails The primary mGuard is enabled again after the failure has
297. gged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default 6 144 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 6 1 4 MAC Filtering Network Security Packet Filter Incoming Rules Outgoing Rules Rule Records MAC Filtering Advanced Incoming D X ET CCIE ORO OO XXXXXXXXXXXX any Accept v Ethernet Protocol may be any IPv4 ARP Length or a hexadecimal value Please note These rules only apply to the Stealth mode Please note Management access to 1 1 1 1 requires ARP resolution of the default gateway Restricting ARP traffic to the default gateway may lead to management access problems Outgoing x Source MAC Destination MAC Ethernet Protocol F XXXXXXXXXXXX ORO KKK any Accept Drop The Incoming MAC filter is applied to frames received by the mGuard at the WAN interface The Outgoing MAC filter is applied to frames received by the mGuard at the LAN interface Data packets that come in or go out over a modem connection for mGuard models with a serial port are not picked up by the MAC filter because no Ethernet protocol is used here Along with the packet filter OSI layer 3 4 that can filter data according to ICMP messages and TCP UDP connections the mGuard can additionally be set with a MAC filter OSI layer 2 when operating in Stealth mode A MAC filter layer 2 filters according to MAC addresses and Ethernet protocols In contrast to the packet fi
298. gned machine certificate For further information on the following table see chapter Authentication gt gt Certificates on page 6 124 Authentication for VPN The remote peer s hows the following Machine certificate signed by CA Machine certificate self signed The mGuard authenticates the remote peer using 2 2 Remote certificate All CA certificates that build the chain to the root CA Certificate together with the certificates displayed by the remote peer Remote certificate According to this table certificates must be provided that the mGuard has to use for authentication of the respective VPN remote peer Requirement The following instructions assume that the certificates have already been correctly installed in the mGuard see Authentication gt gt Certificates on page 6 124 apart from the remote certificate If the use of block lists CRL checking is activated under the Authentication gt gt Certifi cates Certificate settings menu then each certificate signed by a CA that an VPN remote peer presents is checked for blocks Locally configured remote certificates imported here are excepted 6 196 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Self signed machine certificate a Machine certificate signed by the CA Remote CA Certificate When the VPN remote peer authenticates itself with a self signed machine certificate Select th
299. gt gt Settings gt gt Edit continued Basename of the The checksum files are stored on the network drive specified checksum files above They can also be stored in a separate directory The May be prefixed with directory name must not start with a backslash a directory Example Checksumdirectory integrity checksum Checksumdirectory is the directory and contains files beginning with integrity checksum 6 7 2 2 Filename Patterns CIFS Integrity Monitoring CIFS Integrity Checking Settings i Filename Patterns Sets of Filename Patterns SS a ED eH executables CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Filename Patterns Sets of Filename Patterns Name Freely selectable name for the set of rules for the files to be checked This name must be selected under CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Settings gt gt Edit so that the template is active Click on Edit to specify a set of rules for the file to be checked and save this under the defined name CIFS Integrity Monitoring CIFS Integrity Checking executables Set of Filename Patterns Rules for files to check gt x System Volume Information Exclude v 3 a System Volume Information Exclude v i pagefile sys Exclude v p iFi pagefile sys Exclude v s P exe include v eo com Include v s dil include w eo bat Include w O cmd Include w
300. gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access continued RADIUS Authentication Enable RADIUS This menu item is not authentication included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 1 When No is selected the password of users who logon via HTTPS are checked according to the local database User authentication method can only be set to Login re stricted to X 509 client certificate when No is selected Select Yes to have users authenticated using the RADIUS server The password is only checked locally for the pre defined users root admin netadmin audit and user The selection of As only method for password authentication is only suitable for experienced users as access to the mGuard may be com pletely blocked When setting up RADIUS authentication for the first time select Yes If you intend to use RADIUS authentication As only method for password authentication then we recommend creating a Customized Default Profile which resets the authentica tion method If RADIUS authentication is selected as the only method for checking the password then access to the mGuard is no longer possible in some circumstances for example when an incorrect RADIUS server is set up or the mGuard is moved The predefined users root admin netadmin audit and user are then no longer accepted External 2 and Dial in are only for devices with serial ports See Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61
301. h FS B Innominate mGuardPCI Windows xP Tell me why this testing is important ai Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway STOP Installation aan Click Finish to close the wizard Fig 4 23 Driver installation in Windows XP 1 After inserting the data carrier choose Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click on Next 2 Click on Next Click on Continue Anyway 4 Click on Finish w 4 34 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup In Windows 2000 e After installing the hardware switch on the computer e Logon as the administrator and wait until the following window appears 1 Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install a device driver for a hardware device To continue click Next 2 Found New Hardware Wizard Install Hardware Device Drivers ee A device driver is a software program that enables a hardware device to work with Sy an operating system This wizard will complete the installation for this device Hg Innominate mGuardPCI 4 device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Windows needs driv
302. h a specific remote peer Connection startup Initiate Initiate Initiate on The mGuard initiates the connection to the remote peer traffic Wait p In the Address of the remote site s VPN gateway see above the fixed IP address of the remote peer or its name must be entered Initiate on traffic The connection is initiated automatically when the mGuard sees that the connection should be used can be selected in all operating modes of the mGuard Stealth Router etc Wait The mGuard is ready to accept connections which a remote peer actively initiates and sets up to the mGuard When any is entered under Address of the remote site s VPN gateway then Wait must be selected 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 185 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt General continued Encapsulate the VPN traffic in TCP TCP Port of the server which accepts the encapsulated connection Only visible when Encapsulate the VPN traffic in TCP is set to Yes Transport and Stealth mode Tunnel Settings Transport and Tunnel Settings Yes No default No If the TCP Encapsulation function is used see TCP Encapsulation on page 6 177 only set this switch to Yes if the mGuard is to encapsulate its own outgoing data traffic for the VPN connection it initiated itself In this case the number of the port where the remote peer receives the encapsulated data packets
303. hat all ports can be used If a specific port should be used then enter the port number any specifies that port selection is made by the client Remote Port all default specifies that all ports can be used If a specific port should be used then enter the port number Local masquerading B Can only be used for the Tunnel VPN type Example A control center has one VPN tunnel each for a large number of branches One local net work with numerous computers is installed in each of the branches and these computers are connected to the control center via the respective VPN tunnel In this case the address space could be too small to include all the computers at the various VPN tunnel ends 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 193 mGuard 7 4 However Local masquerading is helpful here The computers connected in the network of a branch appear under a single IP address through the local masquerading for the control centers VPN gateway In addition this enables the local networks in the different branches to all use the same network address locally Only the branch can make VPN connections to the control center Internal network address for local masquerading Specifies the network i e the IP address range for which the local masquerading is used The source address in the data packets sent by this computer via the VPN connection is only replaced by the address entered in the Local field see above when a computer has an IP
304. he check has been suspended until further notice The status can be accessed Name of the network drive to be checked entered under CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares gt gt Edit Only certain file types are checked e g only executable files such as exe and dll You can specify the rules for this under C FS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Filename Patterns Do not check files that are changed in normal operation as this could trigger false alarms Do not check files that can be simultaneously opened exclusively by other programs as this can lead to access conflicts 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 161 mGuard 7 4 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Settings gt gt Edit continued Checksum Memory Time Schedule Maximum time a check may take Checksum Algorithm To be stored on CIFS share Everyday Mondays Tuesdays at xx h xx m You can start a check every day or on a specific weekday at a specific time hours minutes The mGuard system time must be set for the time schedule to work properly No integrity checks can be made if the system time is not synchronized This can be made manually or via NTP see Time and Date on page 6 7 A check is only started when the mGuard is in operation at the set time If the mGuard is not in operation a check is not followed up when the m
305. he connection is allowed through and none other A side effect is that existing connections are not cancelled during reconfiguration even if a corresponding new connection can no longer be setup Factory defaults for the firewall All incoming connections are rejected except VPN Data packets of all outgoing connections are passed through Firewall rules here have an effect on the firewall that is constantly active with the exception of VPN connections Individual firewall rules are defined for VPN connections see IPsec VPN gt gt Connections on page 6 181 Firewall on page 6 201 User firewall If a user logs in with defined firewall rules then these take priority see Network Security gt gt User Firewall on page 6 154 After this the constantly active firewall rules then come into effect If multiple firewall rules are set they will be searched in the order in which they are listed top down until a suitable rule is found This rule is then applied If there are other suitable rules further down the list these are ignored 6 138 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 6 1 1 Incoming Rules Network Security Packet Filter Incoming Rules Outgoing Rules Rule Records MAC Filtering Advanced Incoming General firewall setting Use the firewall ruleset below Y Log ID w inooming A 240ts310 3549 1490 0355 000c0205000 PES iterace Protocor rrome
306. he correct path to the target for incoming data and must define the appropriate inter face for forwarding it It takes data from a local routing table that shows which networks are available over which router connections or intermediary stations Service providers are companies or institutions that enable users to access the Internet or online services In Internet terminology spoofing means supplying a false address Using this false Internet address a user can create the illusion of being an authorized user Anti spoofing is the term for mechanisms that detect or prevent spoofing In a certificate the classification of a certificate to its owner is confirmed by a CA Certifi cate Authority This occurs through the confirmation of certain owner characteristics Furthermore the certificate owner must possess the private key that matches the public key in the certificate gt X 509 Certificate on page 9 8 Example Certificate Data Version 3 0x2 Serial Number 1 0x1 Signature Algorithm md5WithRSAEncryption Issuer C XY ST Austria L Graz O TrustMe Ltd OU Certificate Authority CN CA Email ca trustme dom Validity Not Before Oct 29 17 39 10 2000 GMT gt Subject CN anywhere com E doctrans de C DE ST Hamburg L Hamburg O Innominate OU Security Subject Public Key Info Public Key Algorithm rsaEncryption RSA Public Key 1024 bit Modulus 1024 bit 00 4 40 4c 6e 1 4 1b 61 36 84 24 b2 61 c0 b5 d7 e4 7a a5 4b 94
307. he destination address This now leads directly to the desired computer All Internet addresses are based on this procedure First a connection to a DNS is established in order to determine the IP address assigned for the host name Once this has been accomplished the established IP address is used to set up a connection to the desired remote peer which could be any site on the Internet If a computer is connected to a network the operating system creates a routing table internally It lists the IP addresses that the operating system has identified based on the connected computers and the routes available at that moment The routing table thus contains the possible routes destinations for sending IP packets If IP packets are to be sent the computer s operating system compares the IP addresses stated in the IP packets with the entries in the routing table in order to determine the correct route If a router is connected to the computer and its internal IP address i e the IP address of the router s LAN port has been relayed to the operating system as the standard gateway in the network card s TCP IP configuration then this IP address is used as the destination if all other IP addresses in the routing table are not suitable In this case the IP address of the router specifies the default route as all IP packets whose IP address have no counterpart in the routing table i e cannot find a route are directed to this gateway
308. he domain name in an abbreviated form the mGuard completes the entry by appending the domain suffix that is defined here under the Domain search path SNMP Information System name A freely selectable name for the mGuard used for administra tion purposes e g Hermes Pluto under SNMP sysName Location Freely selectable description of the installation location e g hall IV corridor 3 switch cabinet under SNMP sysLocation Contact The name of the contact person responsible for this mGuard including telephone number under SNMP sysContact Keyboard mGuard centerport only Keyboard Keyboard Layout qwertz de latini nodeadkeys v Repetition Rate 30 Repetition Delay 250 w Keyboard Layout Selection list for choosing the appropriate keyboard layout Repetition Rate Specifies how many characters the keyboard generates per second when the same key is held down default 30 Repetition Delay Specifies how long a key on the keyboard must be held down until the repeat function is activated generation of the num ber of characters per second as specified above under Repetition Rate default 250 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 5 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Host continued HiDiscovery Local HiDiscovery Support HiDiscovery Frame Forwarding Yes No 6 2 1 2 HiDiscovery is a protocol which supports the initial startup of new network devices and
309. he following address in the web browser on the remote peer https 123 45 67 89 If another port number is used it is entered behind the IP address e g https 123 45 67 89 442 e To configure the device make the desired or necessary entries on the individual pages of the mGuard interface see Configuration on page 6 1 5 14 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 Configuration ein 6 1 Operation You can click on the desired configuration on the left hand menu e g Management Licensing The page is then displayed in the main window usually as one or more tab pages on which you can make the settings If the page is organized into several tab pages you can scroll through them using the tabs at the top Working with tab pages You can make the desired entries in the corresponding tab page see also Working with sortable tables on page 6 1 To save the settings on the device you must click on the Apply button After the settings have been saved by the system you will see a confirmation message This indicates that the new settings have taken effect They also remain valid after a restart Reset You can return to a previously accessed page by pressing the Back button at the bottom right if available Entry of inadmissible values If you enter an inadmissible value for example an inadmissible number in an IP address and click on Apply the relevant tab page title i
310. he half duplex mode is not suitable here The time required for the transmission of the ICMP echo request to a target Consider the latency period during periods of high capacity utilization This applies especially when routers forward on the request The time required on each target for processing the request and transmitting the reply to the Ethernet layer Please note that the full duplex mode is also used here The time for transmission of the ICMP echo reply to the mGuard Table 7 1 Frequency of the ICMP echo requests Fail over ICMP echo Timeout on the Bandwidth per switching time requests per target mGuard after target transmission 1s 10 per second 100 ms 6 560 bit s 3s 3 3 per second 300 ms 2 187 bit s 10s 1 per second 1s 656 bit s If secondary targets are configured then additional ICMP echo requests may occasionally be sent to these targets This must be taken into account when calculating the ICMP echo request rate The timeout for a single ICMP echo request is displayed in Table 7 1 This does not indicate how many of the responses can be missed before the connectivity check fails The check tolerates a negative result on one of two back to back intervals Availability check Presence notifications CARP measure up to 76 bytes on layer 3 of the Internet protocol When VLAN is not used 18 bytes for the MAC header and hash are added to this with the Ethernet on layer 2 The ICMP echo re
311. her than the factory default of the device then you must obtain the relevant license for using this update This applies to major release upgrades for example from version 4 x y to version 5 x y to version 6 x y etc DHCP and TFTP servers can be accessed under the same IP address mGuard rs4000 rs2000 The mGuard firmware has been copied from Innominate Support or from the website www innominate com and saved on a compatible SD card This SD card is inserted into the mGuard The download page of www innominate de provides the corresponding firmware files for downloading On the SD card the files must be located under these path names or in these folders Firmware install ubi mpc83xx p7s Firmware ubifs img mpc83xx p7s mGuard pci When the mGuard is operated in Power over PCI mode the DHCP TFTP server must be connected to the mGuards LAN socket mGuard pci When the mGuard is operated in PCI Driver mode the DHCP TFTP server must be operated on the computer or operating system provided by the interface to the mGuard Action For the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 mGuard smart mGuard pci mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta mGuard industrial rs 8 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware Proceed as follows to flash the firmware or carry out the rescue procedure ATTENTION Do not disconnect the power supply to the mGuard during the flashing procedure Th
312. hernet port Link State Up Connection is made Down Connection is not made Automatic Yes Tries to determine the required operating Configuration mode automatically No Uses the operating mode specified in the Manual Configuration column f Please note the following when connecting the EAGLE mGuard to a hub When Automatic Configuration is deactivated the Auto MDIX function is also deactivated This means that the EAGLE mGuard port must either be connected to the uplink port of the hub or be connected using a cross link cable 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 85 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Ethernet Manual Configuration The desired operating mode when Automatic Configuration is set to No Current Mode Current network connection mode Port On Yes No Enables disables the Ethernet port The Port On function is not supported on mGuard centerport The Port On function is supported with restrictions on mGuard delta The internal switch ports cannot be switched off mQGuard pci In Driver mode the internal network interface cannot be switched off although this should be possible in Power over PCl mode 6 86 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 4 1 3 Dial out Only for mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta Network Interfaces Generat ethernet oiatout iain
313. hile each of the routers on the other side have different connections Path redundancy may not use NAT mechanisms such as masquerading to hide the virtual IP addresses of the mGuards Otherwise a migration from one path to another would change the IP addresses used to mask the redundant pair This would mean that all VPN connections all ISAKMP SAs and all IPsec SAs would have to be established again The connections are established again by Dead Peer Detection DPD with the configured time This effect is outside the influence of the mGuard In the event of path redundancy caused by a network lobotomy the VPN connections are no longer supported A network lobotomy must be prevented whenever possible 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 23 mGuard 7 4 a X 509 certificates for VPN authentication The mGuard supports the use of X 509 certificates when establishing VPN connections This is described in detail under Authentication on page 6 195 However there are some special points to note when X 509 certificates are used for authenticating VPN connections when combined with firewall redundancy and VPN redundancy Switching machine certificates A redundant pair can be configured so that it uses a X 509 certificate and the corresponding private key together to identify itself to a remote VPN partner as an individual virtual IP instance These X 509 certificates must be updated regularly If the VPN partner is set so that
314. il a suitable rule is found This rule is then applied If there are other suitable rules further down the list these are ignored You have the following options Protocol From To IP From To Port All means TCP UDP ICMP GRE and other IP protocols 0 0 0 0 0 means all IP addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 Only evaluated for TCP and UDP protocols any describes any selected port startport endport e g 110 120 defines a range of ports You can specify individual ports by giving either their port number or the corresponding service name e g 110 for pops or pops for 110 6 94 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial in continued Action Comment Log Log entries for unknown connection attempts Outgoing Rules PPP Accept means that data packets may pass through Reject means that the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been rejected Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Freely selectable comment for this rule For each individual firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default Yes No When set to Yes all attemp
315. in Modem router mode Modem Built in Modem B The Modem network mode is available for mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta B The Built in Modem network mode is additionally available for mGuard industrial rs if this has a built in modem or ISDN terminal adapter optional In all of the devices mentioned above data traffic is transferred over the serial port and not over the mGuard WAN port when the Modem or Built in Modem network mode is activated From there it is either A Transferred over the external serial port where an external modem must be connected B Transferred over the built in modem or ISDN terminal adapter for mGuard industrial rs when equipped In both cases the connection to the ISP and Internet is established over the telephone network using a modem or ISDN terminal adapter In the Modem network mode the serial port of the mGuard is not available for the PPP dial in option or for configuration purposes see Modem Console on page 6 96 After selecting the Modem network mode you enter the required parameters for the modem connection on the Dial out and or Dial in tab pages see Dial out on page 6 87 and Dial in on page 6 93 Enter the connection settings for an external modem on the Modem Console tab page see Modem Console on page 6 96 Configuration of the internal networks is described in the next sect
316. ind a NAT router the peer must support NAT T Alternatively the NAT router must support the IPsec protocol IPsec VPN Passthrough For technical reasons only IPsec Tunnel connections are supported in both cases 6 8 2 1 Connections Lists the VPN connections that have been defined Each entry listed here can identify an individual VPN connection or a group of VPN connection channels You have the possibility of defining several tunnels under the transport or tunnel settings of the respective entry You also have the possibility of defining activating and deactivating new VPN connections changing editing the VPN or connection group settings and deleting connections IPsec VPN Connections Connections x m R E FP Yes v Mannheim Leipzig Yes v MA Techniker Zentrale Ea No 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 181 mGuard 7 4 Example 6 8 3 Making a new definition of VPN connection VPN connection channels e Click on the Edit button on the connection table under the unnamed entry e Ifthe unnamed entry cannot be seen then open a further line in the table Editing VPN connection VPN connection channels e Click on the Edit button to the right of the entry URL for starting stopping and status query of a VPN connection The following URL can be used to start and stop VPN connections and query the connection status independently from their Enabled setting https server nph vpn cgi name co
317. ion 1 Also Built in Modem for the mGuard industrial rs only available as an option for the mGuard industrial rs with built in modem ISDN terminal adapter 6 84 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 4 1 2 Ethernet General Ethernet ARP Timeout MTU Settings MTU of the internal interface for VLAN MTU of the external interface MTU of the external interface for VLAN MTU of the Management Interface MTU of the Management interface for VLAN MAU Configuration External 10 100 1000 BASE T RJ45 internal 10 100 1000 BASE T RJ45 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Ethernet Dial out Dial in Modem Console ARP Timeout 30 MTU of the internal interface 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 Port Media Type meem e up up v 1000 Mbit s FDX Yes v K v 1000 Mbit s FDX Yes v Yes v Yes v ARP Timeout ARP Timeout Lifetime of entries in the ARP table in seconds MTU Settings MTU of the name The Maximum Transfer Unit MTU defines the maximum IP interface packet length allowed for using the respective interface For VLAN interfaces As VLAN packets contain 4 bytes more than those without VLAN certain drivers may have problems in processing larger packets Such problems can be solved by reducing the MTU to 1496 MAU Configuration Configuration and status display of the Ethernet ports Port Name of the Ethernet port that the row refers to Media Type Media type of the Et
318. ion during this period As the number of sessions that can be open at the same time is limited see Limiting simultaneous sessions it is important to close sessions that are finished Therefore from version 7 4 0 on the request for a sign of life has the default value of 120 seconds With a maximum of three requests for a sign of life a finished session will be discovered after six minutes and removed In previous versions the default setting was 0 This means that no requests for a sign of life are sent If it is important for no additional traffic to be created you can modify this value With a setting of O in combination with Limiting simultaneous sessions it is possible for additional access to be blocked if too many sessions have been interrupted by network errors but have not been closed Maximum number of Specifies the maximum number of times a sign of life request missing signs of life to the remote peer can remain unanswered For example if a sign of life request should be made every 15 seconds and this value is set to 3 then the SSH connec tion is deleted when a sign of life is not detected after approx imately 45 seconds For administrative access to the mGuard via SSH there is a limit to the number of simultaneous sessions depending on the predefined user Around 0 5 MB of memory is required for each session The root user has unrestricted access For administrative access with a differe
319. ions see Connecting to the network on page 4 9 4 Optional Connect a PC monitor not included to the VGA connection Connect a PC keyboard not included to one of the USB ports The monitor and keyboard must be connected In order to use one of the boot options when booting the mGuard centerport see Boot options with connected monitor and keyboard on page 4 10 In order to carry out a rescue or recovery procedure see Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware on page 8 1 The monitor and keyboard do not need to be connected in order to start and operate the device 4 8 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup 4 4 2 Connecting to the network WARNING Only connect the mGuard network ports to LAN installations Some communication connection points also use RJ45 sockets which must not be connected to the RJ45 sockets of the mGuard LAN port Connect the local computer or network to the LAN port of the mGuard using a UTP CATS5 Ethernet cable WAN port e Use a UTP cable CAT5 Connect to the external network e g WAN Internet via the WAN socket Connections to the remote device or network are established over this network COM1 Serial port ATTENTION The serial port D sub socket must not be connected directly to communication connection points Use a serial cable with a D sub connector to connect a serial terminal or a modem The serial cable can have
320. iple procedures for X 509 authentication The authentication of a remote peer is carried out based on the certificate and remote certificate In this case the consulted remote certificate must be given for each individual connection e g for VPN connections The mGuard consults the provided CA certificate to check whether the certificate shown by the remote peer is authentic In this case all CA certificates must be made available for the mGuard in order to build a chain up to the root certificate using the certificate displayed by the remote peer Available means that the corresponding CA certificates must be installed in the mGuard see CA Certificates on page 6 133 and must be made available additionally during the configuration of the corresponding applications SSH HTTPS VPN Whether both procedures are used alternatively or in combination varies on the application VPN SSH and HTTPS 6 126 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Authentication for SSH The remote peer shows Certificate specific to Certificate specific to the following individual signed by CA individual self signed The mGuard authenti cates the remote peer using All CA certificates that build Remote certificate the chain to the root CA certificate together with the certificates displayed by the remote peer or ADDITIONALLY Remote certificates if used as a filter 1 See Managemen
321. is results in a certificate An X 509 v3 certificate is thus comprised of a public key information about the key owner given as Distinguished Name DN authorized usage etc and the signature of the CA gt Subject certificate The signature is created as follows The CA creates an individual bit sequence known as the HASH value from the bit sequence of the public key owner information and other data This sequence may be up to 160 bits long The CA then encrypts this with its own private key and then adds it to the certificate The encryption with the CA s private key proves the authenticity of the certificate i e the encrypted HASH string is the CA s digital signature If the certificate data is altered then this HASH value will no longer be correct and the certificate is then worthless The HASH value is also known as the fingerprint Since it is encrypted with the CA s private key anyone who has the corresponding public key can decrypt the bit sequence and thus verify the authenticity of the fingerprint or signature The usage of a certification authority means it is not necessary for key owners to know each other They must only know the certification authority used in the process The additional key information further simplifies administration of the key X 509 certificates can be used for e mail encryption with S MIME or IPsec 9 8 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Technical Data 10 Technical Data 10 1 H
322. ist MSN 2nd MSN ISDN protocol EurolSDN NET3 Layer 2 protocol PPP ML PPP w Of v Yes Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Modem Console for mGuard industrial rs with ISDN terminal adapter External Modem Built in Modem ISDN As for mGuard industrial rs without a built in modem mGuard centerport mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard and mGuard delta Configuration as above for External Modem see External Modem on page 6 97 15t MSN 2nd MSN ISDN protocol Layer 2 protocol For outgoing calls the mGuard transmits the entered MSN Multiple Subscriber Number to the called remote peer The mGuard can also receive incoming calls over this MSN provided dial in is enabled see General tab page Max 25 letters numbers the following special characters can be used colon If the mGuard can also receive incoming calls under another number then enter the second MSN here The EurolSDN also known as NETS ISDN protocol is used in Germany and many other European countries Otherwise the ISDN protocol is specified according to the country If necessary this must be requested from the relevant telephone company This is the control equipment over which the local mGuard ISDN terminal adapter communicates with the ISDN remote peer This is generally the ISDN modem of the ISP used to create an Internet connection This must be requested from the ISP PPP ML PPP is used very often 6 102 INNOMINATE
323. it checks the validity period of the certificates then these must be updated before the validity expires see Certificate settings on page 6 129 If a machine certificate is replaced then all VPN connections which use it are restarted by the mGuard During this time the mGuard cannot forward data through the affected VPN connections for a certain time The time period depends on the number of affected VPN connections the performance of the mGuard VPN partner and the latency period of the mGuards in the network If this is not feasible for redundancy then the VPN partners of a redundant pair must be configured so that they accept all certificates whose validity is confirmed by a set of specific CA certificates see CA Certificates on page 6 133 and Authentication on page 6 195 To do this select Signed by any trusted CA under Psec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt Authentication Remote CA Certificate If the new machine certificate is issued by a different sub CA certificate then the VPN partner must know this before the redundant pair uses the new machine certificate The machine certificate must be replaced on both mGuards in a redundant pair However this is not always possible when one cannot be reached e g due to a network outage The mGuard on standby may then have an obsolete machine certificate when it is enabled This is another reason for setting the VPN partners so that they use
324. it is connected to a private branch exchange and if this private branch exchange does not generate a dial tone after the connection is opened then the modem must be instructed not to wait for a dial tone before dialing In this case please add the character string ATX3 OK a space followed by ATx3 followed by a space followed by ok to the initialization sequence In this case the control character wW should be added to the Phone number to call after the digit for an outside line in order to wait for a dial tone 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 99 mGuard 7 4 On mGuard industrial rs with built in modem built in ISDN modem ISDN terminal adapter The mGuard industrial rs can additionally have an optional built in analog modem or ISDN terminal adapter The built in modem or built in ISDN terminal adapter can be used as follows Primary External Interface As a primary external interface if the network mode is set to Built in Modem under Network gt gt Interfaces on the General tab page see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 and General on page 6 62 In this case the data traffic is not made over the WAN port Ethernet port but over this modem Secondary External As a secondary external interface if the Secondary External Interface is activated Interface and Built in Modem is selected under Network gt gt Interfaces on the General tab page see Network gt gt Interfa
325. ively When the first match is found access is granted with the corresponding role admin netadmin audit 6 118 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Authentication gt gt Administrative Users gt gt RADIUS Filters continued RADIUS Filters for Adminis trative Access After a RADIUS server has positively checked the password of a user the RADIUS server sends the mGuard a list of filter IDs in its response These filter IDs are assigned to the user in a database of the server The mGuard uses o them to assign the group and thus the authorization as admin netadmin or audit Successful authentication is noted in the logging of the mGuard Other actions by the user are logged there with the user s original name The log messages are forwarded on to a syslog server provided a syslog server has been approved by the mGuard The following actions are saved Login Logout Start of a firmware update Changes to the configuration Password changes for one of the predefined users root admin netadmin audit and user Group Filter ID The group name may only be used once Two lines may not have the same value Answers from the RADIUS server with a notification of suc cessful authentication must have this group name in their filter ID attribute Up to 50 characters are allowed printable UTF 8 characters without spaces Authorized for access Each group is assigned an
326. ivered either in Stealth or Router mode and is therefore available under one of the following addresses Table 5 2 Preset addresses Factory default Network Management IP 1 Management IP 2 mode mGuard industrial rs Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard smart Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard pci Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard blade Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 EAGLE mGuard Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard rs4000 rs2000 Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard centerport Router https 192 168 1 1 mGuard blade controller Router https 192 168 1 1 mGuard delta Router https 192 168 1 1 Proceed as follows Start the web browser e g Mozilla Firefox MS Internet Explorer Google Chrome or Apple Safari the web browser must support SSL encryption i e HTTPS e Ensure that the browser does not automatically dial a connection at startup as this could make it more difficult to establish a connection to the mGuard In MS Internet Explorer make this setting as follows e Inthe Extras menu select Internet Options and click on the Connections tab page e Never dial a connection must be selected under Dial up and Virtual Private Network settings Enter the complete address of the mGuard in the address field of the browser see Table 5 2
327. ives IKE messages The external virtual IP address is used instead of the actual primary IP address of the external network interface The mGuard no longer uses the actual IP address to send or answer IKE messages ESP data traffic is handled similarly but is also accepted and processed by the actual IP address Internal virtual As described under External virtual IP addresses but for IP addresses internal virtual IP addresses 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 17 mGuard 7 4 7 2 5 Requirements for VPN redundancy VPN redundancy can only be activated when the corresponding license key is installed and a VPN connection is activated Only for mGuard industrial rs If a VPN connection is controlled via a VPN switch then VPN redundancy cannot be activated See under IPsec VPN gt gt Global gt gt Options gt gt VPN Switch During VPN state synchronization the state of the VPN connection is sent continuously from the active mGuard to the mGuard on standby so that this has an up to date copy in the event of errors The only exception is the state of the IPsec replay window Changes there are only transmitted sporadically The volume of the data traffic for the state synchronization does not depend on the data traffic sent over the VPN channels The data volumes for state synchronization are defined by a range of parameters that are assigned to the ISAKMP SAs and IPsec SAs 7 2 6 Handling VPN redundancy in extreme situatio
328. ize Reliability Unchanged vo Important w eH 3 ar v 000 00 any 0 0 0 070 any TOS Minimize Cost Unchanged Low Priority v VPN via External Setting of Egress Queue rules QoS Egress Rules VPN VPN via Internal VPN via External VPN via External 2 VPN via Dial in Default Rules gt X nem pEi ar v 00000 any ooo00 any TOS Minimize Delay w Unchanged w Urgent e 2 an v 000 00 any 0 0 0 010 any TOS Maximize Reliability Unchanged v Important v pE 3 a v 00000 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Minimize Cost v Unchanged w Low Priority v VPN via External 2 Setting of Egress Queue rules QoS Egress Rules VPN venviatnternat ven viaExternai vpn via externai2 vpn via biarin Default Default Queue Default X Rules P 1 Aw v 0 0 0 0 0 any 0 0 0 070 any TOS Minimize Delay Unchanged w Urgent v A fF 2 ar 00 0 00 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Maximize Reliabiity Unchanged v important v p 3 an v 00000 any 0 0 0 070 any TOS Minimize Cost v Unchanged w Low Priority VPN via Dial in Setting of Egress Queue rules QoS Egress Rules VPN vpn viatnternat vpn via Externat VPNviaExternal2 vpn via piain Default Default Queue Default Rules aa da aaa GEE From IP Low ern Ei a v 00 0 00 any 0 0 0 0 0 an
329. k IP address 192 168 27 1 192 168 27 2 192 168 27 3 192 168 27 4 192 168 27 0 24 Gateway Netmask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 192 168112 6 250 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy 7 Redundancy a The firewall and VPN redundancies are not available on the mGuard rs2000 There are several different ways of compensating for errors using the mGuard so that an existing connection is not interrupted Firewall redundancy Two identical mGuards can be combined as a redundant pair meaning one takes over the functions of the other if an error occurs VPN redundancy An existing firewall redundancy forms the basis for VPN redundancy In addition the VPN connections are designed so that at least one mGuard in a redundant pair operates the VPN connections Ring network coupling In ring network coupling another method is used Parts of a network are designed as redundant In the event of errors the alternative path is selected 7 1 Firewall redundancy Using firewall redundancy it is possible to combine two identical mGuards into a redundant pair single virtual router One mGuard takes over the functions of the other if an error occurs Both mGuards run in parallel meaning an existing connection is not interrupted when the mGuard is switched Primary mGuard External a Switch Switch Internal 3 Network gt EE g Tc Network gt lt J Se
330. k interface Administration via HTTPS and SSH Optional rewrite of DSCP TOS values Quality of Service values Quality of Service QoS LLDP MAU management SNMP Stateful Packet Inspection Anti spoofing IP filter L2 filter only in Stealth mode NAT with FTP IRC and PPTP support only in Router modes 1 1 NAT only in Router network mode Port forwarding not in Stealth network mode Individual firewall rules for different users user firewall Individual rule records as action target of firewall rules apart from user firewall or VPN firewall Firewall throughput max 99 MBit s CIFS integrity check of network drives for changes to certain file types e g executable files Antivirus Scan Connector for supporting the central monitoring of network drives with virus scanners 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 1 1 mGuard 7 4 VPN features Additional features Protocol IPsec Tunnel and Transport mode IPsec encryption in hardware with DES 56 Bit 3DES 168 Bit AES 128 192 256 Bit Packet authentication MD5 SHA 1 Internet Key Exchange IKE with Main and Quick mode Authentication via Pre Shared Key PSK X 509v3 certificates with Public Key Infrastructure PKI with Certification Authority CA optional Certificate Revocation List CRL and filter options according to subject or Remote certificate e g self signed certificates Recognition of changing remo
331. l in into the local network or for configuration purposes For devices with a built in modem analog modem or ISDN terminal adapter the modem can be used additionally to combine access possibilities The details for this must be configured on the General Ethernet Outgoing Call Incoming Call and Modem Console tab pages For further explanations of the possibilities for using the serial ports and a built in modem see Modem Console on page 6 96 Connecting the network interface Connect the EAGLE mGuard to the PC using a normal Ethernet patch cable This method allows a correct connection to be made even when Auto MDIX and Automatic Negotiation are deactivated The EAGLE mGuard has a DCE network interface while all other mGuard platforms have DTE interfaces Connect these mGuards using a crossover Ethernet cable Auto MDIX is activated permanently here so it does not matter if Automatic Negotiation is deactivated 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 61 mGuard 7 4 6 4 1 1 General Network Status External IP address Active Defaultroute Used DNS servers Network Mode Network Mode Router Mode External Networks External IPs untrusted port Additional External Routes IP of default gateway Internal Networks Internal IPs trusted port Additional Internal Routes Network Mode Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Network Status External IP address WAN port address Gene
332. lds used for defining modem connection parameters are displayed For the further configuration of the Built in Modem Modem network mode see Network Mode Router Router Mode Modem Built in Modem on page 6 84 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 67 mGuard 7 4 When the Stealth network mode is selected and for Stealth configuration static Network Mode Stealth Default setting on mGuard rs4000 rs2000 mGuard industrial rs mGuard smart mGuard pci EAGLE mGuard Network Interfaces General Ethernet Dial out Dialin Modem Console Network Status External IP address 172 16 66 49 Active Defaultroute 172 16 66 18 Used DNS servers 10 1 0 253 Network Mode Network Mode Stealth v Stealth configuration autodetect v Autodetect ignore NetBIOS over TCP traffic on TCP port No w 139 Stealth Management IP Address Here you can specify additional IP addresses to administrate the mGuard If you have set Stealth configuration to multiple clients remote access will only be possible using this IP address An IP address of 0 0 0 0 disables this feature Note using management VLAN is not supported in Stealth autodetect mode Management accesses 7 SC BT No w 1 ox 192 168 11 1 255 255 255 0 r A 192 168 5 1 255 255 255 0 No wv 1 Default gateway 192 168 11 10 Static routes The following settings are applied to traffic generated by the mGuard Networks to
333. lect Disable in the pop up menu After a successful connection setup After a connection has been successfully set up the following security notice is displayed MS Internet Explorer Security Alert Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others However there is a problem with the site s secunty certificate The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority The secunty certificate has expired or is not yet valid The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed View Certificate Fig 5 7 Security notice As administrative tasks can only be performed when secure encrypted access to the device has been established a self signed certificate is supplied e Acknowledge the corresponding security notice by clicking on Yes The login window is displayed Login to mguard User Name admin Password eecscceeee Access Type Administration x Administration User Firewall Fig 5 8 Login The User firewall access type is not available for the mGuard rs2000 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 5 13 mGuard 7 4 Requirement Procedure Example Configuration Choose the access type Administration or User Firewall and enter your username and password for this ac
334. lly An external modem that establishes the connection to the telephone network is connected to the serial port Connection to the WAN or Internet is then made over the telephone network using the external modem If the address of the mGuard is changed e g by changing the network mode from Ste alth to Router the device is only accessible under the new address When the change is made over the LAN port a message is displayed with the new address before the change becomes active When the configuration is changed over the WAN port you will not receive feedback from the mGuard If you set the mode to Router PPPoE or PPTP and then change the IP address of the LAN port and or the local netmask make sure you enter the correct values Otherwise the mGuard may no longer be accessible For the further configuration of the Built in Modem Modem network mode see Network Mode Router Router Mode Modem Built in Modem on page 6 84 Router Mode Built in Modem Only used for mGuard industrial rs with built in modem or ISDN terminal adapter If the Built in Modem network mode is selected the external Ethernet interface of the mGuard is deactivated and data transfer to and from the WAN is made over the modem or ISDN terminal adapter installed in the mGuard This must be connected to the telephone network Internet connection is then made over the telephone network After Built in Modem is selected the text fie
335. logged attempts factory default No 1 External 2 and Any External are only for devices with serial ports see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 6 140 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 6 1 2 Outgoing Rules Network Security Packet Filter Outgoing General firewall setting Use the firewall ruleset below ii D eya a Log ID w outgoing MW 262e7801 2 40 1 40e S076 000002080000 rop all outgoing connections m MaRa ORS ___ Fromf ise tne mewali ruleset below any No v E 1 All v 0 0 0 0 0 any 0 0 0 0 0 Accept v default rule These rules specify which traffic from the inside is allowed to pass to the outside Please note Port settings are only meaningful for TCP and UDP Log entries for unknown connection attempts No w Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Outgoing Rules Outgoing Lists the firewall rules that have been set These rules apply for outgoing data connections that were initiated internally in order to communicate with a remote peer Factory default A rule is set that allows all outgoing connections If no rule is set then all outgoing connections are forbidden except VPN General firewall Accept all outgoing connections the data packets for all outgoing setting connections are accepted Drop all outgoing connections the data packets for all outgoing connections are dropped Use the firewall ruleset below displays additional setting options
336. lt setting was 0 This means that no requests for a sign of life are sent Note that the requests for a sign of life create additional traffic Maximum number of Specifies the maximum number of times a sign of life request missing signs of life to the peer can remain unanswered For example if a sign of life request should be made every 15 seconds and this value is set to 3 then the SEC stick client connection is deleted when a sign of life is not detected after approximately 45 seconds Limiting simultaneous For administrative access to the mGuard via an SEC stick there is a limit to the number sessions of simultaneous sessions Around 0 5 MB of memory is required for each session to ensure the maximum security level The restriction has no effect on existing sessions but only on newly created access Maximum number of 0 to 2147483647 simultaneous Specifies the number of administrative accesses allowed sessions for all users from all users at the same time With 0 no session is allowed Maximum number of 0 to 2147483647 simultaneous Specifies the number of administrative accesses allowed sessions for a user from one user at the same time With O no session is allowed Allowed Networks Lists the firewall rules that have been set They apply to SEC Stick remote access ng ene s0886 V OOIIUD UDUPI OOOO SX omie O a f Aeon o commen o a 0 0 0 0 0 External v Accept v No v 7961_en_04 INNOM
337. lter the MAC filter is stateless This means additional rules must be created in the opposite direction where necessary When no rules are defined all ARP and IP packets are allowed la When defining MAC filter rules pay attention to the screen display Rules defined here have priority over packet filter rules The MAC filter does not support logging Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt MAC Filtering Incoming Source MAC Definition of the source MAC address xx xx xX XX XX XX stands for all MAC addresses Destination MAC Definition of the destination MAC address xx xx xx Xx XX XX stands for all MAC addresses ff ff ff ff ff ff is the broadcast MAC address where all ARP requests are sent for example Ethernet Protocol Yany stands for all Ethernet protocols Additional protocols can be specified in name or hexadecimal value for example IPv4 or 0800 ARP or 0806 1 mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 145 mGuard 7 4 Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt MAC Filtering continued Action Accept means that data packets may pass through Drop means that data packets may not pass through dropped Comment Freely selectable comment for this rule Outgoing The explanation for Incoming also applies to Outgoing 6 146 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 6 1 5 Advanced The followi
338. ly be activated when a suitable license key is installed Further conditions apply if VPN redundancy should also be enabled see VPN redundancy on page 7 15 Maximum time which can elapse in the event of errors before a switch is made to the other mGuard 6 226 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Redundancy gt gt Firewall Redundancy gt gt Redundancy continued Priority of this device high low Specifies the priority connected to presence notifications CARP Set the priority to high on the active mGuard The mGuard on standby is set to low Both mGuards in a redundant pair may either have different priorities or the high priority Never set both mGuards in a redundant pair to low priority Passphrase for avail On mGuards which are part of a redundant pair checks are ability checks constantly made as to whether an active mGuard is available and whether this should remain active A variation of the CARP Common Address Redundancy Protocol is used here CARP uses SHA 1 HMAC encryption together with a pass word This password must be the same on both mGuards It is used for encryption and is never transmitted in plain text The password is important for security as the mGuard is vulnerable at this point We recom mend a password with at least 20 characters and a range of special characters printable UTF 8 characters The password must be changed on a regular basis
339. mGuard authenticates itself to the remote peer in this case the browser of the user using a self signed machine certificate This is a unique certificate issued by Innominate for each mGuard This means that every mGuard is delivered with a unique self signed machine certificate Allowed Networks SX TO O comment fo too p 1 0 0 0 0 0 External v Accept v No v Lists the firewall rules that have been set These apply for incoming data packets of an HTTPS remote access attempt If multiple firewall rules are set they will be searched in the order in which they are listed top down until a suitable rule is found This rule is then applied If there are other suitable rules further down the list these are ignored The rules specified here only become effective if Enable HTTPS remote access is set to Yes Internal access is also possible when this option is set to No A firewall rule that would refuse nternal access is therefore not effective in this case You have the following options From IP Enter the address of the system or network where remote access is permitted or forbidden in this field IP address 0 0 0 0 0 means all addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 23 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access continued Interface Action Comment Log External Internal External
340. ming outgoing ping frames ICMP Echo Request per second Outgoing Factory default 75 Incoming Factory default 25 These are the upper limits for allowed incoming and outgoing TCP connections per second These are set to a level that can never be reached during normal operation However they can be reached easily when attacks occur thus giving additional protection If special requirements are present in your operating surroundings then these values can be increased Outgoing Factory default 5 Incoming Factory default 3 These are the upper limits for allowed incoming and outgoing ping frames per second These are set to a level that can never be reached during normal operation However they can be reached easily when attacks occur thus giving additional protection If special requirements are present in your operating surroundings then these values can be increased The value 0 means that no ping packets are allowed in or out 6 152 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network Security gt gt DoS Protection gt gt Flood Protection continued Stealth Mode Maximum number of incoming outgoing ARP requests or ARP replies per second each Factory default 500 These are the upper limits for allowed incoming and outgoing ARP requests or replies per second These are set to a level that can never be reached during normal operation However they can be reached easily
341. mote Local Enter the network or computer address where the local mGuard is connected Remote Enter the network or computer address found behind the remote VPN gateway here If the Address of the remote site s VPN gateway see Address of the remote site s VPN gateway on page 6 183 is entered as any it is possible that a number of different remote peers will connect to the mGuard Tunnel settings IPsec L2TP If clients should connect to the mGuard by IPsec L2TP then activate the L2TP server and make the following entries in the fields specified below Type Transport Protocol UDP Local Port all Remote Port all 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 187 mGuard 7 4 Default route over the VPN The address 0 0 0 0 0 provides a Default route over the VPN In this case all data traffic where no other tunnel or route exists is forwarded through this VPN tunnel A default route over the VPN should only be given for a single tunnel Default route over the VPN cannot be used in Stealth mode Options following installation of a VPN tunnel group license If the Address of the remote site s VPN gateway is entered as any it is possible that there are many mGuards or many networks on the remote side A very large address range is then specified in the Remote field for the local mGuard A part of this address range is used on the remote mGuards for the network entered for each of them under Local
342. must also be entered When Yes is selected the mGuard will not attempt to estab lish the VPN connection using standard IKE encryption UDP port 500 and 4500 Instead the connection is always encap sulated using TCP Default 8080 Number of the port where the remote peer receives the encapsulated data packets The port number entered here must be the same as the one entered at the remote peer s mGuard as TCP port to listen on Psec VPN gt gt Global gt gt Options menu If TCP Encapsulation is used see page 6 177 Ifthe mGuard is to set up a VPN connection to a maintenance center and encapsulate the traffic to there Initiate or Initiate on traffic must be entered Ifthe mGuard is installed at a maintenance center to which mGuards are setting up a VPN connection Wait must be entered gt x EE Virtual IP Aton Click here when ri Yes w Tunel v 192 168 1 1 32 192 168 254 1 32 192 168 1 1 Wore further tunnel or transport paths Router mode should be specified Transport and Tunnel Settings ba Enabled type toast St emote ction p Yes v Tunnel v 192 168 1 1 32 192 168 254 1 32 oren VPN connection channels For each individual VPN connection channel Enabled Comment A VPN connection defined under a descriptive name can consist of more than one VPN connection channel Therefore you can define multiple VPN connection channels here After the More button is clicked another partially o
343. must have the status of using an old password but expecting a new one red X To get this status enter random passwords one after the other e You then generate a secure password and enter it in both mGuards This password will then be used immediately without any coordination During this procedure the mGuard which is on standby may enter the outdated state briefly but this automatically resolves itself again Encryption Algorithm DES 3DES AES 128 AES 192 AES 256 See Algorithms on page 6 204 Checksum algorithm MD5 SH1 SHA 256 SHA 512 hash See Algorithms on page 6 204 Interface for state synchro Interface used for syn Internal Interface Dedicated Interface nisation chronizing the state The mGuard centerport supports a Dedicated Interface This is a reserved direct Ethernet interface or a dedicated LAN segment through which the state synchronization is sent The redundant pair can be connected through an additional dedicated Ethernet interface or an interconnected switch On a Dedicated Interface presence notifications CARP are also listened for on the third Ethernet interface Presence notifications CARP are also sent when the mGuard is active However no additional routing is supported for this interface Frames received on this interface are not forwarded for secu rity reasons The connection state of the third Ethernet interface can be queried via SNMP 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 2
344. n Management gt gt Configuration Profiles continued Upload Configuration Profile External Config Storage ECS Uploading a configuration profile that has been saved to the configuration computer file Requirement You have saved a configuration profile on the configuration computer as a file according to the procedure described above Enter the desired profile name in the Name for the new profile field next to Upload Configuration to Profile e Click on the Browse button Select the file and open it so that the file name or path is displayed in the dialog e Click on the Upload button The configuration profile is loaded on the mGuard The name assigned in step 1 is displayed in the list of profiles stored on the mGuard Save the current configuration to an ECS Automatically save configuration changes to an ECS Only for mGuard rs4000 rs2000 EAGLE mGuard and mGuard centerport If the device is replaced then the configuration profile of the original device can be applied using the ECS In this case the replacement device must still use root as the password for the root user If the replacement device has a different root password than root then you must enter this password under The root password to save to the ECS see Saving profiles on an external storage medium Only for mGuard rs4000 rs2000 EAGLE mGuard and mGuard centerport When Yes is selected configuration
345. n computer Alternately these configuration files can then be read back onto the mGuard and activated You can also restore the mGuard to the factory default at any time Configuration profiles for the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 EAGLE mGuard and mGuard centerport can also be stored on an external configuration storage ECS such as an SD card mGuard rs4000 rs2000 or V 24 USB memory stick EAGLE mGuard mGuard centerport see Profiles on external storage medium mGuard rs4000 2000 EAGLE mGuard mGuard centerport on page 6 41 When a configuration profile is saved the passwords used for the authentication of administrative access to the mGuard are not saved It is possible to load and activate a configuration profile that was created under an older firmware version The reverse is not the case a configuration profile created under a newer firmware version should not be loaded es oe 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 39 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt Configuration Profiles Configuration Profiles The top of the page has a list of configuration profiles that are stored on the mGuard for example the Factory Default configuration profile If any configuration profiles have been saved by the user see below they will be listed here 2 Active configuration profile The configuration profile currently in effect has an Active symbol at the front of the entry You can perform the following with configuration
346. n an integrity database must be created This integrity database forms the basis for comparison when checking the network drive regularly The checksums of all monitored files are recorded here The integrity database is protected against manipulation The database is either created explicitly due to a specific reason see CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status gt gt Display gt gt Actions on page 6 166 or at the first regular check of the drive The integrity database must be created again following an intentional manipulation of the files on the network drive Unauthorized manipulation of the relevant files cannot be detected as long as a valid integrity database is not in place 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 159 mGuard 7 4 6 7 2 1 Settings Settings Filename Patterns General Integrity certificate Used to sign integrity VPN Endpunkt Kundendienst KS v databases Send notifications via e mail After every check v Target address for e mail notifications _cifs integrity example com Sender address of e mail notifications _cifs integrity example com Subject prefix for e mail notifications MGuard CIFS Integrity Address of the e mail server smtp example com Checking of Shares cx Checked CES share ciao Yes X pe x7 scan v pc x7 scan w mea CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Settings General Checking of Shares
347. n selected do the network address areas match on both sides The VPN connection has been successfully set up and can be used If this is not possible there is a problem with the remote peer VPN gateway In this case disable and enable the connection again to re establish the connection 6 208 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 9 SEC Stick menu The mGuard supports the use of a SEC Stick an access protector for IT systems The SEC Stick is a product of the team2work company www team2work de The SEC Stick is a key The user inserts it into the USB port of a computer with an Internet connection and can then set up an encrypted connection to the mGuard in order to se curely access defined services in the office or home network For example the Remote Desktop Protocol can be used within the encrypted and secure SEC Stick connection to control a PC remotely in the office or at home as if the user was sitting directly in front of it This works because access to the business PC is protected by the mGuard and the mGuard can be configured for the SEC Stick to permit access The user of this remote computer where the SEC Stick is inserted authenticates himself to the mGuard with the data and software stored on his SEC Stick The SEC Stick establishes an SSH connection to the mGuard Other channels can be embedded in this connection e g TCP IP connections 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 209 mGuard 7 4 6 9 1 Global
348. n was not established or has failed due to an error If the signal LED is set to ON then the VPN connection is established If the signal LED flashes then the VPN connection is currently being established or disabled Analog line with built in modem WARNING The analog connections TIP RING must only be connected to the commu nication cable designed for this purpose The TIP and RING contacts are used for connection to a telephone landline analog connection The following descriptions are used in Germany for the contact details on the frontplate TIP a RING b 4 18 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup ISDN line with built in ISDN terminal adapter WARNING The ISDN connections TX TX RX RX must only be connected to an ISDN SO bus The TX TX RX and RX contacts are used for connection to the ISDN and identify the mGuard industrial rs as an ISDN participant The following table describes the assignment of the contacts to 8 pin connections for both connectors and sockets for example RJ45 Table 4 2 Assignment of contacts to 8 pin connections Pin number TE mGuard 3 TX 4 RX 5 RX 6 TX When connected directly to an ISDN NTBA the mGuard connections must be made as follows NTBA a1 gt mGuard pin 9 Rx NTBA a2 gt mGuard pin 7 Tx NTBA b1 gt mGuard pin 10 Rx NTBA b2 gt mGuard pin 8 Tx Serial port
349. name installing the license To install a license first save the license file as a separate file on your computer then proceed as follows e Click on the Browse button next to the Filename field Select the file and open it so that the file name or path is displayed in the Filename field e Click on the Install license file button 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 33 mGuard 7 4 6 2 3 3 Terms of License Management nsing Overview Instat I Terms of License mGuard Firmware License Information The mGuard incorporates certain free and open software Some license terms associated with this software require that Innominate Security Technologies AG provides copyright and license information see below for details All the other components of the mGuard Firmware are Copyright 2001 2010 by innominate Security Technologies AG Last reviewed on 2011 05 11 for the mGuard 7 4 0 release ate Bs0 stvie beron Gnu GPLv2 bgibs enu Geiv2 bridge utiis enu Geiv2 busybox Gnu Gpiv2 MIT derivate license lc ares BSD style and GNU GPLv2 aipans Copyright 2001 D J Bernstein conntrack enu Gpiv2 curi MTA derivate icense ebtabies Gnu GPLv2 I l EXT2 filesystem utilities GNU GPLv2 lainin libvext2fs LGPLv2 libfe2p LGPLv2 libvuuid BSD style ezipupdate enu Gpiv2 finora enu cPLv2 GNU GPLv2 LGPLw2 md2 Derived from the RSA Data Security Inc M
350. nd UDP protocols any describes any selected port startport endport e g 110 120 defines a range of ports You can specify individual ports by giving either their port number or the corresponding service name e g 110 for pops or pops for 110 Accept means that data packets may pass through Reject means that the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been rejected In Stealth mode Reject has the same effect as Drop Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Freely selectable comment for this rule For each individual firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default When set to Yes all attempts to establish a connection that are not covered by the rules defined above are logged The explanation for Incoming also applies to Outgoing 6 202 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 8 3 4 IKE Options ISAKMP SA Key Exchange Algorithms This preference list starts with the most preferred pair of algorithms IPsec SA Data Exchange Algorithms This preference list starts with the most preferred psir of algorithms Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS The remote site must have the same entry Activation is recommended due to security reasons
351. nd terminal adapter It can then be used as a firewall VPN router hybrid over Ethernet or dial up network connections rs indicates that this device is especially suited for secure Remote Services remote diagnosis remote configuration teleservices The device is designed for assembly on mounting rails according to DIN EN 60715 and is therefore especially suitable for use in industrial environments Fig 1 2 mGuard industrial rs VPN tunnels can be initiated using the software or hardware switch Redundant power supplies are supported 9 V DC 36 V DC 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 1 3 mGuard 7 4 mGuard smart mGuard pci mGuard blade The mGuard smart is the smallest device model It can easily be inserted between the computer or local network on the mGuard LAN port and an available router on the mGuard WAN port without having to change existing system configurations or driver installations It is designed for instant use in the office or when travelling The mGuard smart is a newly developed version of the mGuard smart In the interests of simplicity mGuard smart is mostly used for both versions in this manual The described characteristics also apply to the mGuard smart Specific deviations between the mGuard smart and mGuard smart are indicated accordingly Fig 1 3 mGuard smart The mGuard pci card can be plugged into a PCI slot and provides the connected computer with all mGuard functions in Driv
352. nd the mGuard or to configure the mGuard Dial in is the interface definition used for this connection type in firewall selection lists For you to be able to access the LAN with a Windows computer using the dial connection a network connection must be set up on this computer in which the dial connection to the mGuard is defined Additionally the IP address of the mGuard or its hostname must be defined as a gateway for this connection so that the 6 96 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration connections to the LAN can be routed over this To access the web configuration interface of the mGuard you must enter the IP address of the mGuard or its hostname in the address line of the web browser The serial port of the mGuard is connected to the serial port of a PC The connection to the mGuard is established on a PC using a terminal program and the configuration is made using the command line interface of the mGuard If an external modem is connected to the serial port you may have to enter corresponding settings below under External Modem regardless of what you are using the serial port and the modem connected to it for Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Modem Console Serial Console External Modem The following settings for the Baudrate and Hardware handshake are only valid for configurations where a terminal or PC with a terminal program is connected to the serial port The settings are not valid when an exte
353. nector for connection to a network ATTENTION Selecting suitable ambient environmental conditions Ambient temperature 0 C to 40 C mGuard smart mGuard blade mGuard delta Maximum 70 C mGuard pci Maximum 55 C mGuard industrial rs EAGLE mGuard Maximum 50 C mGuard centerport 20 C to 60 C mGuard rs4000 mGuard rs2000 Maximum 90 non condensing humidity mGuard smart mGuard blade mGuard delta mGuard pci mGuard centerport Maximum 95 non condensing humidity mGuard industrial rs EAGLE mGuard mGuard rs4000 mGuard rs2000 To avoid overheating do not expose to direct sunlight or other heat sources ATTENTION Cleaning Use a soft cloth to clean the device housing Do not use abrasive solvents or liquids 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 1 mGuard 7 4 Startup steps To start the device perform the following steps in the given sequence Table 4 1 Startup steps Step Objective Page 1 Check the scope of delivery Checking the scope of delivery on page 4 3 Read the Release Notes 2 Connect the device Installing and booting the mGuard centerport on page 4 8 Installing the mGuard industrial rs on page 4 13 Connecting the mGuard smart mGuard on page 4 21 Installing the mGuard blade on page 4 22 Installing the EAGLE mGuard on page 4 24 Connecting the mGuard delta on page 4 27 Installing the mGuard pci on page 4 28
354. nfiguration the Stealth Management IP Address If the secondary external interface is activated see Secondary External Interface on page 6 71 the following applies If the routing settings are such that the data traffic to the Stealth Manage ment IP Address would be routed via the secondary external interface this would be an exclusion situation i e the mGuard could not be admin istered locally any more To prevent this the mGuard has a built in mechanism that ensures that in such a case the Stealth Management IP Address can still be accessed by the locally connected computer or network 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 69 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Stealth network mode continued Static routes Management IP iPaddresses IP address for accessing and managing the mGuard The IP address 0 0 0 0 disables the management IP address Change the management IP address first before entering additional addresses Netmask The netmask for the IP address above Use VLAN Yes No IP address and netmask of the VLAN port If this IP address should be contained within a VLAN then set this option to Yes VLAN ID AVLAN ID between 1 and 4095 An explanation can be found under VLAN on page 9 7 Ifyou want to delete entries from the list please note that the first entry cannot be deleted Default gateway The default gateway of the network wh
355. ng settings influence the basic behavior of the firewall Network Security Packet Filter Incoming Rules lI Outgoing Rules Rule Records MAC Filtering Advanced Consistency checks Maximum size of ping packets ICMP Echo Request 52 Enable TCP UDP ICMP consistency cheds Allow TCP keepalive packets oe a Network Modes Router PPTP PPPoE ICMP via primary external ihis a Allow ping requests w ICMP via secondary external 5 interface for the mGuard P Please note Enabling SNMP access automatically accepts incoming ICMP packets Stealth Mode Allow forwarding of GVRP frames No v Allow forwarding of STP frames No v Allow forwarding of DHCP frames Yes v Connection Tracking Maximum table size 4096 Allow TCP connections upon SYN only after reboot connections need to be re established Timeout for established TCP 432 connections seconds ca Timeout for closed TCP connections seconds FIP Yes v IRC Yes v PPTP No v H323 No v SIP No v Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Advanced Consistency checks Maximum size of Relates to the size of the complete packet including the ping packets header Normally the packet size is 64 bytes although it can ICMP Echo Request be larger If oversized packets should be blocked to prevent bottlenecks a maximum value can be entered This should be more than 64 bytes as normal ICMP echo requests sh
356. nistrative Users refers to users who have the right depending on their authorization level to configure the mGuard Root and Administrator authorization levels or to use it User authorization level Authentication gt gt Administrative Users gt gt Passwords root admin To login at a specific authorization level the user must enter the corresponding password assigned to the level root admin or user Root Password Account root Administrator Password Account admin Grants full rights to all parameters of the mGuard Note Only this authorization level allows unlimited access to the file system of the mGuard Username cannot be changed root Default root password root e Tochange the root password enter the current password in the Old Password field then the new password in the two corresponding fields directly underneath Grants all rights required for the configuration options accessed via the web based administrator interface Username cannot be changed admin Default password mGuard 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 117 mGuard 7 4 Authentication gt gt Administrative Users gt gt Passwords continued user Disable VPN until the If a user password has been defined and activated the user is authenticated user must enter this password to enable configured VPN via HTTP connections when they first attempt to access any HTTP URL This must be made after every restart of the mGua
357. nistrator passwords are defined Make the following settings for SSH remote access 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 11 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access continued Session Timeout Specifies after how long in seconds the session is seconds automatically ended when no action is taken i e automatic logout The setting 0 factory default means that no automatic session end is made The value entered also applies when the operator uses shell access over the serial port instead of the SSH protocol The effect of the setting in the Session Timeout field is temporarily suspended if the processing of a shell command exceeds the set number of seconds In contrast the connection can also be canceled when the connection no longer functions correctly see Delay between requests for a sign of life on page 6 13 Enable SSH remote If you want to enable SSH remote access then set this option access Yes No to Yes You can enable nternal SSH access i e from the directly connected LAN or from the directly connected computer independently of this switch setting You must define the firewall rules for the available interfaces on this page under Allowed Networks in order to specify differentiated access possibilities to the mGuard Port for incoming SSH Default 22 connections remote If thi rt number is changed the new port number onl administration only Spo p g p y
358. nknown authentication users to the RADIUS server If successful the reply from the RADIUS server will contain a group name The mGuard then enables user firewall templates containing this group name as the template user The RADIUS server must be configured to deliver this group name in the Access Accept package as a Filter ID lt groupname gt attribute User Name Required name of the user during login Authentication Method Local DB When Local DB is selected the password assigned to the user must be entered in the User Password column next to the User Name RADIUS When RADIUS is selected the user password can be stored on the RADIUS server User Password Only active when Local DB is selected as the authentication method 6 120 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 5 2 2 Access Authentication Firewall Users Firewall Users Access Status HTTPS Authentication via HX Interface p Internal v p External v F Dial n v Please note Firewall users can only log into the web interface if HTTPS remote access for the corresponding network interface is enabled as well see Management Web Settings Authentication gt gt Firewall Users gt gt Access HTTPS Authentication via ATTENTION For authentication via an external interface consider the following If a firewall user can logon via an unsecure interface and the user leaves without logging out correctly then
359. nnecting to the power Supply ssssssesseeesessseississirsrreeireirsrrsernsrnsens 4 6 4 4 Installing and booting the mGuard Centerport cc eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneee 4 8 4 4 1 Connecting the device oo eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeneeeeteeeeeetaas 4 8 4 4 2 Connecting to the network ceeceeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeaeeeeaeeeneeeaee 4 9 4 4 3 Front COVOR onina tava ine eet 4 10 4 4 4 HOUSING aeia eat ea aia atten ahi ea 4 10 4 4 5 Booting the MGuard CenterPOrt 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteas 4 10 4 5 Installing the mGuard industrial So eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeaeenaes 4 13 4 5 1 Assembly disassembly cceecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeaes 4 13 4 5 2 Connecting to the power Supply eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 4 14 4 5 3 Connecting to the network eeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeeteeetaeeeeeees 4 15 4 6 Connecting the mGuard smart MGUALIC ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeseaeeeeettaeeeaeetenees 4 21 4 7 Installing the MGuard blade eee eee cee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteeeeeeeaes 4 22 4 8 Installing the EAGLE MGuard oo eeceeececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeetaees 4 24 4 9 Connecting the MGuard delta ooo eeceeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeseeseaeesneeseaeseneeenaees 4 27 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE i mGuard 7 4 4 10 Installing the MGUard pci oo ee eee eee
360. nnection amp cmd up down status wget no check certificate https admin mGuard192 168 1 1 nph vpn cgi name Athen amp cmd up The no check certificate option ensures that the HTTPS certificate on the mGuard is not checked further It may be necessary to code the password for the URL if it contains special characters A command like this relates to all connection channels that are summarized under the respective name in this example Athen This is the name entered under A descriptive name for the connection on the General tab page If ambiguity occurs then the URL call only affects the first entry in the connections list Access to individual VPN connection channels is not possible If individual channels are deactivated Enabled No then these are not started Starting and stopping in this way thus have no effect on the settings of the individual channels i e the list under Transport and Tunnel Settings Starting and stopping a connection using a URL only makes sense if the configuration of the connection is deactivated Enabled No or when Connection startup is set to Wait Otherwise the connection to the mGuard is established independently If the status of a VPN connection is queried using the URL detailed above then the following answers can be expected Table 6 1 Status of a VPN connection Answer Meaning unknown A VPN connection with this name does not exist void The connection is inactive due
361. nnection with a uniquely assigned user name must be defined for every owner of a SEC Stick who has authorized access This user name is used to identify the defined connections Name of the person Name of the company After clicking on the Edit button the following page appears SEC Stick Connections nobody SEC Stick connections General Enabled No w UserName nobody Comment Contact Adescriptive name of the user Company myCompany SSH public key including ssh dss or ssh rsa SSH Port Forwarding Enabled User Name Comment Contact A descriptive name of the user Company SSH public key including ssh dss or ssh rsa 192 168 47 11 3389 c x ee o As above As above Optional Text comment Optional Text comment Optional Name of the person repeated Optional As above Here you must enter the SSH public key belonging to the SEC Stick in ASCII format The secret equivalent is stored on the SEC Stick 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 213 mGuard 7 4 SEC Stick gt gt Connections gt gt SEC Stick connections continued SSH Port Forwarding List of the allowed access and SSH port forwarding relating to the SEC Stick of the corresponding user IP IP address of the computer to which the access is allowed Port Port number to be used when accessing the computer 6 214 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Enabling Filters fl 1 No 1 QoS
362. not more than 5 500 frames s 17 Mbit s bi directional not more than 2 300 frames s 17 Mbit s bi directional not more than 2 300 frames s The bi directional value includes the traffic in both directions For example 1 500 Mbit s means that 750 Mbit s are forwarded in each direction Fail over switching time The fail over switching time can be set to 1 3 or 10 seconds in the event of errors The 1 second upper limit is currently only maintained by the mGuard centerport even under high loads 7 22 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy 7 2 9 Limits of VPN redundancy The limits documented above for firewall redundancy also apply to VPN redundancy see Limits of firewall redundancy on page 7 14 Further restrictions also apply The redundant pair must have the same configuration on the following During the general VPN setting For each individual VPN connection The mGuard only accepts VPN connections to the first virtual IP address In Router network mode this relates to the first internal IP address and the first external IP address The following features cannot be used with VPN redundancy Dynamic activation of the VPN connections using a VPN switch or the CGI script command nph vpn cgi only on mGuard industrial rs Archiving of diagnosis messages for VPN connections VPN connections are only supported in Tunnel mode VPN connections in Transport mode are not sufficie
363. not suitable for measuring the fail over switching time Masquerading is carried out so that the sender is hidden behind the first virtual IP address or the first internal IP address This is different to masquerading on the mGuard without firewall redundancy When firewall redundancy is not activated the external or internal IP address where the sender is hidden is specified in a routing table 7 14 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy 7 2 VPN redundancy VPN redundancy can only be used together with firewall redundancy The concept is the same as for firewall redundancy In order to intercept an error in the system environment the activity is transmitted from the active mGuard to the mGuard on standby At each point in time at least one mGuard in the redundant pair operates the VPN connection except in the event of a network lobotomy Basic requirements for VPN redundancy VPN redundancy does not have any of its own variables It currently does not have its own menu in the user interface it is activated together with firewall redundancy instead VPN redundancy can only be used if the corresponding license has been purchased and installed on the mGuard As VPN connections are required for VPN redundancy an additional VPN license is also necessary If you only have the license for firewall redundancy and VPN connections are installed then VPN redundancy cannot be activated An error message is displayed as soon
364. ns Local masquerading Local NAT Local NAT for IPsec tunnel ra Local masquerading wv Internal network address for locallmesquerading 22 05 1 0 24 When local devices send data packets only those packets are considered which the mGuard actually encrypts the mGuard only forwards packets via the VPN tunnel if they come from a trustworthy source which originate in a source address within the network that is defined under Internal network address for local masquerading whose destination address is in the Remote network see Remote on page 6 187 if no 1 to 1 NAT is set for the remote NAT whose destination address is in the Network address for remote 1 to 1 NAT areaif 1 to 1 NAT is set for the remote NAT The source address of such data packets is masked with the lowest IP address of the network under Local Then the data packets are sent via the VPN tunnel The masking changes the source address and the source port The original addresses are recorded Response packets that are received via the VPN tunnel and that match an entry are assigned their destination address and their destination port 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 191 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt General continued Further settings can be made by clicking More Remote NAT Remote NAT for IPsec tunnel connections Network address for remote 1 to 1 NAT Off 1 to 1 NAT masquerading of the rem
365. ns The conditions listed under Handling firewall redundancy in extreme situations on page 7 8 also apply to VPN redundancy They also apply when the mGuard is used exclusively for forwarding on VPN connections The mGuard forwards the data flows via the VPN channels and rejects incorrect packets regardless of whether firewall rules have been defined for the VPN connections or not An error interrupts the flow of data traffic An error interrupting the data traffic running over the VPN channels poses an extreme situation In this case the IPsec data traffic is briefly vulnerable to replay attacks A replay attack is the repetition of previously sent encrypted data packets using copies which have been saved by the attacker The data traffic is protected by sequential numbers Independent sequential numbers are used for each direction in an IPsec channel The mGuard drops ESP packets which have the same sequential number as a packet that has already been decrypted for a specific IPsec channel by the mGuard This mechanism is known as the IPsec replay window The IPsec replay window is only replicated sporadically during the state synchronization as it uses a great deal of resources It can thus occur that the active mGuard has an obsolete IPsec replay window following a fail over An attack is then possible until the real VPN partner has sent the next ESP packet for the corresponding IPsec SA or until the IPsec SA has been updated In orde
366. nt Hardware related traps Chassis power signal relay Yes wv Agent external config storage tempersture CIFS integrity traps Successful integrity check of a CIFSshere 5 Y Failed integrity chek ofa CIFS y share Found s suspicious difference onaCiFSshare Y Ww Redundancy traps Ststuschange Yes v Userfirewall traps Userfirewall taps Yes v VPN traps IPsec connection status changes Yes v L2TP connection status changes Yes v SEC Stick Traps SEC Stick connection status Ye v changes Trap destinations Dx Destination IP Destination Moros TT E 192 168 10 10 162 Platfom specific configurations are only effective on the platfom in question Similarily AV traps are only sent when a licensed anti virus system is active SNMP traps only are sent if SNMP access is enabled In certain cases the mGuard can send SNMP traps SNMP traps are only sent when the SNMP requests are activated Traps correspond to SNMPv1 The following list details the trap information for each setting The exact description can be found in the MIB belonging to the mGuard If SNMP traps are sent to the remote peer via a VPN channel the IP address of the remote peer must be located in the network that is entered as the Remote network in the definition of the VPN connection The internal IP address in Stealth mode the Stealth Management IP Address or the Virtual IP must be located in the network that is entered
367. nt user admin netadmin and audit the number of simultaneous sessions is restricted You can specify the number here The restriction has no effect on existing sessions but only on newly created access Maximum number of 2 to 2147483647 simultaneous sessions for the role admin Maximum number of 0 to 2147483647 simultaneous sessions for the role netadmin For admin at least 2 simultaneously allowed sessions are required so that admin does not lock itself out With 0 no session is allowed It is possible that the user netadmin is not used 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 13 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access continued Allowed Networks Maximum number of 0 to 2147483647 simultaneous With 0 no session is allowed It is possible that the user sessions for the role vat i aie audit is not used audit Log ID tw eeh aocese IN 26227a04 240 1402 2076 000002050000 SX rrome O PC 1 10 1 0 016 External v Accept v No v p 2 192 168 67 0 24 External ow Accept v No w Lists the firewall rules that have been set These apply for incoming data packets of an SSH remote access attempt If multiple firewall rules are set they will be searched in the order in which they are listed top down until a suitable rule is found This rule is then applied If there are other suitable rules further down the list these are ignored The rules specified her
368. ntered number defines the maximum number of data packets or kbit s that can pass through according to the Mea surement Unit set see above This applies to the data flow that conforms to the rule record criteria listed on the left i e that may pass through The mGuard will drop the excess number of data packets if this data flow delivers more data packets per second Optional Text comment 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 217 mGuard 7 4 6 10 2 Egress Queues The services are allocated according to defined priorities During connection bottlenecks the outgoing data packets are put into egress queues i e queues for waiting packets and are then processed according to their priority Ideally the allocation of priority levels and bandwidths should result in a sufficient bandwidth level being available for the complete transfer of data packets in real time whilst other packets e g FTP downloads are set to wait in critical cases The main function of Egress QoS is the optimal utilization of the available bandwidth on a connection In certain cases a limitation of the packet rate can be useful e g to protect a slow computer from overloading in the protected network The Egress Queues feature can be used for all interfaces and for VPN connections 6 10 2 1 Internal External External 2 Dial in Internal Setting of Egress Queues on the LAN interface QoS Egress Queues Internal External
369. nterfaces are always transferred over the secondary external interface but only if this is activated Inthe temporary operation mode activated signifies the following Only when certain conditions are fulfilled is the secondary external interface activated and only then do the routing settings of the secondary external interface become effective Network address 0 0 0 0 0 generally signifies the largest definable network i e the Internet be accessed via the secondary external interface as long as the firewall settings are defined to allow this la In the Router network mode the local network connected to the mGuard can 6 74 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General continued Secondary External Interface continued Secondary External Probes for Activation Interface continued Network Mode Modem v Network Mode Modem Operation Mode temporary v Secondary External Routes 2 lt e Operation Mode temporary p 192 168 3 0 24 lt oatoway Probes for Activation The secondary external interface is activated only if P gt XS NEC r all probes fail and if the operation mode is set to temporary Probe Interval seconds 20 Number of times all probes need to fail during subsequent runs before the secondary external interface is activated 2 DNS Mode use primary DNS settings untouched v User defined name servers Cee snout be
370. nternal interface and vice versa When the static routes are changed it can easily happen that the configuration of the targets is not adjusted properly The targets for the connectivity check should be well thought out Without a connectivity check just two errors can lead to a network lobotomy A network lobotomy is prevented when the targets for both mGuards are identical and all targets have to answer the request However a disadvantage of this method is that the connectivity check fails more often when one of the targets is not readily available In Router network mode we recommend defining a readily available device as the target on the external interface This can be the default gateway for the redundant pair e g a virtual router comprised of two independent devices In this case either no targets or a selection of targets should be defined on the internal interface Please also note the following information when using a virtual router comprised of two devices as the default gateway for a redundant pair If these devices use VRRP to synchronize their virtual IP then a network lobotomy could split the virtual IP of this router into two identical copies These routers could use a dynamic routing protocol and only one may be selected for the data flows of the network which is monitored by the mGuard Only this router should keep the virtual IP Otherwise you can define targets which are accessible via this route in the connectivity
371. ntly considered The upper limit of the Fail over switching time does not apply to connections which are encapsulated with TCP Connections of this type are interrupted for a prolonged period during a fail over The encapsulated TCP connections must be established again by the initiating side after each fail over If the fail over occurred on the initiating side then you can start immediately after the transfer However if the fail over occurred on the answering side then the initiator must first detect the interruption and then establish the connection again VPN redundancy supports masquerading in the same way as without VPN redundancy This applies when a redundant pair is masked by a NAT gateway with a dynamic IP address For example a redundant pair can be hidden behind a DSL router which masks the redundant pair with an official IP address This DSL router forwards the IPsec data traffic IKE and ESP UDP ports 500 and 4500 to the virtual IP addresses If the dynamic IP address changes then all active VPN connections which run over the NAT gateway are established again The connections are established again by Dead Peer Detection DPD with the configured time This effect is outside the influence of the mGuard The redundancy function on the mGuard does not support path redundancy Path redundancy can be reached using other methods e g through a router pair This router pair is seen on the virtual side of the mGuards w
372. nts for VPN redundancy csceeesceeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeteneees 7 18 7 2 6 Handling VPN redundancy in extreme situations 1 0 0 eee 7 18 7 2 7 Interaction with other devices oo eeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeeenaeeeeenneerenaeees 7 20 7 2 8 Transmission rate in VPN redundancy eeeeeseeeestreeeeneeeeeneeees 7 22 7 2 9 Limits of VPN redundancy ceeesceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeseeeeeeneteeeaees 7 23 7 3 Ring Network Coupling cceeceesceseseeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeceeeseaeeesaeseaeesaeeseaeeseaeeeeeeaas 7 26 8 Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware 0 cceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeel 8 1 8 1 Performing a restart ce c cc isescecescdecgsaueetancetupeceageasceeescsednedettesedqes sagcanageaceuyaeeerteeee 8 1 8 2 Performing a recovery PrOCOCUIC eeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeenneeeesneeetenaeeeeneeeeenaeeeees 8 2 8 3 Flashing the firmware rescue procedure ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeneeteteeeeeeenatens 8 3 8 3 1 Installing the DHCP and TFTP server ccesceeeseeseeseeeeeneeseeeeeaeeeaeee 8 9 97 MIO SSA caches eee ac Seed ek cad a cae cater eet a ae a Scan aes ioe an 9 1 10 gt Technical Data anea aaa Aaa a Aaa D tor N Aea OTEA EA tenes iatna seed iSi 10 1 10 1 MGUard rs4000 rs2000 0 eee eeceeece cence eeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeeaeesneeeeaeeseaeeeaeesiaeeeaeeeeaeen 10 1 10 2 mMGuard CenterpOrt i cci ci a a Ghai a Haein edited eee 10 2 10 3 mGuard industrial 1S oo eee cece eee cence
373. o CARP announcements from another mGuard Wed Oct 28 15 49 20 CEST 2011 Connectivity Check External Interface The check is successful Wed Nov 9 11 59 06 CET 2011 Connectivity Check Internal Interface The check is successful Wed Oct 28 15 49 17 CEST 2011 Phrase Swap Controller Availability Check s Phrase The configured phrase is in use Wed Oct 26 15 49 20 CEST 2011 Phrase Swap Controller Phrase of the Encrypted State Synchronization The configured phrase is in use Wed Oct 26 15 49 19 CEST 2011 State Replication Connection Tracking Table The database is up to date Wed Nov 9 11 59 13 CET 2011 State Replication IPsec VPN Connections The database is up to date Wed Nov 9 11 59 13 CET 2011 Virtual Interface Controller Virtual Interface s Forwarding of traffic is allowed Wed Nov 9 11 59 06 CET 2011 State History i ening ieee ee t s Wed Nov 9 11 59 13 CET 2011 Additionally the mGuard waits for a restarting component active ae The mGuard is actively fe fing and filtering network traffic t s u Wed Nov 9 11 59 06 CET 2011 active Te abana 5 forming aad tiled ffi t s u Wed Nov 9 11 59 06 CET 2011 Secs ae en t s u Wed Nov 9 11 59 08 CET 2011 on_standby f penere ie on atouse t s u Wed Nov 9 11 59 06 CET 2011 outdated The mG ka eaid firewall or VPN state inf ich it Ga Din t s u Wed Nov 9 11 59 08 CET 2011 faulty F f The mGuard does not yet have proper connectivity or cannot determine it for sure aie
374. o PPPoE under the Network gt gt Interfaces General menu and the Automatic Reconnect is set to Yes see 6 4 1 Network gt gt Interfaces Network Mode Router Router Mode PPPoE on page 6 82 Acceptance of certificates when the system time has not yet been synchronized This is the case when the Wait for synchronization of the system time setting is selected under the Authentication gt gt RADIUS Servers Certificate settings menu for the Check the validity period of certificates and CRLs option see Chapter 6 5 4 and Certificate settings on page 6 129 CIFS Integrity Checking The regular automatic check of the network drives is only started when the mGuard has a valid date and time see the following section The system time can be set or synchronized by various events The mGuard possesses an installed clock which is synchronized with the current time at least once The mGuard only has a clock when the Hardware clock state option is visible The display shows whether the clock is synchronized A synchro nized installed clock ensures that the mGuard has a synchronized system time even after rebooting The administrator has defined the current time for the mGuard run time by making a relevant entry under Local system time The administrator has set the Time stamp in filesystem to Yes and has either transmitted the current system time to the mGuard by NTP see below under NTP Server or has entered it under L
375. ocal system time The system time of the mGuard is then synchronized using the time stamp after rebooting even if it has no installed clock and is set exactly again afterwards using NTP The administrator has activated NTP time synchronization under NTP Server has entered the address of at least one NTP server and the mGuard has opened connections with at least one of the defined NTP servers If the network is working correctly then this occurs seconds after rebooting The display in the NTP State field may only change to synchronized much later see the explanation below under NTP State 6 8 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Time and Date continued Hardware clock state Local system time Timezone in POSIX 1 notation Timestamp in filesystem 2h granularity Yes No On mGuard industrial rs mGuard delta and mGuard smar but not on mGuard smart The state of the installed clock is only visible when the mGuard possesses a clock that also runs when the system is turned off or has no power supply The display shows if the clock has been synchronized with the current time The in stalled clock is only synchronized when the system time of the mGuard is synchronized Once the clock has been synchro nized its state only returns to not synchronized if the firm ware is reinstalled on the device see Chapter 8 3 Flashing the firmware rescue proce
376. odem see External Modem on page 6 97 Country The country where the mGuard with built in modem is oper ated must be entered here This ensures that the built in modem works according to the valid remote access guide lines in the respective country and that it recognizes and uses dial tones correctly for example Extension line Yes No regarding dial tone When No is selected the mGuard waits for the dial tone when the telephone network is accessed and the mGuard is calling the remote peer When Yes is selected the mGuard does not wait for a dial tone Instead it begins dialing the remote peer immediately This procedure may be necessary when the installed mGuard modem is connected to a private extension that does not emit a dial tone when it is picked up When a specific number must be dialed to access an external line e g O then this should be added to the beginning of the telephone number Speaker volume built in speaker Speaker control These settings define which sounds are emitted by the mGuard speakers and at which volume 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 101 mGuard 7 4 Additionally for mGuard industrial rs with built in modem ISDN For mGuard industrial rs with built in ISDN terminal adapter External Modem Hardware handshake RTSICTS Baudrate 57600 Handle modem transparently for dial in only Modem init sting d dATH OK Built in Modem ISDN
377. of times a configuration profile is ignored 2 after it was rolled back Download timeout seconds 120 Login anonymous Password eeccccese Server Certificate The server s certificate is needed here if and only if itis No Certificate installed self signed Otherwise the root certificate of the CA Durchsuchen i which issued the server s Duchauchen certificate must be installed GESA S The mGuard can retrieve new configuration profiles from a HTTPS server in configurable time intervals provided that the server makes them available as files for the mGuard file ending atv When a new mGuard configuration differs from the current configuration it will be downloaded and activated automatically Management gt gt Central Management gt gt Configuration Pull Configuration Pull Pull Schedule Enter here if and if so when and at what intervals the mGuard should attempt to download and apply a new config uration from the server To do this open the selection list and select the desired value A new text field opens when Time Schedule is selected In this field enter whether the new configuration should be downloaded daily or repeatedly on a certain weekday and at which time The time controlled download of a new configuration can only be made after synchronization of the system time see Management gt gt System Settings on page 6 4 Time and Date on page 6 7 Time control sets the selecte
378. og ID Packet filters Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Incoming Rules menu Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Outgoing Rules menu Log ID fw incoming or fw outgoing Firewall rules for VPN connections IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt Firewall menu Incoming Outgoing Log ID vpn fw in or vpn fw out Firewall rules for web access through mGuard via HTTPS Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access menu Log ID fw https access Firewall rules for web access through mGuard via SNMP Management gt gt SNMP gt gt Query menu Log ID fw snmp access Firewall rules for SSH remote access to the mGuard Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access menu Log ID fw ssh access Firewall rules for the user firewall Network Security gt gt User Firewall menu Firewall rules Log ID ufw Rules for NAT port forwarding Network gt gt NAT gt gt IP and port forwarding menu Log ID fw port forwarding Firewall rules for serial port Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial in menu Incoming Rules Log ID fw serial incoming Outgoing Rules Log ID fw serial outgoing 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 243 mGuard 7 4 General messages When activating a configuration profile on a blade When retrieving a configuration profile from a blade Searching for firewall rules on the basis of a network security log If the Network Security
379. on page 6 84 1 Modem Built in Modem is not available with all mGuard models see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 63 mGuard 7 4 Stealth default setting on mGuard rs4000 rs2000 mGuard indusirial rs mGuard smart mGuard pci EAGLE mGuard Stealth mode is used to protect a single computer or local network with the mGuard Important If the mGuard is in the Stealth network mode it is inserted into the existing network see illustration without changing the existing network configuration of the connected devices Before Ch Ch Ch Se lt gt ape ngi Wo y e TERR 8 eps 1a s gop A LAN can also ey uae be on the left After C E rpa aaa m g The mGuard will analyze the network traffic passing through it and configure its network connection accordingly It will then operate transparently i e without the computers having to be reconfigured As in the other modes firewall and VPN security functions are available Externally delivered DHCP data is passed through to the connected computer If the mGuard provides services such as VPN DNS NTP etc a firewall installed on the computer must be configured to allow ICMP Echo Requests ping e oe In Stealth mode the mGuard uses 1 1 1 1 as its internal IP address This is accessible when the configured default gateway of the computer is also accessible
380. on functioning configuration contains an instruction to perform a rollback if a newly loaded configuration profile is defective according to the check procedure detailed above When the mGuard attempts to retrieve a new configuration profile periodically after the time defined in Pull Schedule and Time Schedule it will only accept the profile ac cording to the following selection criterion The configuration profile provided must differ from the configuration profile identified as defective that led to the rollback The mGuard checks the MD5 total of the old defective and rejected configuration against the MD5 total of the new configuration profile offered If this selection criterion is fulfilled i e a newer configuration profile is offered the mGuard gets this configuration profile enforces it and checks it according to the procedure detailed above It also disables it if the rollback check is negative If the selection criterion is not fulfilled i e the same configuration profile is being offered the selection criterion remains in force for all additional periodic requests for the period defined in the Number of times field If the defined number of times expires without a change of the configuration profile on the server the mGuard enforces the unchanged new defective configuration profile once more despite it being defective This is to rule out the possibility that external factors e g network outage cau
381. on page 6 182 and this hostname is registered with a DynDNS Service then the mGuard can check the DynDNS at regular intervals for whether any changes have occurred If so the VPN connection will be setup to the new IP address Refresh Interval sec Default 300 6 180 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 8 2 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections Requirements for a VPN connection The main requirement for a VPN connection is that the IP addresses of the VPN partners are known and accessible mGuards delivered in Stealth network mode are preset to the multiple clients stealth configuration In this mode a management IP address and a default gateway must be configured in order to use VPN connections see page 6 70 Alternatively you can select a different stealth configuration not multiple clients or use another network mode In order for an IPsec connection to be setup successfully the VPN remote peer must support IPsec with the following configuration Authentication via Pre Shared Key PSK or X 509 certificate ESP Diffie Hellman Groups 2 and 5 DES 3DES or AES encryption MD5 SHA 1 or SHA 2 hash algorithms Tunnel or Transport Mode Quick Mode Main Mode SA Lifetime 1 second to 24 hours If the remote peer system is running Windows 2000 the Microsoft Windows 2000 High Encryption Pack or at least Service Pack 2 must be installed Ifthe remote peer is beh
382. ons gt gt Edit gt gt General Options A descriptive name for You can name or rename the connection as desired If sev the connection eral connection channels are defined below under Transport and Tunnel Settings then this name applies to the whole set of VPN connection channels summarized under this name Similarities between VPN connection channels Same authentication procedure as defined under the Authentication tab page see Authentication on page 6 195 Same firewall settings Same IKE option settings Enabled Yes No Defines whether the VPN connection channels should be completely active Yes or not No Address of the remote An IP address hostname or any for several remote peers site s VPN gateway or remote peers behind a NAT router 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 183 mGuard 7 4 rs ee oe oe Address of the remote site s VPN gateway aoe iS oie Jg VPN gateway of remote peer Internet Fig 6 3 The address of the gateway to the private network where the remote communication partner can be found Ifthe mGuard should actively initiate and set up the connection to the remote peer enter the IP address or the hostname of the remote peer here Ifthe remote peer VPN gateway does not have a fixed and known IP address you can use the DynDNS Service see glossary to simulate a fixed and known address Ifthe mGuard should be ready to accept a connection that wa
383. operation with a direct voltage of 9 V DC to 36 V DC SELV max 0 5 A Therefore power supply and signal contact connectors may only be connected with SELV circuits with voltage restrictions in accordance with EN 60950 1 The supply voltage is connected via a terminal block with a screw mechanism which is located on the top of the device Supply voltage P1 P2 24V 0V 24V OV pe DODD P1 P2 Modem Fault 2 amp Supply voltage NEC Class 2 power source 12 V DC or 24 V DC 25 33 safety extra low voltage SELV PELV decoupled redundant entries Maximum5A Min 10 ms buffer time at 24 V DC Redundant power supply Redundant power supplies are supported Both inputs are decoupled There is no load distribution With a redundant supply only the power supply unit with the higher output voltage supplies the mGuard industrial rs The supply voltage is electrically isolated from the housing In case of a non redundant voltage supply the mGuard industrial rs indicates the failure of the supply voltage over the signal contact You can prevent this signal by connecting the supply voltage to both inputs 4 14 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup 4 5 3 Connecting to the network WARNING Only connect the mGuard network ports to LAN installations Use cables with bend relief sleeves for the connectors when setting up the network connections Cover unu
384. or server The password that the mGuard queries from the server authentication Subsequent fields mGuard only allows the connection when the server provides the agreed password See under If None is selected as authentication on page 6 89 If None is selected In this case all fields that relate to PAP or CHAP are hidden as authentication 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 89 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial out continued Only the fields that define further settings remain visible Authentication None w Dialon demand Yes wv idle timeout Yes v idle time seconds 300 LocaliP 0 0 0 0 Remote IP 0 0 0 0 Netmask 0 0 0 0 Other shared settings Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt Dial out PPP options dial out Dial on demand Yes No For both Yes and No The telephone connection is always made by the mGuard Yes default This setting is useful for telephone connections where costs are calculated according to connection length The mGuard only commands the modem to establish a telephone connection when network packets are to be transferred It also instructs the modem to terminate the telephone connection as soon as no more network packets are to be transferred for a specific time see value in dle timeout By doing this the mGuard is not constantly available externally i e for incoming data packets 6 90 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network
385. ort Report The check report is found here It can be downloaded using the Download the report button UNC notation of the Servername drive imported share Start of the last check Weekday month day HH MM SS UTC The actual local time may be different from this time Example The standard time in Germany is Central European Time CET which is UTC plus one hour Central European Summer Time applies in summer which is UTC plus two hours 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 165 mGuard 7 4 CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status gt gt Display gt gt Status continued Duration of the Check duration in hours and minutes last check Only shown when a check has been made Start of the current See Start of the last check on page 6 165 check Only shown when a check has been made Progress of the Only shown when a check is currently active current check CIFS Integrity Monitoring CIFS Integrity Status pc x7 scan Status Actions Possible Actions for pc x7 scan os eee check report en A now Cancel the currently running integrity check Re Build the integrity database Perform this ifthe checked Please note This will erase an already existing integrity database shares contenthasbeen 7 changed intentionally Cancel the creation of the integrity database jesse note Unless appointed otherwise the creation will be started at the time of the next regular check Erase report
386. ote network This defines which type of address rewriting is performed for the source address of the received packets and the destination address of the sent packets Default Off 1 to 1 NAT Remote NAT Remote NAT for IPsec tunnel connections TIRA Network address for remote 1 to 1 NAT 192 168 2 1 With 1 to 1 NAT the IP addresses of the remote devices are exchanged so that every individual address is exchanged with a specific other address and not exchanged with an identical IP address for all devices as in IP masquerading When local devices send data packets only those packets are considered which the mGuard actually encrypts the mGuard only forwards packets via the VPN tunnel if they come from a trustworthy source whose source address is within the network defined under Local NAT under Local on page 6 187 under 1 to 1 NAT or under Local masquerading or whose source address is within the local network if no Local NAT is defined whose destination address belongs to the Network address for remote 1 to 1 NAT when the netmask from the Remote network is used on it The data packets are given a corresponding destination address from the network set under Remote see Remote on page 6 187 If necessary the source address is also replaced see Local NAT Then the data packets are sent via the VPN tunnel The source address of the packets that the mGuard receives via the VPN tunnel ar
387. ou enter under Destination You can configure multiple ping probes for different destinations Success failure A ping probe is successful if the mGuard receives a positive response to the outgoing ping request packet within 4 seconds If the response is positive the remote peer can be reached 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 75 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General continued Secondary External Interface continued Probe Interval seconds Ping types IKE Ping Determines whether a VPN gateway can be reached at the IP address entered ICMP Ping Determines whether a device can be reached at the IP address entered This is the most common ping probe However the response to this ping probe is switched off on some devices so that they do not respond even though they can be reached DNS Ping Determines whether a functioning DNS server can be reached at the IP address entered A generic request is sent to the DNS server with the specified IP address and every DNS server that can be reached responds to this request Please note the following when programming ping probes It makes sense to program multiple ping probes This is because it is possible that an individual probed service is currently undergoing maintenance In such a case the result should not be that a secondary external interface is activated and a cost incurring dial connection over the telephone network is set up
388. ould not be blocked Enable TCP UDP ICMP When this option is set to Yes the mGuard performs various consistency checks checks for wrong checksums packet sizes etc and drops packets failing the check This menu item is not included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 The factory default for this option is Yes 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 147 mGuard 7 4 Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Advanced continued Allow TCP keepalive packets without TCP flags Network Modes ICMP via primary Router PPTP PPPoE external interface for the mGuard ICMP via secondary external interface for the mGuard Stealth Mode Allow forwarding of GVRP frames Allow forwarding of STP frames TCP packets without set flags in their TCP header are normally rejected by firewalls At least one type of Siemens control with older firmware sends TCP keepalive packets without set TCP flags which are then rejected as invalid by the mGuard The Yes setting allows the forwarding of TCP packets where no TCP flags are set in the header This only applies when TCP packets of this type are sent within an existing TCP connection with a regular structure TCP packets without TCP flags do not result in a new entry in the connection table see Connection Tracking on page 6 149 If the connection is established when the mGuard is restarted then corresponding packets are still rejected and connection problems are observed
389. oved to a separate VLAN Switches must be used which allow separation of the VLANs Dedicated interface The mGuard centerport supports a Dedicated Interface This is a reserved direct Ethernet interface or a dedicated LAN segment through which the state synchronization is sent In this way the load is physically separated from the internal LAN segment X 509 certificates for SSH clients The mGuard supports the authentication of SSH clients using X 509 certificates It is sufficient to configure CA certificates that are required for the establishment and validity check of a certificate chain This certificate chain must exist between the CA certificate on the mGuard and the X 509 certificate shown to the SSH client see Shell Access on page 6 11 If the validity period of the client certificate is checked by the mGuard see Certificate settings on page 6 129 then new CA certificates must be configured on the mGuard at some point This must take place before the SSH clients use their new client certificates If the CRL check is activated under Authentication gt gt Certificates gt gt Certificate settings then one URL per CA certificate must be maintained where the corresponding CRL is available The URL and CRL must be published before the mGuard uses the CA certificates in order to confirm the validity of the certificates displayed by the VPN partners 7 12 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy 7 1 9
390. ow the defined temperature range only mGuard centerport and mGuard smart CPU Temperature C A SNMP trap is sent if the temperature exceeds or falls below the defined temperature range 6 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Host continued System DNS Hostname Hostname mode You can assign a name to the mGuard using the Hostname mode and Hostname fields For example this is then displayed when logging in via SSH see Management gt gt System Set tings on page 6 4 Shell Access on page 6 11 Assigning names simplifies the administration of several mGuards User defined from field below Default The name entered in the Hostname field is assigned to the mGuard If the mGuard is running in Stealth mode the User defined option must be selected under Hostname mode Provider defined e g via DHCP If the selected network mode permits external setting of the hostname e g via DHCP the mGuard is assigned the name received from the provider Hostname If the User defined option is selected under Hostname mode enter the name that should be assigned to the mGuard here Otherwise the entry in this field will be ignored i e if the Provider defined option e g via DHCP is selected under Hostname mode Domain search path This option makes it easier for the user to specify a domain name If the user enters t
391. pages see Management gt gt Web Settings on page 6 21 Optional button Has the same functions as the Apply button but is valid for all pages This button can only be seen at the top of the page if the validity range of the Apply button is set to Include all pages see Management gt gt Web Settings on page 6 21 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 3 mGuard 7 4 6 2 Management menu For security reasons we recommend that you change the default Root and Administrator passwords during the first configuration see Authentication gt gt Administrative Users on page 6 117 You will be informed of this as long as passwords are left unchanged 6 2 1 Management gt gt System Settings 6 2 1 1 Host Host Signal Contact Time and Date lt Shell Access System Uptime 4 min Power supply 1 2 ok failure System Temperature C min 0 C current 29 2 C max 60 ph System DNS Hostname Hostname mode User defined from field below w Hostname mguard Domain search path example local SNMP Information System Name Location Contact Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Host System Uptime Current system running time since the last reboot only mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs EAGLE mGuard mGuard rs4000 rs2000 Power supply 1 2 State of both power supply units not for mGuard rs2000 Temperature C An SNMP trap is sent if the temperature exceeds or falls bel
392. pem or crt is saved on the connected computer Proceed as follows e Click on Browse to select the file e Click on Import After the import the installed certificate can be seen under Certificate Remember to save the imported certificate along with the other entries by clicking on Apply Shortname During the CA certificate import process the CN attribute from the certificate subject field is suggested as the short name providing the shortname field is empty at this point This name can be adopted or another name can be chosen e Name entry whether the suggested one or another is mandatory The names must be unique meaning they must not be used more than once 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 133 mGuard 7 4 Use of the short name During the configuration of SSH Management gt gt System Settings menu Shell access HTTPS Management gt gt Web Settings menu Access and VPN connections Psec VPN gt gt Connections menu the imported certificates in the mGuard are given as a selection list The certificates are displayed under the short name entered for each individual certificate on this page For this reason the entry of a name is necessary Creating a certificate copy You can make a copy of the imported CA certificate To do this proceed as follows e Click on the Current Certificate File button on the CA certificate next to the Download Certificate row title Mak
393. piel Lieferant C DE Validity From Mar 20 18 37 57 2007 GMT to Mar 20 18 37 57 2010 GMT m Fingerprint MDS 17 DC 51 54 98 88 BC 13 63 A9 89 F2 63 0B 18 32 SHA1 AF DC D1 F6 18 CD A7 6F 25 B5 1A 54 2D FE 95 AA 1E 6B 8E 29 Shortname VPN Endpunkt Kundendienst KS Upload PKCS 12_ Filename Durchsuchen Password s Downes contente Subject CN VPN Endpunkt Kundendienst L MA O BeispielLieferant C DE W Subject Alternative Names Issuer CN VPN SubCA 01 0 BeispielLieferant C DE Validity From Mar 20 18 37 55 2007 GMT to Mar 20 18 37 55 2010 GMT Fingerprint MDS 8 A1 17 55 4A BF B4 CA DB 54 7C BD 75 AB A3 EB a SHA1 64 BD 83 0B 11 77 02 43 DD C4 1A 68 DF 52 33 DD BD 07 0E AB Shortname VPN Endpunkt Kundendienst MA Upload PKCS 12 Filename Durchsuchen Password Con et Authentication gt gt Certificates gt gt Machine Certificates Machine Certificates Shows the currently imported X 509 certificates that the mGuard uses to authenticate itself to remote peers e g other VPN gateways 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 131 mGuard 7 4 To import a new certificate please proceed as follows Importing a new Requirement machine certificate The PKCS 12 file format p12 or pfx is saved on the connected computer Proceed as follows e Click on Browse to select the file e Enter the password that is used for protection of the PKCS 12 file private key in the Password field e Click on Import
394. ply is the same size Table 7 2 shows the maximum frequency at which the presence notifications CARP are sent from the active mGuard It also shows the bandwidth used in the process The frequency depends on the mGuard priority and the Fail over switching time 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 5 mGuard 7 4 Table 7 2 also shows the maximum latency period tolerated by the mGuard for the network used for transmitting the presence notifications CARP If this latency period is exceeded then the redundant pair can exhibit undefined behavior Table 7 2 Frequency of the presence notifications CARP Fail over Presence notifications CARP Maximum Bandwidth on switching per second latency layer 2 for the time High priority Low priority period high priority 1s 50 per second 25 per second 20 ms 37 600 bit s 3s 16 6 per second 8 3 per second 60 ms 12 533 bit s 10s 5 per second 2 5 per second 200 ms 3 760 bit s 7 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy 7 1 6 Error compensation through firewall redundancy Firewall redundancy is used to compensate for hardware failures A Primary mGuard mee 3 2 Internal Network External Network 4 mle i O Secondary mGuard Fig 7 2 Possible error locations 1 to 8 Fig 7 2 shows a diagram containing various error locations not connected to the network mode Each of the mGuards in a redun
395. procedure see Performing a recovery procedure on page 8 2 or contact the support department WAN LAN Green Onor flashing Ethernet status Shows the status of the LAN and WAN interfaces As soon as the device is connected the LEDs are illuminated continuously to indi cate the presence of a network connection The LEDs are extinguished briefly when data packets are transferred WAN Green Various LED Recovery mode After pressing the Rescue button Red uminatoni codes See Restarting the Recovery Procedure and Flashing Firmware on LAN Green page 8 1 3 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Control Elements and Displays 3 7 Power supply 1 p1 Power supply 2 p2 Link Status Data 1 LAN Link Status Data 2 WAN Rescue button USB Serial V 24 Fig 3 8 EAGLE mGuard Serial V 24 Ethernet LAN Grounding connection Control elements and displays on EAGLE mGuard Table 3 7 Displays on EAGLE mGuard LEDs State Meaning p1 p2 Green Power supply 1 or 2 is active STATUS Green flashing The mGuard is booting Green The mGuard is ready FAULT Red The signal contact is open due to an error see Installing the EAGLE mGuard on page 4 24 under Signal contact on page 4 17 LS DA 1 2 Green Link detected v 24 Yellow flashing Data transfer 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 3 7 mGuard 7 4 3 8 mGuard delta
396. r a aeaa e deat te 6 250 7 Red ndaNCY e waisted beta a teenie aa a aa ia a a Neigh douse vote btecgawatauguccanuedergedewemuecpaeege 7 1 7 1 Firewall redu dan y sisisi iieiea riaan apai aoia a iaaii 7 1 7 1 1 Components in firewall redundancy 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeeeeneeteaee 7 2 7 1 2 Interaction of the firewall redundancy component eeseeeeee 7 4 7 1 3 Accepting the firewall redundancy settings from previous versions 7 4 7 1 4 Requirements for firewall redundancy ceeeseeeseeeeeeneeteeneeeeeneeeees 7 4 7 1 5 Fail over Switching tiIMe 20 eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeenneeeeeneeeeeaeeeneaeeeeeneeeeeeeees 7 5 7 1 6 Error compensation through firewall redundancy ceeseeeeeeeees 7 7 7 1 7 Handling firewall redundancy in extreme situations eee 7 8 7 1 8 Interaction with other devices oo eeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeenaeerenaeees 7 10 7 1 9 Transmission rate in firewall redundancy secese 7 13 7 1 10 Limits of firewall redundancy eee eeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeereeees 7 14 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE iii mGuard 7 4 7 2 VPN redundancy acccciieii end ae eevee 7 15 7 2 1 Components in VPN redundancy eccceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeaeeeneeen 7 15 7 2 2 Interaction of the VPN redundancy component ieee 7 16 7 2 3 Error compensation through VPN redundancy sses 7 16 7 2 4 Setting the variables for VPN redundancy ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 7 17 7 2 5 Requireme
397. r connection to the Internet PPTP Login The user name Login that is required by your Internet Service Provider when you set up a connection to the Internet PPTP Password The password that is required by your ISP when you setup a connection to the Internet Local IP Mode Via DHCP If the address data for access to the PPTP server is supplied by the Internet Service Provider via DHCP select Via DHCP You then do not need to make an entry in the Local IP field Static from field below If the address data for access to the PPTP server is not supplied by the Internet Service Provider via DHCP then the local IP address must be entered Local IP The IP address where the mGuard can be accessed by the PPTP server Modem IP The address of the PPTP server at the Internet Service Provider See Internal Networks on page 6 78 See Secondary External Interface on page 6 71 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 83 mGuard 7 4 Network Mode Router Router Mode Modem Built in Modem Only for mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta Network Interfaces General Ethernet Dial out Dial in Modem Console Network Status External IP address 172 16 66 49 Active Defaultroute 172 16 65 18 Used DNS servers 10 1 0 253 Network Mode Network Mode Router w Router Mode Modem w Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General Router network mode Modem Built
398. r the origin of the CRL under the CRL tab page see CRL on page 6 137 If CRL checking is activated but the CRL download is set to Never then the CRL must be manually loaded on the mGuard so that CRL checking can be performed 6 130 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 5 4 2 Machine Certificates The mGuard authenticates itself to the remote peer using a machine certificate loaded in the mGuard The machine certificate is the passport of an mGuard with which it can authenticate itself to the respective remote peer For more details see Authentication gt gt Certificates on page 6 124 By importing a PKCS 12 file the mGuard obtains a private key and the corresponding machine certificate Several PKCS 12 files can be loaded into the mGuard The mGuard can then show the remote peer a self signed certificate or certificate signed by the CA for different connections In order to use the installed machine certificate it must be referenced additionally during the configuration of applications SSH VPN so that it can be used for the respective connection or remote access type Example of imported machine certificates Authentication Certificates a Certificate settings Machine Certificates CA Certificates Remote Certificates CRL Machine Certificates 5 Eene Subject CN VPN Endpunkt Kundendienst L KS O Beispiel Lieferant C DE Subject Alternative Names Issuer CN VPN SubCA 01 O Beis
399. r to prevent an insufficient sequential number for the outgoing IPsec SA VPN redundancy adds a constant value to the sequential number for each outgoing IPsec SA before the mGuard is enabled This value is calculated so that it corresponds to the maximum number of data packets which can be sent through the VPN channel during the maximum fail over switching time In the worst case 1 GB Ethernet and switching time of 10 seconds this is 0 5 of an IPsec sequence At best this is only a per mill value Adding a constant value to the sequential number prevents the accidental reuse of a number which was already used by the other mGuard shortly before it failed Another effect is that ESP packets sent from the previously enabled mGuard are dropped by the VPN partner when new ESP packets are received earlier from the currently enabled mGuard To do this the latency period in the network must differ from the fail over switching time 7 18 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Redundancy An error interrupts the initial establishment of the ISAKMP SA or IPsec SA If an error interrupts the initial establishment of the ISAKMP SA or IPsec SA then the mGuard on standby can continue the process seamlessly as the state of the SA is replicated in parallel The response to an IKE message is only sent from the active mGuard after the mGuard on standby has confirmed the receipt of the corresponding update to the VPN state synchronization When an mGuard is enable
400. ral Ethernet Diaout Dialin Modem Console Secondary External Interface 172 16 66 49 172 16 66 18 10 1 0 253 Router v static ow OO OO OOOO nemas O useva viani x 172 16 66 49 255 255 255 0 No v P enmon D ateway 172 16 66 18 Hx 192 168 66 49 255 255 255 0 No v C off v Display only The addresses through which the mGuard can be accessed by devices from the external network They form the interface to other parts of the LAN or to the Internet If the transition to the Internet takes place here the IP addresses are usually designated by the Internet Service Provider ISP If an IP address is assigned dynamically to the mGuard you can find the currently valid IP address here In Stealth mode mGuard adopts the address of the connected local computer as its external IP Network Mode Status Displays the status of the selected network mode Active Defaultroute Used DNS servers Display only The IP address that the mGuard uses to try to reach unknown networks is displayed here This field can contain none if the mGuard is in Stealth mode Display only The name of the DNS servers used by the mGuard for name resolution are displayed here This infor mation can be useful for example if the mGuard is using the DNS servers designated to it by the Internet Service Provider 6 62 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt Interfaces gt gt General continued Netwo
401. rameters to the mGuard Phoenix Contact IP Assignment Tool Assign IP Address Attempting to Assign IP Address The wizard is attempting to Assign the specified IP Address Attempting to assign MAC Address beet fe 00 a0 45 04 08 a3 TF it has been more than a minute or two and the IP is still not assigned please try rebooting or power the following cycling your device IP Address 192 168 1 21 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Gateway 0 0 0 0 Once your device has received it s IP Address this wizard will automatically go to the next page Abbrechen Fig 5 4 Assign IP Address window The next window appears after the transfer is successful Step 6 Finishing the IP address assignment The following window indicates that the IP address assignment was successful An over view of which IP parameters were transmitted to the device with the displayed MAC ad dress is then shown To assign IP parameters for additional devices e Click on Back To end IP address assignment e Click on Finish When required the IP parameters set here can be changed in the mGuard web interface under Network gt gt Interfaces see page 6 85 5 8 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Preparing the Configuration 5 2 2 Configuring the mGuard at startup default Router mode After initial delivery resetting to the factory defaults or flashing the mGuard the mGuard is found on the LAN inte
402. rcumstances assign Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 an address such as 1 1 1 2 to the Default gateway 192 168 1 1 configuration system On the DOS level Start Programs Accessories Command Prompt enter the following arp S lt IP of the default gateway gt 00 aa aa aa aa aa Example You have determined or set the address of the default gateway as 192 168 1 1 The command should then be arp s 192 168 1 1 00 aa aa aa aa aa To proceed with the configuration establish the necessary configuration connection see Setting up a local configuration connection on page 5 12 After setting the configuration restore the original setting for the default gateway To do this either restart the configuration computer or enter the following command on the DOS level arp d Depending on the configuration of the mGuard it may then be necessary to change the network interface of the local computer or network accordingly 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 5 11 mGuard 7 4 Web based administrator interface If you have forgotten the configured address If the administrator website is not displayed 5 3 Setting up a local configuration connection The mGuard is configured using the web browser running on the configuration system e g Mozilla Firefox MS Internet Explorer Google Chrome or Apple Safari ATTENTION The web browser used must support SSL encryption i e HTTPS Depending on the model the mGuard is del
403. rd To use this option enter the desired user password once in each of the corresponding entry fields The factory default for this option is No If Yes is selected VPN connections can only be used after a user has logged into the mGuard via HTTP As long as authentication is required all HTTP traffic is redirected to the mGuard Changes to this option only become active after the next reboot User Password There is no factory default for the user password To set one enter the desired password twice once in each of the two entry fields 6 5 1 2 RADIUS Filters Authentication Administrative Users Passwords RADIUS Filters RADIUS Filters for Administrative Access gt x Group Filter ID Authorized for access as FE mGuard admin admin v mGuard audit audit v Here you can create group names for administrative users whose password is checked with a RADIUS server when they access the mGuard Each of these groups can be assigned an administrative role Authentication gt gt Administrative Users gt gt RADIUS Filters This menu item is not The mGuard only uses RADIUS servers to check passwords when you have activated included in the scope of the RADIUS authentication functions for the For shell access see menu Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access mGuard rs2000 For web access see menu Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access The RADIUS filters are searched consecut
404. rd 192 168 1 1 1 1 1 1 External IP 192 168 1 1 Fig 4 20 Power over PCI mode Stealth mode No driver software is installed in Power over PCl mode as the mGuard pci network card function is switched off A previously installed network card is connected to the LAN port of the mGuard pci and this network card is located on the same or on another computer see Hardware installation on page 4 32 In Stealth mode the IP address configured for the network interface of the operating system LAN port is also used by the mGuard for its WAN port By doing this the mGuard does not appear as an individual device with its own address for data traffic to and from the computer It is not possible to use PPPoE or PPTP in Stealth mode 4 30 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup Router mode in Power over PCI mode Network card 192 168 1 2 192 168 1 1 External IP Fig 4 21 Power over PCI mode Router mode If the mGuard is in Router mode or PPPoE or PPTP mode then the mGuard and the network card connected to its LAN socket installed on the same computer or on another one function as an individual network This means the following for the IP configuration of the network interface on the operating system of the computer on which the network card is installed This network interface must be assigned an IP address that is different to the internal IP address of the mGuard factory def
405. rd Limit The calculated value is then known as the Soft Limit This specifies the number of bytes which must be encrypted so that a new key is negotiated for the IPsec SA A further amount is subtracted when a Re key Fuzz see be low above 0 is entered This is a percentage of the re key margin The percentage is entered under Re key Fuzz The re key margin value must be lower than the Hard Limit It must be significantly lower when a Re key Fuzz is also added If the Psec SA Lifetime is reached earlier then the Soft Limit is ignored Maximum in percent by which Re key margin shall be ran domly increased This is used to delay key exchange on ma chines with many VPN connections Factory default 100 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 205 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt IKE Options Dead Peer Detection Keying tries 0 means unlimited tries Rekey Number of attempts to negotiate new keys with the remote peer The value 0 results in unlimited attempts for connections initiated by the mGuard otherwise it results in 5 Yes No When set to Yes the mGuard will try to negotiate a new key when the old one expires When the remote peer supports the Dead Peer Detection DPD protocol both partners can detect whether the IPsec connection is still valid or must be restored Delay between requests for a sign of life Timeout for absent sign of life after which peer is assumed dead
406. relevant rule record TCP UDP ICMP GRE All 0 0 0 0 0 means all IP addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 Only evaluated for TCP and UDP protocols any describes any selected port startport endport e g 110 120 defines a range of ports You can specify individual ports by giving either their port number or the corresponding service name e g 110 for pops or pops for 110 Accept means that data packets may pass through Reject means that the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been rejected In Stealth mode Reject has the same effect as Drop Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Name of rule records if defined Aside from Accept Reject and Drop the selection list also gives the names of previ ously defined rule records If a name is selected referred to then the rules in this set of rules are applied here If the rules from the applied set of rules cannot be used and put into effect with Accept Reject or Drop the rule processing continues with the rule following the one from which the set of rules was referred to Freely selectable comment for this rule For each individual firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be lo
407. renew its configu ration shortly before this time expires Otherwise it may be assigned to other computers Local netmask Defines the netmask of the computers The factory default is 255 255 255 0 Broadcast address Defines the broadcast address of the computers Default gateway Defines which IP address should be used by the computer as the default gateway Usually this is the internal IP address of the mGuard DNS server Address of the server used by computers to resolve host names to IP addresses over the domain name service DNS If the DNS service of the mGuard is used enter the internal IP address of the mGuard here 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 113 mGuard 7 4 Network gt gt DHCP gt gt Internal DHCP continued WINS server Static Mapping according to MAC address Address of the server used by computers to resolve host names to addresses over the Windows Internet Naming Ser vice WINS Find out the MAC address of your computer as follows Windows 95 98 ME e Start winipcfg in a DOS box Windows NT 2000 XP e Start ipconfig all in a prompt The MAC address is shown as Physical Address Linux e Call up sbin ifconfig or ip link show in a shell You have the following options The MAC address of the client computer without spaces or hyphens Client IP address Client IP address The static IP of the computer to be assigned to the MAC address Static assignments take prio
408. rface under the address 192 168 1 1 within the network 192 168 1 0 24 mGuard delta is found on the LAN interfaces 4 to 7 You may need to adjust the network configuration of your computer to access the configuration interface If you are using Windows XP Click on Start Control Panel Network Connections Right click on the icon of the LAN adapter so that the pop up menu appears Click on Properties Select the General tab page in the Properties of local network LAN connections dialog Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under This connection uses the following items Then click on Properties so that the following window is displayed Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 1 Subnet mask 25 25 25 0 Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server Fig 5 5 Internet protocol properties TCP IP First select Use the following IP address then enter the following addresses example IP address 192 168 1 2 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 192 168 1 1 Depending on the configuration of the mGuard it may then be necessary to change the ne
409. rface used for synchronizing the state to Dedicated Interface 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 15 mGuard 7 4 Establishing VPN connections In VPN redundancy the virtual network interface is used for an additional purpose to establish accept and operate the VPN connections The mGuard only listens to the first virtual IP address In Router network mode the mGuard listens to the first external and internal virtual IP address State monitoring State monitoring is used to monitor the state synchronization on both the VPN and firewall State display The state display shows additional detailed information on the state of the VPN state synchronization This is located directly next to the information for the firewall state synchronization As a side effect the state display of the VPN connection can also be seen on the mGuard on standby Therefore the replicated contents of the VPN state database can be found under the normal state display for the VPN connection under IPsec VPN gt gt IPsec Status Only the state of the synchronization is shown in the state display for firewall redundancy Redundancy gt gt FW Redundancy Status gt gt Redundancy Status 7 2 2 Interaction of the VPN redundancy components The individual components for VPN redundancy interact in the same way as described for firewall redundancy The VPN state synchronization is also controlled by state monitoring The state is maintained and updates are
410. rity over the dynamic IP address pool Static assignments and dynamic IP pool addresses must not overlap Do not use one IP address in several static assignments otherwise several MAC addresses are assigned to this IP address Only use one DHCP server per subnetwork B oe ee ee 6 114 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Network gt gt DHCP gt gt Internal DHCP continued DHCP mode Relay If the DHCP mode is set to Relay the following selection settings are displayed Network DHCP Internal DHCP External DHCP Mode DHCP mode Relay v DHCP Relay Options SOTET gt Append Relay Agent Information Option 2 Y DHCP Relay Options The Relay DHCP mode is not supported in Stealth mode If Stealth mode is in operation on the mGuard and Relay DHCP mode is selected then this setting is ignored However DHCP queries from the computer and the respective answers are forwarded due to the nature of Stealth mode DHCP Servers to A list of one or more DHCP servers where DHCP requests relay to should be forwarded Append Relay During forwarding additional information for the DHCP Agent Information server where forwarding is made can be added according to Option 82 RFC 3046 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 115 mGuard 7 4 6 4 5 Network gt gt Proxy Settings 6 4 5 1 HTTP S Proxy Settings HTTP S Proxy Settings HTTP S Proxy Settings Us
411. rk Mode Network Mode Stealth Router The mGuard must be set to the network mode that corre sponds to its connection to the network see also Typical Ap plication Scenarios on page 2 1 Depending on which network mode the mGuard is set to the page will change together with its configuration parameters See Stealth default setting on mGuard rs4000 rs2000 mGuard industrial rs mGuard smart mGuard pci EAGLE mGuard on page 6 64 and Network Mode Stealth on page 6 68 Router factory default for mGuard centerport mGuard blade controller mGuard delta on page 6 65 and Network Mode Router on page 6 78 Router Mode Only used when the Static DHCP PPPoE PPTP Modem Built in Modem Router network mode See ee is selected Router Mode static on page 6 66 and Network Mode Router Router Mode PPTP on page 6 83 Router Mode DHCP on page 6 66 and Network Mode Router Router Mode DHCP on page 6 81 Router Mode PPPoE on page 6 66 and Network Mode Router Router Mode PPPoE on page 6 82 Router Mode PPTP on page 6 66 and Network Mode Router Router Mode PPTP on page 6 83 Router Mode Modem on page 6 67 and Network Mode Router Router Mode Modem Built in Modem on page 6 84 Router Mode Built in Modem on page 6 67 and Network Mode Router Router Mode Modem Built in Modem
412. rnal modem is connected Settings for this are made further down under External Modem Baudrate Hardware handshake RTS CTS Serial console via USB only for mGuard smart does not apply to mGuard smart Hardware handshake RTS CTS Baudrate The transfer speed of the serial port is defined over the selection list Off On When set to On flow control through RTS and CTS signals is used Yes No When No is selected the mGuard smart uses the USB connection solely as a power supply When Yes is selected the mGuard smart provides an additional serial interface for the connected computer through the USB interface The serial interface can be accessed on the computer using a terminal program mGuard smart provides a console through the serial interface which can then be used in the terminal program Under Windows you need a special driver This can be downloaded directly from the mGuard The link for this is located on the right of the selection menu Serial console via USB Off On When set to On flow control through RTS and CTS signals is used during PPP connection Default 57600 Transfer speed for communication between mGuard and modem over the serial cable connection This should be set to the highest level supported by the mo dem If the value is set lower than the maximum possible for the modem the telephone connection will not work optimally 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 97
413. rtup on page 5 10 5 2 1 1 IP address 192 168 1 1 On devices delivered in Stealth mode the mGuard can be accessed via the LAN a interface under the address 192 168 1 1 within network 192 168 1 0 24 if one of the following circumstances applies The mGuard is set to the factory defaults as delivered The mGuard has been reset to the default settings through the web interface see Configuration Profiles on page 6 39 and restarted The rescue procedure flashing the mGuard or recovery procedure has been carried out see Chapter 8 You may need to adjust the network configuration of your computer to access the configuration interface If you are using Windows XP e Click on Start Control Panel Network Connections e Right click on the icon of the LAN adapter so that the pop up menu appears e Click on Properties e Select the General tab page in the Properties of local network LAN connections dialog e Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under This connection uses the following items 5 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Preparing the Configuration e Then click on Properties so that the following window is displayed Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings
414. rver 10 1 66 2 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Time and Date Time and Date Current system time Displays the current system time in Universal Time Coordi UTC nates UTC If NTP time synchronization is not yet acti vated see below and Time stamp in filesystem is deacti vated the clock will start at January 15t 2000 Current system time Display If the sometimes different current local time should local be displayed you must make the corresponding entry under Timezone in POSIX 1 notation see below System time state Display Displays whether the system time and run time of the mGuard have ever actually been synchronized with a valid time If the system time of the mGuard has not been syn chronized then the mGuard does not perform any time con trolled activities These are as follows 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 7 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Time and Date continued Time dependent activities Time controlled pick up of configuration from a configuration server This is the case when the Time Schedule setting is selected under the Management gt gt Central Management Configuration Pull menu for the Pull Schedule setting see Management gt gt Configuration Profiles on page 6 39 Configuration Pull on page 6 53 Interruption of the connection at a certain time using the PPPoE network mode This is the case when the Network Mode is set t
415. ry Not available Voltage range 9 to 36 V DC Typically 2 13 W 5 to 95 operation storage non condensing IP 20 20 C to 60 C operation 20 C to 70 C storage 130 x 45 x 114 mm to the mounting rail support 722 g TX TX Innominate recommends the use of the current firmware version and patch releases For scope of functions see relevant firmware data sheet 99 Mbit s bi directional IPsec IETF standard Up to 250 VPN tunnels DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 35 Mbit s bi directional 99 Mbit s bi directional IPsec IETF standard Up to 2 VPN tunnels DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 35 Mbit s bi directional Web GUI HTTPS Command Line Interface SSH SNMP v1 2 3 central Device Management Software LEDs Power 1 2 State Error Signal Fault Modem Info signal contacts service contacts log file remote Syslog mGuard rs4000 CE FCC UL 508 in preparation ANSI ISA 12 12 Class div 2 in preparation LEDs Power State Error Signal Fault Modem Info signal contacts service contacts log file remote Syslog mGuard rs2000 CE FCC UL 508 in preparation Real time clock Trusted Platform Module TPM temperature sensor mGuard Remote Services Portal ready 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 10 1 mGuard 7 4 10 2 Hardware properties Platform Network interfaces Other interfaces Drives High availability Power supply Power consumption
416. s The internal IP address in Stealth mode the Stealth Management IP Address or the Virtual IP must be located in the network that is entered as Internal network address for local 1 to 1 NAT Ifthe Enable 1 to 1 NAT of the remote network to another network option is set to Yes see 1 to 1 NAT on page 6 194 the following applies The IP address of the SysLog server must be located in the network that is entered as remote in the definition of the VPN connection 6 12 2 Logging gt gt Browse local logs 2011 10 26 _15 48 45 63338 2011 10 26 15 48 50 77241 2011 10 26_15 48 50 77251 2011 10 26_15 2011 10 26_15 48 50 79624 26_15 48 50 79689 26 15 48 50 80880 27_04 17 00 17574 45 66814 27_11 31 45 67108 2011 10 27_11 31 45 67138 2011 10 45 67154 2011 10 5 67175 2011 10 5 67319 2011 10 5 67553 011 10 5 67593 2011 10 7 17281 7 17361 7 17412 7 17464 7 17517 7 17561 7 17583 011 10 7 54001 2011 10 7 54021 2011 10 7 54395 2011 10 7 54415 2011 10 7 54515 2011 10 3 18334 2011 10 2011 10 27 2011 10 27_11 31 53 21377 eer 2011 10 27_11 31 53 21397 er 2011 10 27 11 31 53 21416 Common iv ham ssv INFO transitioned to state active ham vsr INFO terminating ham ssv NOTICE EOF from component ham ssv INFO transitioned to state active_waiting ham ssv NOTICE EOF from component ham vsr INFO ham vsr 2877 terminated ham fsr
417. s operated by machine control via the CMD contact mGuard industrial rs only the option for a user to view the log file of the mGuard using the web based user interface of the mGuard may not be available at all Ifthe mGuard is being used locally it can occur that a VPN connection error can only be diagnosed after the mGuard is temporarily disconnected from its power source which causes all the log entries to be deleted The relevant log entries of the mGuard that could be useful may be deleted because the mGuard regularly deletes older log entries on account of its limited memory space Ifan mGuard is being used as the central VPN remote peer e g in a remote main tenance center as the gateway for the VPN connections of numerous machines the messages on activities in the various VPN connections are logged in the same data flow The resulting volume of the logging makes it time consuming to find the infor mation relevant to one error After the archiving is enabled relevant log entries about the operations involved in setting up VPN connections are archived in the permanent memory of the mGuard if the connections are set up as follows Viathe CMD contact Via the CGI interface nph vpn cgi with the command synup see Application Note Diagnosis of VPN connections Application Notes are available in the download area of www innominate com Archived log entries survive reboots They can be download
418. s M1 to M12 Screws for installing the mGuard bladebase The mGuard delta also contains 1x5VDC power supply 2x UTP Ethernet cables 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 3 mGuard 7 4 4 3 Installing the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 4 3 1 Assembly disassembly Assembly The device is delivered in a ready to operate condition The following procedure is required for assembly and connection e Attach the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 onto a grounded 35 mm mounting rail according to DIN EN 60715 Ja wB Fig 4 1 Attaching the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 to a mounting rail e Attach the upper snap on guide of the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 to the mounting rail and press the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 down onto the rail until it locks into position Disassembly e Remove or disconnect the connections e To remove the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 from the mounting rail insert a screwdriver horizontally under the housing into the locking slide pull it downwards without tipping the screwdriver and lift the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 upwards 4 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup gt Operating a connected pushbutton Operating a connected on off switch 4 3 2 Connecting to the network WARNING Only connect the mGuard network ports to LAN installations Some communication connection points also use RJ45 sockets which must not be connected to the RJ45 sockets of the mGuard Connect the mGuard to the network For this you require a suitable UTP
419. s Subject A self signed certificate is one that is signed by the certificate owner and not by a CA In self signed certificates the name of the certificate owner is shown as both ssuer and Subject 6 124 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Certificate machine certificate Remote certificate CA certificates Self signed certificates are used when communication partners want to use the X 509 authentication procedure without having an official certificate This type of authentication should only be used between partners that know and trust each other well Otherwise from a security point of view such certificates are as worthless as a home made passport without the official stamp Certificates are shown to all communication partners users or machines during the connection process providing the X 509 authentication method is used In terms of mGuard this could relate to the following applications Authentication of communication partners during establishment of VPN connections see IPsec VPN gt gt Connections on page 6 181 Authentication on page 6 195 mGuard management using SSH shell access see Management gt gt System Settings on page 6 4 Shell Access on page 6 11 mGuard management using HTTPS see Management gt gt Web Settings on page 6 21 Access on page 6 22 Certificates can be used to identify authenticate oneself to others The certificate used by
420. s actively initiated and set up by a remote peer with any IP address enter any This setting should also be selected for VPN star configurations when the mGuard is connected to the control center The mGuard can then be called by a remote peer if this remote peer has been dynamically assigned its IP address by the ISP i e it has a changeable IP address In this scenario you may only enter an IP address when the remote peer has a fixed and known IP address any can only be used along with the authentication procedure using X 509 certificates If locally stored CA certificates are to be used to authenticate the remote peer the address of the remote peer s VPN gateway can be entered explicitly via IP address or hostname or via any If it is entered using an explicit address and not with any then a VPN identifier see VPN Identifier on page 6 198 must be specified any must be selected when the remote peer is located behind a NAT gateway Other wise the renegotiation of new connection keys will fail after the connection is established If TCP Encapsulation is used see TCP Encapsulation on page 6 177 A fixed IP address or a hostname must be entered if this mGuard is to initiate the VPN connection and encapsulate the VPN data traffic If this mGuard is installed before a maintenance center to which multiple remote mGuards set up VPN connections and send encapsulated data packets the r
421. s and the integrity database Pjease note Unless appointed otherwise the integrity database will be re created at the time of the next regular check CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status gt gt Display gt gt Actions Possible Actions for Verify the validity of By clicking Validate the report a check is made as to the recent check whether the report is unchanged from the definition in the report mGuard according to signature and certificate Start an integrity The integrity check is started by pressing Start a check check right now Only shown when a check is not currently active Cancel the currently The integrity check is stopped by pressing Cancel running integrity Only shown when a check is currently active check y y Re Build the integrity The mGuard creates a checksum database in order to check database whether the files have changed A change to executable files indicates a virus infection However when these files have been changed intentionally a new database must be created by pressing Initialize in order to prevent false alarms The creation of an integrity database is also recommended when network drives have been newly set up Otherwise an integrity database is set up during the first scheduled check instead of a check being made 6 166 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status gt gt Display gt gt Actions continu
422. s are lost then this can result in a longer switching time in the event of errors The mGuard on standby has an obsolete machine certificate It can occur that X 509 certificates and private keys used by a redundant pair have to be changed to identify itself as a VPN partner The combination of a private key and certificate is specified in the following machine certificate Each mGuard in a redundant pair must be reconfigured in order to switch the machine certificate Both mGuards also require the same certificate so that they appear as the same virtual VPN device to their VPN partners As each mGuard has to be reconfigured individually it can occur that the mGuard on standby has an obsolete machine certificate for a brief period If the mGuard on standby is enabled at the exact point where the ISAKMP SAs are established then this procedure cannot be continued with an obsolete machine certificate As a countermeasure the VPN state synchronization replicates the machine certificate from the active mGuard to the mGuard on standby In the event of a fail over the mGuard on standby will only use this to complete a previously started establishment of the ISAKMP SAs If the mGuard on standby establishes new ISAKMP SAs after a fail over then the existing configured machine certificate will be used 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 7 19 mGuard 7 4 Therefore the VPN state synchronization ensures that the currently used machine certificate
423. s are non sortable when the sequence of the data records contained within does not play any technical role It is then not possible to insert or move rows With such tables you can carry out the following actions Delete rows Append rows to the end of the table in order to create a new data record and settings e g user firewall templates The symbols for inserting a new table row are therefore different For inserting rows in Poneble tables Appending rows non sortable tables 1 Click on the arrow fa a to append a new row 2 The new row is appended under the existing table You can now enter or specify values in the row 6 2 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Buttons The following buttons are located at the top of every page Logout Reset Apply For logging out after configuration access to the mGuard If the user does not conduct a logout procedure the logout is automatically made when activities have stopped and the defined time limit has expired Renewed access is only granted after the login process has been repeated Optional button Resets data to the original values If you have entered values on a config uration page and these have not yet been applied Apply button you can restore the original values on the page by clicking the Reset button This button can only be seen at the top of the page if the validity range of the Apply button is set to Include all
424. s are replicated However it does not replicate the configuration itself The mGuard on standby has an obsolete Pre Shared Key PSK Pre Shared Keys PSK also need to be updated on occasion in order to authenticate VPN partners The redundant mGuards may then have a different PSK for a brief period In this case only one of the mGuards can establish a VPN connection as most VPN partners only accept one PSK No countermeasures exist here on the mGuard We therefore recommend using X 509 certificates instead of PSKs If the VPN state synchronization replicates the PSKs to the mGuard on standby for a prolonged period then this also hides an incorrect configuration during this period and is difficult to detect 7 2 7 Interaction with other devices Resolving host names If host names are configured as VPN gateways then the mGuards in a redundant pair must be able to resolve the host names for the same IP address This applies especially when DynDNS Monitoring is activated see Page 6 180 If the host names are resolved from the mGuard on standby to another IP address then the VPN connection to this host is interrupted following a fail over The VPN connection is established through another IP address This occurs directly after the fail over However a short delay may occur depending on what is entered under DynDNS Monitoring as a value for the Refresh Interval sec Obsolete IPsec replay window IPsec data traffic is prote
425. s corresponds to the first IP address of the address list The original destination port set in the incoming data packets Either the port number or the corresponding service name can be entered here e g pop3 for port 110 or http for port 80 This entry is irrelevant for the GRE protocol It is ignored by the mGuard The internal IP address to which the data packets should be forwarded The original destination address is overwritten with this address The port to which the data packets should be forwarded The original destination port will be overwritten with this port Either the port number or the corresponding service name can be entered here e g pop3 for port 110 or http for port 80 This entry is irrelevant for the GRE protocol It is ignored by the mGuard Freely selectable comment for this rule For each individual port forwarding rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 107 mGuard 7 4 6 4 3 Network gt gt DNS 6 4 3 1 DNS server DNS server DynDNS DNS Servers to query User defined servers listed below v User dened nae servers SS F 10 1 0 253 In Stealth Mode only User defined and DNS Root Servers are supported Other settings will be ignored Local Resolving of Hostnames F Yes v example local ED Network gt
426. s delivered in Stealth network mode in Chapter 5 2 1 from page 5 4 For devices delivered in Router network mode in Chapter 5 2 2 on page 5 9 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 5 3 mGuard 7 4 5 2 1 Configuring the mGuard at startup default Stealth mode During the initial startup of devices delivered in Stealth mode the mGuard is accessible under the following two addresses https 192 168 1 1 see page 5 4 https 1 1 1 1 see page 5 5 Alternatively an IP address can be assigned via BootP for example with IPAssign exe see Assigning IP addresses via BootP on page 5 6 The mGuard is accessed under https 192 168 1 1 when the external network interface is not connected on startup The mGuard can be accessed by computers under https 1 1 1 1 when these computers are connected directly or indirectly to the LAN port of the mGuard To do this the mGuard with LAN and WAN ports must be integrated into a functional network where the default gateway is accessible via the WAN port After access has been made under the address 192 168 1 1 and the login was successful 192 168 1 1 is set permanently as the management IP address 192 168 1 1 is no longer available as an access option after access has been made under the address 1 1 1 1 or following the assignment of an IP address via BootP For initial configuration of the mGuard pci see Configuring the mGuard pci at sta
427. s displayed in red This helps in tracking down the error Working with sortable tables Many settings are saved as data records Accordingly the adjustable parameters and their values are presented as table rows If several data records have been set e g firewall rules these will be queried or processed based on the entry sequence from top to bottom Therefore pay attention to the order of the entries if necessary The sequence can be changed by moving table rows upwards or downwards With tables you can carry out the following actions Insert rows sets up a new data record with settings e g the firewall rules for a specific connection Move rows sorts them to another location Delete rows deletes the entire data record Inserting rows cxu X 0 1 f 1 fo 2 0 fE 2 The new row is inserted You can now enter or specify values in the row 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 1 mGuard 7 4 Moving rows gt XE l XX fo 1 fo aa a fo 1 fi 2 fu 2 fu 3 fO 3 fO 3 cfo 2 o a fo a co a 1 Select the row s you want to move 2 Click on the arrow F where you want to move the selected rows to 3 The rows are moved Deleting rows Xf lt X so 1 so eo i sO 2 W E oo f 3 fr 3 OM fo 4 1 Select the rows you want to delete 2 Click on the symbol to delete the rows A 3 The rows are deleted Working with non sortable tables Table
428. s link cable Disassembly To remove the EAGLE mGuard from the mounting rail insert a screwdriver horizontally under the housing into the locking slide pull it downwards without tipping the screwdriver and lift the EAGLE mGuard upwards 4 26 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup 4 9 Connecting the mGuard delta WARNING The serial port DE 9 plug connection must not be connected directly to communication connection points Use a serial cable with a DE 9 connector to connect a serial terminal or a modem The serial cable can have a maximum length of 30 meters E Pe p e Console DC 5V 3A L i oe Serial console Ethernet LAN Ethernet WAN Reserved Power supply Connecting the mGuard delta Connect the power supply 5 V DC 3 A to the corresponding mGuard delta power socket Connect the local computer or network to one of the Ethernet LAN sockets 4 to 7 on the mGuard delta using a UTP CAT5 Ethernet cable 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 27 mGuard 7 4 Driver mode gt D Power over PCI mode 4 10 Installing the mGuard pci WARNING This is a Class A device which may cause radio interference in residential areas In this case the operator may be requested to take appropriate preventative measures WARNING Conditions of acceptability The device has been designed for PC installation in a secondary signal circuit As a re
429. schine 06 L L O Beispiel Lieferant C DE Subject Alternative Names issuer CN VPN SubCA 01 0 Beispiel Lieferant C DE Validity From Mar 20 18 38 09 2007 GMT to Mar 20 18 38 09 2010 GMT Fingerprint MDS 11 73 7D 98 89 6F AB DB 23 A1 22 06 A2 68 79 EC SHA1 E9 14 0A 50 84 36 62 CS B0 2F 1F A7 FB 1E 89 47 30 53 BC BS Filename pem Durchsuchen__ VPN Identifier Local Valid values are the certificates distinguished name same as no entry Remote Valid values are the certificates distingushed name same as no entry IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt Authentication Authentication Authentication method The following two possibilities are available X 509 Certificate default Pre Shared Secret PSK Depending on the chosen option the page has different setting possibilities Authentication method X 509 Certificate This method is supported by most modern IPsec implemen tations Each VPN participant possesses a secret private key plus a public key in the form of an X 509 certificate This contains further information on the owner and Certificate Authority CA The following aspects must be defined How the mGuard authenticates itself to the remote peer How the mGuard authenticates the remote peer How the mGuard authenticates itself to the remote peer Authentication method X 509 Certificate X Local X 509 Certificate VPN Endpunkt Kundendienst MA v Remote CA Certificate No CA
430. seconds The mGuard informs the DynDNS service of its new IP address whenever the IP address of its Internet connection is changed For additional reliability the device will also report its IP address at the interval set here This setting has no effect for some DynDNS providers like DynDNS org as too many updates can cause the account to be closed DynDNS Provider The providers in this list support the same protocol as the mGuard Select the name of the provider where you are registered e g DynDNS org TinyDynDNS DNS4BIZ DynDNS Server DynDNS Login DynDNS Password DynDNS Hostname Name of the server for the selected DynDNS provider Enter the user name and password assigned by the DynDNS provider here The name selected for this mGuard at the DynDNS service providing you use a DynDNS Service and have entered the corresponding data above The mGuard can then be accessed under this hostname 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 111 mGuard 7 4 In Windows XP La a 6 4 4 Network gt gt DHCP The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP can be used to automatically assign the appropriate network configuration to the computer connected directly to the mGuard Under Internal DHCP you can configure the DHCP settings for the internal interface LAN port and under External DHCP the DHCP settings for the external interface WAN port The menu item External DHCP is not included in the scope of functions
431. sed sockets with the dust caps supplied Some communication connection points also use RJ45 sockets which must not be connected to the RJ45 sockets of the mGuard LAN port e Connect the local computer or network to the LAN port of the mGuard using a UTP CAT5 Ethernet cable If your computer is already connected to a network then patch the mGuard between the existing network connection Please note that initial configuration can only be made over the LAN interface The mGuard industrial rs firewall rejects all IP traffic from the WAN to the LAN interface WAN port e Use a UTP cable CAT5 Connect to the external network e g WAN Internet via the WAN socket Connections to the remote device or network are established over this network Additional driver installation is not necessary For security reasons we recommend that you change the default Root and Administrator passwords during the first configuration 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 15 mGuard 7 4 Connection options on lower terminal block The mGuard industrial rs is available in three different versions These can be distinguished through the connection options on the lower terminal block DOOD ooo DOOO P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 Modem Fault Modem Fault Modem Fault State Error State Error State Error LAN WAN a i LAN WAN LAN WAN mGuard
432. sed the check failure The mGuard then attempts to connect to the configuration server again based on the new configuration then downloads the newly enforced configuration profile If this is unsuccessful another rollback is performed The selection criterion is enforced for further load cycles as often as is defined in the Number of times field If the value in the Number of times field is defined as 0 the selection criterion the offered configuration profile is ignored if it remains unchanged will never come into effect As a result the second of the following goals can then no longer be reached 6 54 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt Central Management gt gt Configuration Pull continued This mechanism has the following goals 1 After enforcing the new configuration the mGuard must still be configurable from a remote location 2 When cycles are close together e g Pull Schedule 15 minutes the mGuard must be prevented from testing a possibly defective configuration profile over and over at intervals that are too short This can lead to the blocking of external admin istrative access as the mGuard is too busy dealing with its own processes 3 External factors e g network outage must be largely ruled out as a reason for the mGuard s decision that a configuration is defective An application note is provided by Innominate This contains a description of how a rollback can b
433. self The mGuard can then check if the certificate shown by the remote peer is authentic using the CA certificates loaded in the mGuard In this case all CA certificates must be available in mGuard in order to build a chain with the certificate displayed by the remote peer Aside from the CA certificate whose signature can be seen in the displayed certificate of the remote peer to be checked the CA certificate of the superordinate CA up to the root certificate must be used see glossary under CA certificate Authentication using CA certificates allows an expansion in the number of possible remote peers without any increased management output as the installation of a remote certificate for each possible remote peer is not compulsory For certificate creation a private key and the corresponding public key are needed Pro grams are provided where any user can create these keys A certificate with the relevant public key can also be created resulting in a self signed certificate Further documenta tion on self creation can be downloaded from www innominate com This can be found in the download area as an application note under the title How to obtain X 509 certificates A related certificate signed by a CA must be requested from the CA In order for the private key to be imported to the mGuard with the related certificate these components must be packed into a PKCS 12 file file name extension p12 The mGuard can use two princ
434. set to Ignore the power supply does not influence the signal contact If set to Supervise the signal contact is opened if one of the two power supplies fails 6 6 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Signal Contact continued Manual settings Link supervision Supervision of the Ethernet interface link state Possible settings are Ignore Supervise internal only trusted Supervise external only untrusted Supervise both Contact If the Signal contact is set to Manual setting above this option sets the contact to Closed or Open Alarm 6 2 1 3 Time and Date Set the time and date correctly as certain time dependent activities otherwise cannot be started by the mGuard see Time dependent activities on page 6 8 Management System Settings Host Time and Date f Shell Access Time and Date Current system time UTC Mon Nov 21 08 05 58 UTC 2011 Current system time local Mon Nov 21 09 05 58 CET 2011 System time state synchronized by NTP Hardware clock state synchronized Local system time 2011 11 21 09 05 58 yYYY MM DD HH MM SS Timezone in POSIX 1 notation CET 1CEST M3 5 0 M10 5 Eg CET 1 for the EU or CET 1CEST M3 5 0 M10 5 0 3 with automatic daylight saving time switching Time stamp in filesystem No 2h granularity v NTP Server Enable NTP time Vee F synchronization NTP State synchronized DX NTP Se
435. something has been overlooked In this case you must backup the configuration on the controller After replacing an mGuard in this slot the configuration stored on the controller will be automatically transferred to the new mGuard in this slot Deletes the configuration stored on the controller for the device in this slot Uploads and saves the configuration profile for this slot onto the controller Downloads the configuration profile stored on the controller for this slot onto the configuration PC 6 60 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 4 Network menu 6 4 1 Network gt gt Interfaces The mGuard has the following interfaces with external access Ethernet Serial ports Built in Serial Internal Modem console LAN via USB External WAN mGuard smart Yes No No No mGuard smart Yes No No Yes mGuard centerport Yes Yes No No mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard m Guard delta mGuard rs4000 rs2000 Optional Yes Yes Yes No mGuard industrial rs 1 See Serial console via USB on page 6 97 The LAN port is connected to a single computer or to the local network internal The WAN port is for the connection to the external network For devices with a serial port the connection to the external network can also or additionally be made over the serial port via a modem Alternatively the serial port can be used as follows For PPP dia
436. ss The remote peer making the remote access may have to enter the port number defined here when entering the address Enter the required login data in these fields Read Only Community Enter the required login data in these fields Allowed Networks Lists the firewall rules that have been set These apply for incoming data packets of an SNMP access The rules specified here only become effective if Enable SNMPv3 access or Enable SNMPv1 v2 access is set to Yes If multiple firewall rules are set they will be searched in the order in which they are listed top down until a suitable rule is found This rule is then applied If there are other suitable rules further down the list these are ignored 6 44 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt SNMP gt gt Query continued From IP Interface Action Comment Log 1 Enter the address of the system or network where remote access is permitted or forbidden in this field You have the following options An IP address To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 0 0 0 0 0 means all addresses External Internal External 2 VPN Dial in Specifies which interface the rules apply to If no rules are set or if no rule takes effect the following default settings apply SNMP monitoring is permitted over Internal VPN and Dial in Access over External and External 2
437. ssigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 12 168 1 2 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway 192 168 1 1 Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Altemate DNS server Fig 5 6 Internet protocol properties TCP IP 5 10 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Preparing the Configuration Default gateway After you have configured the network interface you can access the mGuard configuration interface using a web browser under the URL https 1 1 1 1 If this is not possible then the default gateway of the computer may not be available In this case you must simulate the process as follows Initializing the default gateway Determine the currently valid default gateway address If you are using Windows XP follow the steps described above under Configuring the network interface on page 5 10 to open the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog If no IP address has been entered as the default gateway in this dialog e g because the Obtain an IP address automatically function has been activated then enter the IP address manually To do so first select Use the following IP address then enter the following addresses example IP address 192 168 1 2 Do not under any ci
438. sult no tests have been made Tests must be evaluated by the user The circuit board temperature must not exceed 105 C Selection of Driver mode or Power over PCI mode There are two operating modes Driver mode or Power over PCl mode e Decide in which mode the mGuard pci should be operated before installation on your computer e The mGuard is switched to the desired mode via a jumper The mGuard pci can be used like a normal network card The network card then also provides the mGuard functions In this case the driver provided must be installed If the mGuard network card function is not needed or should not be used then the mGuard pci can be connected behind an existing network card of the same or another com puter It then essentially acts as a stand alone mGuard device In reality the mGuard pci is only plugged into the PCI slot of the computer in this mode in order to receive a power supply and have a housing This mGuard operating mode is known as Power over PCI mode No drivers are installed 4 10 1 Driver mode In this mode an mGuard pci interface driver needs to be installed afterwards on the computer available for Windows XP 2000 and Linux No additional network cards are required for the computer in Driver mode 4 28 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Startup Stealth mode in Driver mode factory default The LAN Ethernet socket is deactivated in Driver mode The mGuard LAN interface is oc
439. system time see Time and Date on page 6 7 Up until this point all certificates are considered as invalid 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 129 mGuard 7 4 Authentication gt gt Certificates gt gt Certificate settings continued Enable CRL checking Yes When CRL checking is enabled the mGuard consults the CRL Certificate Revocation List and checks whether the mGuard certificates are blocked or not CRLs are issued by the CA and contain the serial numbers of blocked certificates e g certificates which have been registered as stolen Enter the origin of the CRL under the CRL tab page see CRL on page 6 137 When CRL checking is enabled a CRL must be la configured for each ssuer of certificates in the mGuard Absent CRLs lead to certificates being declared invalid CRLs are verified by the mGuard using a relevant CA certificate Therefore all CA certificates belonging to a CRL i e all sub CA certificates and the root certificate must be installed on the mGuard If the validity of a CRL cannot be proven then it is ignored by the mGuard la If the use of CRLs is activated together with the consideration of validity periods lists are ignored if their validity period has expired or has not yet started CRL download interval If Enable CRL checking is set to Yes see above then select here the time period after which the CRLs should be downloaded and applied Ente
440. t gt gt System Settings on page 6 4 Shell Access on page 6 11 Authentication for HTTPS The remote peer shows Certificate specific to Certificate specific to the following individual signed by CA individual self signed The mGuard authenti cates the remote peer using All CA certificates that build Remote certificate the chain to the root CA certificate together with the certificates displayed by the remote peer or ADDITIONALLY Remote certificates if used as a filter The remote peer can additionally provide sub CA certificates In this case the mGuard can form the set union for building the chain from the CA certificates provided and the self configured CA certificates The corresponding root CA certificate of the mGuard must always be available See Management gt gt Web Settings on page 6 21 Access on page 6 22 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 127 mGuard 7 4 Authentication for VPN The remote peer shows the following Machine certificate signed by CA Machine certificate self signed The mGuard authenti cates the remote peer using 2 2 Remote certificate All CA certificates that build the chain to the root CA certificate together with the certificates displayed by the remote peer Remote certificate ATTENTION Installation of the certificate in the mGuard under Authentication gt gt Certificates is not s
441. t mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta see Secondary External Interface on page 6 71 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 105 mGuard 7 4 6 4 2 2 IP and port forwarding Masquerading IP and Port Forwarding IP and Port Forwarding Log ID Su porttorwarding IN 240 33 1D 3649 14 035S 000002060090 E eooc rome o romeo icomngon incomingonrort Rearecttoir Rearect io Port No v 1 TCP v 0 0 0 0 0 any extern http 127 0 0 1 http Network gt gt NAT gt gt IP and port forwarding Port forwarding Lists the rules set for port forwarding DNAT Destination NAT Port forwarding performs the following The headers of incoming data packets from the external network which are addressed to the mGuard s external IP address or one of its external IP addresses and to one of the ports on the mGuard are rewritten in order to forward them to a specific port on a specific computer In other words both the IP address and the port number in the header of the incoming data packets are changed This method is also known as Destination NAT Port forwarding cannot be used for connections initiated over the External 2 interface 1 External 2 is only for devices with serial ports The rules set here have priority over the settings made under Network Security gt gt Packet Filter gt gt Incoming Rules Protocol TCP UDP Enter the protocol which the rule should relate to
442. t one valid entry under Update Servers You should have received the necessary details from your licensing authority Enter the name of the package set e g update 6 1 x 7 2 0 e Click on the Install Package Set button Automatic Update This is a variation of the online update where the mGuard independently determines the required package set Install the latest patch Patch releases resolve errors in previous versions and release x y Z have a version number which only changes in the third digit position For example 4 0 1 is a patch release for version 4 0 0 Install the latest minor Minor and major releases supplement the mGuard with release x Y z for the new features or contain modifications to the behavior of the currently installed mGuard Their version number changes in the first and major version second digit position Install the next major For example 4 1 0 is a major or minor release for versions release X y Z 3 1 0 or 4 0 1 respectively 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 37 mGuard 7 4 Management gt gt Update continued Update Servers Define from which servers the mGuard may be updated here The list of servers is processed top down until an available server is found The sequence of the entries thus defines their priorities l All configured update servers must provide the same updates You have the following options Protocol The update can be made using either HTTP or HTTPS
443. te peer IP addresses via DynDNS NAT Traversal NAT T Dead Peer Detection DPD Recognition of IPsec connection breaks IPsec L2TP server Connection of IPsec L2TP clients IPsec firewall and 1 1 NAT Default route over VPN Forwarding of data between VPNs hub and spoke Depending on the license up to 250 VPN channels up to 1000 active VPN channels on mGuard centerport Hardware acceleration for encryption in VPN excluding mGuard centerport Remote Logging Router Firewall Redundancy the Firewall Redundancy function is not available in firmware version 7 0 Administration using SNMP v1 v3 and Innominate Device Manager IDM PKI support for HTTPS SSH Remote Access Can function as an NTP and DNS server via the LAN interface Support Please contact your local dealer if problems occur with the mGuard Additional information on the device plus release notes and software updates can be found on our website www innominate com 1 2 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Introduction mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs 1 1 Device versions The mGuard is available in the following device versions which all have largely identical functions All devices can be utilized regardless of the processor technology or operating system used by the connected computers The mGuard centerport is available in three different device versions which differ according
444. ted outside the VPN If Yes has been selected under Via VPN then the mGuard supports requests from a RA DIUS server through its VPN connection This always occurs automatically when the RADIUS server belongs to the remote network of a configured VPN tunnel and the mGuard has an internal IP address which belongs to the local network of the same VPN tunnel This makes the authentication query dependent on the availability of a VPN tun nel During configuration ensure that the failure of a single VPN tunnel does not prevent administrative access to the mGuard Port The port number used by the RADIUS server 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 123 mGuard 7 4 Authentication gt gt RADIUS Servers continued Certificate Self signed certificates Secret RADIUS server password This password must be the same as on the mGuard The mGuard uses this password to exchange messages with the RADIUS server and to encrypt the user password The RA DIUS server password is not transmitted in the network The password is important for security as the mGuard is vulnerable at this point as a result of weak passwords We recommend a password with at least 32 characters and a range of special characters The password must be changed ona regular basis Ifthe RADIUS secret is revealed then an attacker can read the user passwords entered in the RA DIUS authentication requests An attacker can also falsify RADIUS answers and gain
445. th Filtering is only made according to characteristics that are present in each data packet The sender and recipient IP address in the header Ethernet protocol IP protocol TOS DSCP value and or the VLAN ID if VLANs have been configured As the list of filter rules must be applied to each individual data packet it should be kept as short as possible Otherwise the time spent on filtering could be longer than the time saved by setting the filter itself Please note that not all filter criteria can be combined For example it does not make sense to enter an additional IP protocol in the same rule record as the ARP Ethernet protocol This also applies to the entry of a sender or recipient IP address under the hexadecimal IPX Ethernet protocol 6 10 1 1 Internal External All w 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 unlimited Internal Setting of Ingress Filters on the LAN interface 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 215 mGuard 7 4 QoS Ingress Filters Internal External Enabling Enable Ingress QoS No v Measurement Unit Packets w Filters gt x SD curanr080sc F 1 No v 1 ARP Al w 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Al 100 unlimited No sihi ipva All w 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0070 all a unlimited External Setting of Ingress Filters on the WAN interface QoS menu gt gt Ingress Filter gt gt Internal External Enabling Enable Ingress QoS No default Feature is disabled If filter rules are defined then they are ignor
446. th SELV circuits with voltage restrictions in accordance with EN 60950 1 The supply voltage is connected via a COMBICON connector which is located on the top of the device Supply voltage Supply voltage P1 P2 P1 24 V 0V 24V OV 24 V 0V 8 N yT N A a L HNA N aaa a ra meer elele sllelelele ife ele E fefee ETEN YT sir YY Y N ey a st Y Y Y eile lele e ij ejojojo ife elele z efelele Se ee iF FPS Fo PF iF FPF amp s 5 mGuard rs4000 mGuard rs2000 Fig 4 2 mGuard rs4000 mGuard rs2000 The mGuard rs4000 has a redundant supply voltage If you connect only one supply voltage you get an error message e Remove the COMBICON plugs for the power supply and the service contacts Do not connect the service contacts to an external voltage source Connect the supply voltage lines with the corresponding COMBICON plug P1 P2 of the mGuard Tighten the screw terminals to 0 22 Nm e Plug the COMBICON plugs into the corresponding COMBICON sockets on top of the mGuard see Figures 1 2 The P1 status display lights up green if the supply voltage is connected correctly On the mGuard rs4000 the P2 status display also lights up if the supply voltage is connected redundantly The mGuard boots the firmware The STAT status display flashes green The mGuard is ready for operation when the LEDs for the Ethernet sockets are
447. the data packets are rejected The sender is informed that the data packets have been rejected In Stealth mode Reject has the same effect as Drop Drop means that data packets may not pass through Data packets are discarded and the sender is not informed of their whereabouts Freely selectable comment for this rule For each rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default No This network drive is not mirrored Yes This network drive is mirrored and made available Several drives can be combined into one in this directory Name of the network drive to be imported created under CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt Importable Shares gt gt Edit External 2 and Dial in are only for devices with serial ports See Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 6 170 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Accessing the virtual network drive CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector You can integrate the virtual network drive provided by the mGuard for the CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector in Windows Explorer To do this open the Extras Map network drive menu in Windows Explorer and enter the path with UNC notation This path is then displayed under CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector gt gt Accessible as lt External IP mGuard gt lt Name of the exported share gt or lt
448. the mGuard has an installed clock mGuard industrial rs mGuard delta and mGuard smart but not mGuard smart After the initial time synchronization the mGuard regularly compares the system time with the time servers Fine adjustments to the time are usually only made in the range of seconds Displays the current NTP state Shows whether the NTP server running on the mGuard has synchronized with the configured NTP servers to a sufficient degree of accuracy If the system clock of the mGuard has never been synchro nized before activation of NTP time synchronization then synchronization can take up to 15 minutes However the NTP server still changes the mGuard system clock to the cur rent time after a few seconds as soon as it has successfully contacted one of the configured NTP servers The system time of the mGuard is then synchronized Fine adjustment of the time is usually only made in the second range Enter one or more time servers from which the mGuard should obtain the current time If you enter several time servers the mGuard will automatically connect with all of them to determine the current time 6 10 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Displayed when Enable X 509 certificates for SSH access is setto Yes 6 2 1 4 Shell Access f f atag 44D F x 4 Port for incoming SSH connections Delay between requests for a sign of life Host Time and Date 42 shell Access Shell Acc
449. the mGuard uses to identify itself to the remote peer using the VPN Identifier This must match the entries in the mGuard machine certificate Valid entries are Empty i e no entry standard The subject entry of the machine certificate earlier known as Distinguished Name is then used The subject in the machine certificate One of the Subject Alternative Names listed in the certificate When the certificate contains Subject Alternative Names these are entered under Valid values are These can be IP addresses hostnames with preset signs or e mail addresses Remote Defines what must be entered as a subject in the VPN remote peer machine certificate for the mGuard to accept this VPN remote peer as a communication partner It is then possible to limit or release access by VPN remote peers that would accept the mGuard in principle based on the certification check Limitation to certain subjects i e machines or to subjects that have certain attributes Release for all subjects see Subject certificate on page 9 5 Subject was previously known as Distinguished Name 6 198 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt Authentication continued Release for all subjects If the Remote field is left empty then any subject entries are allowed in the machine certificate displayed by the VPN remote peer It is then
450. the status of the VPN connection see IPsec VPN gt gt Global on page 6 172 under Options To establish a VPN connection press and hold the pushbutton for a few seconds until the signal output flashes Only release the pushbutton at this point The flashing signals that the mGuard has received the command for establishing a VPN connection and has started the connection process The signal output lights up continuously when the VPN connection has been established To disable the VPN connection press and hold the pushbutton for a few seconds until the signal output flashes or goes out Only release the pushbutton at this point The VPN connection is disabled when the signal output no longer lights up e To establish the VPN connection turn the switch to ON e To disable the VPN connection turn the switch to OFF 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 4 5 mGuard 7 4 INFO LED If the signal output is set to OFF then the defined VPN connection is disabled The VPN connection was not established or has failed due to an error If the INFO LED is set to ON then the VPN connection is established If the INFO LED flashes then the VPN connection is currently being established or disabled 4 3 4 Connecting to the power supply WARNING The mGuard rs4000 rs2000 is designed for operation with a direct voltage of 9 V DC to 36 V DC SELV max 1 5 A Therefore power supply and signal contact connectors may only be connected wi
451. the use of block lists CRL checking is activated under the Authentication gt gt Certificates Certificate settings menu then each certificate signed by a CA that a HTTPS client presents is checked for blocks Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access CA certificate The configuration is only necessary when the SSH client displays a certificate signed by a CA All CA certificates required by the mGuard to form the chain to the respective root CA certificate with the certificates displayed by the SSH client must be configured The selection list shows the CA certificates that were loaded in the mGuard under the Authentication gt gt Certificates menu 6 18 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt System Settings gt gt Shell Access continued X 509 Subject Allows a filter to be set in relation to the contents of the Sub ject field in the certificate displayed by the SSH client It is then possible to limit or release access by SSH clients which the mGuard would accept on the basis of certification checks Limitation to certain subjects i e individuals or to subjects that have certain attributes Release for all subjects see glossary under Subject certificate on page 9 5 f The X 509 subject field must not be left empty Release for all subjects individuals With an asterisk in the X 509 subject field you can define that all subject
452. this 1 External 2 and Dial in are only for devices with serial ports see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 121 mGuard 7 4 6 5 2 3 Status If the user firewall is activated its status is displayed here Authentication Firewall Users FirewattUsers Access Status Status No users are logged in 6 5 3 Authentication gt gt RADIUS Servers RADIUS Servers RADIUS Servers RADIUS timeout 3 seconds RADIUS retries 3 radius1 example com No wv 1812 secret radius2 example com Yes v 1812 secret A RADIUS server is a central authentication server used by devices and services that want to check users passwords These devices and services do not know the password Only one or multiple RADIUS servers know the password In addition the RADIUS server also provides the device or service that a user wants to access with further information about the user such as the group to which the user belongs In this way all user settings can be managed centrally In order to activate RADIUS authentication Yes must be set under Authentication gt gt Firewall Users Enable group authentication sub item and RADIUS selected as User authentication method Under Authentication gt gt RADIUS Server a list of RADIUS servers is created that is used by the mGuard This list is also used if the RADIUS authentication is activated for administrative access SSH HTTPS
453. tificate In this case all CA certificates must be installed in mGuard in order to build a chain with the certificate displayed by the remote peer Aside from the CA certificate whose signature can be seen in the displayed certifi cate of the VPN partner to be checked the CA certificate of the superordinate CA up to the root certificate must also be used If this trust chain is checked meticulously in order to accept the authenticity of a remote peer then the level of security increases In a client server environment a server is a program or computer which accepts and answers queries from client programs or computers 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 9 1 mGuard 7 4 Datagram DES 3DES DynDNS provider In data communication the computer which establishes a connection to a server or host is also called a client In other words the client is the calling computer and the server or host is the computer called nthe IP protocol data is sent in the form of data packets These are known as IP datagrams An IP datagram has the following structure IP Header TCP UDP ESP etc Header Data Payload The IP header contains The IP address of the sender source IP address The IP address of the recipient destination IP address The protocol number of the protocol on the superordinate protocol layer according to the OSI layer model The IP header checksum used to check the integrity of the rec
454. ting rail according to DIN EN 60715 Fig 4 17 EAGLE mGuard Mounting rail assembly Attach the upper snap on guide of the EAGLE mGuard to the mounting rail and press the mGuard down until it locks into position Connect the device to the local network or the local computer which is to be protected LAN Connect the socket for connection to the external network WAN for example to the Internet Connections to the remote device or network are established over this network The front faceplate of the EAGLE mGuard housing is grounded via the grounding connection Network connection ATTENTION If your computer is already attached to a network then patch the EAGLE mGuard between the existing network connection Please note that initial configuration can only be made over the LAN interface The EAGLE mGuard firewall rejects all IP traffic from the WAN to the LAN interface Additional driver installation is not necessary For security reasons we recommend that you change the default Root and Administrator passwords during the first configuration Both network interfaces of the EAGLE mGuard are configured for connection to a computer Please note the following when connecting to a hub When Automatic Negotiation is deactivated the Auto MDIX function is also deactivated This means that the EAGLE mGuard port must be either connected to the uplink port of the hub or be connected using a cros
455. tings Activate remote UDP logging Yes v Log Server IP address 10 1 66 2 Log Server port normally 514 514 Logging gt gt Remote Logging Settings Activate remote UDP Yes No logging If all log entries should be sent to an external log server specified below set this option to Yes Log Server IP address Enter the IP address of the log server where the log entries should be sent via UDP This entry must be an IP address not a hostname This function does not support hostnames as otherwise it might not be possible to make log entries if a DNS server failed Log Server port Enter the port of the log server where the log entries should normally 514 be sent via UDP Default 514 f If SysLog messages are to be transferred to a SysLog server via a VPN channel the IP address of the SysLog server must be located in the network that is entered as the remote network in the definition of the VPN connection The internal IP address in Stealth mode the Stealth Management IP Address or the Virtual IP must be located in the network that is entered as local in the definition of the VPN connection see Defining VPN connection VPN connection channels on page 6 182 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 241 mGuard 7 4 Logging gt gt Remote Logging continued Ifthe Enable 1 to 1 NAT of the local network to an internal network option is set to Yes see 1 to 1 NAT on page 6 194 the following applie
456. tion non condensing IP 20 0 C to 60 C operation 40 C to 80 C storage 131 x47x111 mm 340 g mGuard v5 0 or higher Innominate recommends firmware version 6 x or 7 x with the current patch releases For scope of functions see relevant firmware data sheet 99 Mbit s bi directional 99 Mbit s bi directional DES 3DES AES 128 192 256 70 Mbit s bi directional Web GUI HTTPS Command Line Interface SSH SNMP v1 2 3 central Device Management Software LEDs P1 P2 Status Fault LAN WAN V 24 signal contact 24 V 1 A log file remote Syslog EAGLE mGuard CE FCC UL 508 GL 10 8 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Technical Data 10 9 Hardware properties Platform Network interfaces Other interfaces Drives High availability Power supply Power consumption Air humidity range Protection class Temperature range Dimensions H x W x D Weight Firmware amp performance values Firmware compatibility Data throughput router firewall Hardware based encryption Encrypted VPN throughput AES 256 Management support Diagnostics Other Conformity mGuard delta Intel network processor with 533 MHz clock rate 4 x LAN port switch unmanaged 1 x WAN port Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10 100 Base TX RJ45 Full Duplex Auto MDIX Serial RS 232 D sub 9 pin connector Depends on the firmware used External power supply unit 5 V 3 A DC 110 V to 230 V AC Typically
457. to Point Protocol over Ethernet This protocol is based on PPP and Ethernet standards PPPoE defines how to connect users via Ethernet with the Internet via a jointly used broadband medium such as DSL wireless LAN or a cable modem 9 4 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Glossary PPTP Protocol communication protocol Proxy Router Service provider Spoofing anti spoofing Subject certificate PPTP is an acronym of Point to Point Tunneling Protocol This protocol was developed by companies such as Microsoft and U S Robotics in order to securely transfer data between VPN nodes gt VPN via a public network Devices that communicate with each other must follow the same rules To do this they must speak the same language Rules and standards of this kind are called protocols or communication protocols Some of the more frequently used protocols are IP TCP PPP HTTP and SMTP A proxy is an intermediary service A web proxy e g Squid is often used for a large network For example if 100 employees access a certain website at the same time over a web proxy then the proxy only loads the relevant web pages once from the server and then distributes them as needed amongst the employees Remote web traffic is reduced which saves money A router is a device that is connected to different IP networks and communicates between them To do this a router has an interface for each network connected to it A router must find t
458. to be filtered can have freely selectable values If a subject filter is set the number but not the se quence of the entered attributes must correspond to those of the certificates for which the filter is to be used Pay attention to capitalization is irrelevant a Several filters can be set and their sequence With HTTPS the browser of the accessing user does not specify with which user or administration authorization it logs in These access rights are allocated by setting filters here under Authorized for access This has the following result If there are several filters that let through a certain user then the first filter comes into effect The user receives the access rights as defined by this filter This could deviate from the access rights allocated to the user in the subsequent filters a If remote certificates are configured as filters in the X 509 Certificate table column then these filters have priority over filter settings here 6 30 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Management gt gt Web Settings gt gt Access continued Authorized for All users root admin netadmin audit ac essas Defines which user or administrator rights are granted to the remote user For a description of the root admin and user authorization levels see Authentication gt gt Administrative Users on page 6 117 The netadmin and audit authori
459. to the number of supported simultaneously active VPN tunnels mGuard centerport mGuard centerport 250 mGuard centerport 1000 The Innominate mGuard centerport is a 19 inch high performance firewall VPN gateway and is ideally positioned as a central network infrastructure for teleservice solutions The device is also suitable for use in industrial backbone networks with its Gigabit Ethernet interface and corresponding throughput as a router and Stateful Inspection Firewall As a gateway for Virtual Private Networks the device supports the VPN connection of any num ber of systems in VPN tunnel groups with up to 1000 tunnels active at one time All of these tunnels are combined under one public IP address Without distributing the load to multiple interfaces the device has an encrypted VPN data throughput of over 300 MBit sec for se cure teleservices such as remote support remote diagnosis remote maintenance and con dition monitoring of large numbers of systems and machines over the Internet The mGuard centerport is equipped with mGuard firmware version 7 0 0 or higher which has been fully ported onto its multicore x86 processor architecture It is also fully compatible with all other mGuard VPN devices and the Innominate Device Manager Fig 1 1 mGuard centerport The mGuard industrial rs is available in three different device versions With integrated modem With integrated ISDN terminal adapter Without the modem a
460. tomy occurs when a redundant pair is separated into two mGuards which operate independently from one another In this case each mGuard deals with its own tracking information as both mGuards can no longer communicate via layer 2 A network lobotomy can be triggered by a rare and unfortunate combination of network settings network failures and firewall redundancy settings Each mGuard is active during a network lobotomy The following occurs after the network lobotomy has been rectified If the mGuards have different priorities then the mGuard with the higher priority is enabled and the other switches to standby If both mGuards have the same priority then an identifier sent with the presence notifications CARP decides which mGuard is enabled Both mGuards manage their own firewall state during the network lobotomy The mGuard which is enabled keeps its state Connections on the other mGuard which were established during the lobotomy are dropped Fail over when establishing complex connections Complex connections are network protocols which are based on different IP connections One example of this is the FTP protocol In an FTP protocol the client establishes a control channel for a TCP connection The server is then expected to open another TCP connection over which the client can then transmit data The data channel on port 20 of the server is set up while the control channel on port 21 of the server is being established If the correspon
461. torage medium must have a vfat file system on the initial primary partition and the same files must be found in the same folders as defined for the CD Additionally the files can be contained in the Rescue Config folder as for a CD Result The mGuard loads all necessary files from the connected USB storage medium To do this connect the USB storage medium containing the firmware into the USB port whilst the boot menu is displayed before making your selection For security reasons the mGuard centerport does not boot from the USB storage medium 4 After the rescue procedure has been carried out a message is displayed on the monitor Follow any further instructions which appear on the monitor The mGuard is restored to its factory settings You can now configure it again see Setting up a local configuration connection on page 5 12 Burning mGuard firmware onto a CD The mGuard firmware can be burned onto a CD A ZIP file is available in the download area under www innominate com Burn the contents of this ZIP archive as a data CD The following files must be found in the following folders under the following path names on the CD Firmware install x86_64 p7s Firmware firmware img x86_64 p7s When using the install x86_64 p7s file ensure that it corresponds to the file version approved by Innominate for using the rescue procedure via CD If required the following files can also be contained in the Rescue Con
462. ts to establish a connection that are not covered by the rules defined above are logged Firewall rules for outgoing PPP connections from the LAN interface The parameters correspond to those of the Incoming Rules PPP These outgoing rules apply to data packets that are sent out over a data connection initiated by PPP dial in 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 95 mGuard 7 4 Primary External Interface Secondary External Interface For dialing in to the LAN or for configuration purposes 6 4 1 5 Modem Console Only for mGuard rs4000 rs2000 mGuard centerport mGuard industrial rs mGuard blade EAGLE mGuard mGuard delta mGuard smart not mGuard smart Some mGuard models have a serial port with external access while the mGuard industrial rs is also optionally equipped with a built in modem see Network gt gt Interfaces on page 6 61 Network Interfaces General Ethernet Dial out Dial in Modem Console Serial Console Baudrate 57600 v Hardware handshake Of v RTS CTS Please note On some platforms the serial port is not accessible The settings above become effective only for administrative shell login via a console connected to the serial port Such logins are impossible if dial in or diatout is configured via external modem External Modem Hardware handshake Of v RTS CTS Baudrate 57600 Handle modem transparently for dial in ony S Y Modem init string d
463. tting Accept all incoming connections Accept all incoming connections Drop all incoming connections Network Security Packet Filter Incoming Rules Outgoing Rules Outgoing General firewall setting Drop all outgoing connections v Accept all outgoing connections Drop all outgoing connections D These variables are also available with other devices However there are additional setting options for other devices see Incoming Rules on page 6 139 and Outgoing Rules on page 6 141 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 151 mGuard 7 4 6 6 2 Network Security gt gt DoS Protection 6 6 2 1 Flood Protection a This menu is not available on the mGuard rs2000 Network Security DoS Protection Flood Protection TCP Maximum number of new outgoing TCP connections 75 SYN per second Maximum number of new incoming TCP connections 25 SYN per second ICMP Maximum number of outgoing ping frames ICMP Echo 5 Request per second Maximum number of incoming ping frames ICMPEcho 3 Request per second Stealth Mode Maximum number of outgoing ARP requests or ARP replies 500 per second each Maximum number of incoming ARP requests or ARP replies 500 per second each Network Security gt gt DoS Protection gt gt Flood Protection TCP Maximum number of new incoming outgo ing TCP connections SYN per second ICMP Maximum number of inco
464. tus of IPsec connections The names of the VPN connections are listed on the left On the right you will find the current status of each connection Buttons Click on Update to update the displayed data Click on Restart to terminate the connection and restart it again Click on Edit to make changes to the configuration of the connection Connection ISAKAMP Status IPsec Status GATEWAY shows the IP addresses of the communicating VPN gateways TRAFFIC identifies the systems or networks which communicate via the VPN gateways Identifies the subject of an X 509 certificate ISAKMP Siate Internet security association and key management protocol is given as established if both VPN gateways involved have established a channel for key exchange In this case they have contacted each other and all settings made on the configuration page up to and including ISAKMP SA were correct IPsec State is given as established if IPsec encryption is activated during communica tion In this case the entries made under IPsec SA and Tunnel Settings were also correct In the event of problems we recommend that you examine the VPN logs of the remote peer where the connection was setup Detailed error messages are not returned to the initiating system for security reasons This means The authentication was successful but the other parameters are incorrect Do the con nection types Tunnel Transport match If Tunnel has bee
465. twork interface of the local computer or network accordingly 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 5 9 mGuard 7 4 5 2 3 Configuring the mGuard pci at startup Installing the PCI card Ifthe PCI card has not yet been installed in your computer please first follow the steps described under Hardware installation on page 4 32 Installing the driver e Ifyou have configured the mGuard to run in Driver mode ensure that the drivers are installed as described under Driver installation on page 4 33 Configuring the network interface If you operate the mGuard in Driver mode and the LAN interface i e network interface of the computer has not been configured yet or in Power over PCI mode and the network interface of the computer connected to mGuard LAN interface has not yet been configured then this network interface must be configured before you can configure the mGuard If you are using Windows XP e Click on Start Control Panel Network Connections e Right click on the icon of the LAN adapter so that the pop up menu appears Click on Properties e Select the General tab page in the Properties of local network LAN connections dialog e Select Internet Protocol TCP IP under This connection uses the following items e Then click on Properties so that the following window is displayed Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties k General You can get IP settings a
466. twork router DMZ VPN gateway WLAN over VPN Solving network conflicts 2 1 Stealth mode In Stealth mode the mGuard can be installed between an individual computer and the rest of the network The settings e g for firewall and VPN can be made using a web browser under the URL hittps 1 1 1 1 No configuration changes are required on the computer itself l li li lllh oo lil oo lil oo lil oo Fig 2 1 Stealth mode INNOMINATE 2 1 7961_en_04 mGuard 7 4 2 2 Network router The mGuard can provide an Internet connection for multiple computers as a network router whilst protecting the company network using the firewall One of the following network modes of the mGuard may be used here Router if Internet access is established via a DSL router or dedicated line for example PPPOE if Internet access is established for example via a DSL modem using the PPPoE protocol e g in Germany PPTP if Internet access is established for example via a DSL modem using the PPTP protocol e g in Austria Modem if Internet access is established via a serial connected modem compatible with Hayes or AT instruction sets The mGuard must be set as the default gateway on computers placed in the Intranet DSL Modem
467. ty Monitoring CIFS Integrity Status Checked CIFS Share Status Summary Last check was OK pc x7 scan Last check started 0 days and 13h 43m ago CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status List with buttons for each individual network drive Checked CIFS Share Click on Show to see the check results or carry out actions e g start or cancel check update integrity database when the checked drives have been intentionally changed Click on Edit to edit the check settings same as CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Checking gt gt Settings gt gt Edit on page 6 161 Status Summary Result and time of the last checks Click on Update to see a summary of the latest check results Update applies to all network drives CIFS Integrity Monitoring CIFS Integrity Status pc x7 scan Status Actions Status of pc x7 scan Summary Last check was OK Report The location of the report is 10 1 66 127 C cim pe x7 c log txt UNC notation of the imported share A 10 1 66 127 C Start of the last check Mon Nov 28 04 17 00 CET 2011 Duration of the last check 0 hour s 48 minute s and 12 second s CIFS Integrity Monitoring gt gt CIFS Integrity Status gt gt Display gt gt Status Status of network drive Summary Last check was OK No deviations found name according to G Last check found x deviation s The exact deviations are configuration found in the check rep
468. uard blade mGuard bladebase mGuard blade Power supply switches P1 amp P2 a Handling plate Screws mGuard blade 1 to 12 Control unit CTRL Power supply connections P1 amp P2 Power supply P1 P2 Fig 4 13 Installing the mGuard blade O ATTENTION It is very important to ensure sufficient air circulation for the bladepack When stacking several bladepacks fan trays must be installed to discharge the accumulated warm air Installing the mGuard bladebase Install the mGuard bladebase into the rack e g close to the patch panel Provide the two front power supplies and the control unit with the handling plates P1 P2 and Ctrl from left to right Connect both power supplies on the back of the mGuard bladebase with 100 V or 220 240 V Switch both power supplies on The LEDs on the front of the power supplies should now light up green Installing the mGuard blade The mGuard bladebase does not need to be switched off during installation or deinstallation of an mGuard blade Loosen the upper and lower screw of the faceplate or the mGuard blade to be replaced Remove the faceplace or pull out the old mGuard blade Insert the new mGuard blade and circuit board into the plastic guides and push until it is completely installed in the mGuard bladebase Secure the mGuard blade by tightening the screws lightly Replace the empty handling plate with the suitable number from the mGuard bl
469. uard blade controller Blade status change traps blade only Blade reconfiguration Successful integrity This menu item is not check of a CIFS share included in the scope of functions for the mGuard rs2000 CIFS integrity traps blade switch outage Activate traps Yes No enterprise oid mGuardTrapBladeCTRL generic trap enterpriseSpecific specific trap mGuardTrapBladeCtrlPowerStatus 2 additional mGuardTrapBladeRackID mGuardTrapBladeSlotNr mGuardTrapBladeCtrlPowerStatus Sent when the power supply status of the blade pack changes mGuardTrapBladeCTRL enterpriseSpecific mGuardTrapBladeCtrlRunStatus 3 mGuardTrapBladeRackID mGuardTrapBladeSlotNr mGuardTrapBladeCtrlRunStatus enterprise oid generic trap specific trap additional Sent when the blade run status changes Activate traps Yes No mGuardTrapBladeCtrlCfg enterpriseSpecific mGuardTrapBladeCtrlCfgBackup 1 mGuardTrapBladeRackID mGuardTrapBladeSlotNr mGuardTrapBladeCtrlCfgBackup backup restore enterprise oid generic trap specific trap additional Sent when configuration backup for mGuard blade controller is triggered mGuardTrapBladeCtrlCfg enterpriseSpecific mGuardTrapBladeCtrlCfgRestored 2 mGuardTrapBladeRackID mGuardTrapBladeSlotNr mGuardTrapBladeCtrlCfgRestored enterprise oid generic trap specific trap
470. uard is configured using the web browser running on the configuration system e g MS Internet Explorer from version 8 Mozilla Firefox from version 1 5 Google Chrome or Apple Safari ATTENTION The web browser used must support SSL encryption i e HTTPS According to the default settings the mGuard is accessible under the following addresses Table 5 1 Preset addresses Factory default Network Management IP 1 Management IP 2 mode mGuard industrial rs Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard smart Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard pci Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard blade Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard rs4000 rs2000 Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 EAGLE mGuard Stealth https 1 1 1 1 https 192 168 1 1 mGuard centerport Router https 192 168 1 1 mGuard blade controller Router https 192 168 1 1 mGuard delta Router https 192 168 1 1 mGuards delivered in Stealth network mode are preset to the multiple clients stealth configuration In this mode a management IP address and a default gateway must be configured in order to use VPN connections see page 6 70 Alternatively you can select a different stealth configuration not multiple clients or use another network mode Configuration of the mGuard at startup is described in the following chapters For device
471. ufficient In addition which mGuard certificate imported from the pool is used must be referenced in the relevant applications VPN SSH HTTPS The remote certificate for authentication of a VPN connection or VPN connection channels is installed in the Psec VPN gt gt Connections menu 6 128 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 5 4 1 Certificate settings Authentication Certificates Certificate settings Machine Certificates CA Certificates Remote Certificates CRL Certificate settings Check the validity period of No certificates and CRLs Enable CRL checking No v CRL download interval Authentication gt gt Certificates gt gt Certificate settings Certificate settings The settings made here relate to all certificates and certificate chains checked by the mGuard The following are excepted Self signed certificates from remote peers All remote certificates for VPN Check the validity period of certificates and CRLs No Wait for synchronization of the system time No The entered validity periods in certificates and CRLs are ignored by the mGuard Wait for synchronization of the system time The validity periods entered in certificates and CRLs are only considered by the mGuard when the current date and time are known Through the integrated clock for mGuard industrial rs m Guard delta and mGuard smart but not mGuard smart By synchronizing the
472. ulation can only be used if an mGuard from version 6 1 is used on both sides of the VPN tunnel TCP encapsulation should only be used if it is necessary because connections are slowed down by the significant increase in the data packet overhead and by the correspondingly longer processing times If the mGuard is configured to use a proxy for HTTP and HTTPS in the Network gt gt Proxy Settings menu then this proxy is also used for VPN connections that use TCP encapsulation TCP encapsulation supports the Basic Authentication and NTLM authentication proce dures to the proxy For the TCP encapsulation to work through a HTTP proxy the proxy must be named explicitly in the proxy settings Network gt gt Proxy Settings menu i e not a transparent proxy and this proxy must also understand and permit the HTTP method CONNECT 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 177 mGuard 7 4 As participants in the TCP encapsulation the mGuards for the machine controls initiate the VPN data traffic to the maintenance center and encapsulate the data packets sent to it Machine As soon as a connection is initiated the maintenance control 1 center also automatically encapsulates the data packets sent to the relevant VPN remote peer s initiate _ Machine pn cone control 2 Maintenance center A lt Machine control 3 mGuard of maintenan
473. uld be relevant to error diagnosis This file does not contain any private information such as the private machine certificates or passwords However any Pre Shared Keys of VPN connections are contained in snapshots To create a snapshot please proceed as follows e Click on Download Save the file under the name snapshot tar gz Provide the file for support purposes if required 6 248 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 14 CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing IP netmasks and CIDR are notations that combine several IP addresses into one address space In this case an address space with sequential addresses is treated as a network To define a range of IP addresses for the mGuard e g when configuring the firewall it may be necessary to use CIDR notation to specify the address space The following table shows the IP netmask on the left and the corresponding CIDR notation on the right IP netmask 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 0 255 254 0 255 252 0 255 248 0 255 240 0 255 224 0 255 192 0 255 128 0 oooooooco oooooooc o NNN ul ul Ul N eU oooooooo 248 240 224 192 128 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 ce Binary 11111111
474. ule is found This rule is then applied If there are other suitable rules further down the list these are ignored Protocol All means TCP UDP ICMP GRE and other IP protocols From Port To Port Only evaluated for TCP and UDP protocols any describes any selected port startport endport e g 110 120 gt range of ports You can specify individual ports by giving either their port number or the corresponding service name e g 110 for pops or pops for 110 To IP 0 0 0 0 0 means all IP addresses To enter an address use CIDR notation see CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing on page 6 249 Comment Freely selectable comment for this rule Log For each firewall rule you can specify whether the use of the rule should be logged set Log to Yes or should not be logged set Log to No factory default 6 156 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 7 CIFS Integrity Monitoring menu It may not be used on the mGuard blade Controller In Stealth network mode CIFS integrity checking is not possible without a management The CIFS Integrity Monitoring is not available for the mGuard rs2000 B IP address and the CIFS server for the antivirus scan is not supported There are two possible methods for checking network drives for viruses using CIFS Integrity Monitoring CIFS Integrity Checking CIFS Antivirus Scan Connector CIFS Integrity Checking In
475. use his notebook on site to connect to the local network for machine A B or C and communicate with the individual controls So that the technician does not have to know and enter the IP address for every single control in machine A B or C hostnames are assigned to the IP addresses of the controls in accordance with a standardized schema that the service technician uses The hostnames used for machines A B and C are identical i e the control for the packing machine in all three machines has the host name pack for example However every machine is assigned an individual domain name e g cell a example com The service technician can con nect his notebook to the local network at machine A B or C and use the same hostname in each of these networks to com municate with the corresponding machine controls Notebook of service technician IP addresses and hostnames with domain ontrol A 10 1 30 1 24 fold cell a example com ontrol B 10 1 30 2 24 fill cell a example com 10 1 30 3 24 pack cell a example com The notebook can get the IP address to be used the name server and the domain from the mGuard via DHCP Switch 10 1 80 0 24 Machine B Snirol 10 1 31 1 24 fold cell b example com 10 1 31 2 24 fill cell b example com x 4 i y Switch Plant network Ethernet 10 1 31 3 24 pack cell b example com 10 1181 0 24 10 1 32 1 24 ontrol A Machine fold c
476. ust thus give each other a copy of their certificate A installs the copy of the certificate from B as its remote certificate B then installs the copy of the certificate from A as its remote certificate Never give the PKCS 12 file file name extension p12 as a copy to the remote peer in order to use X 509 authentication at a later time The PKCS 12 file contains a private key that must be kept secret and must not be given to a third party see Creation of certificates on page 6 126 To create a copy of a machine certificate imported in the mGuard proceed as follows e Click the Current Certificate File button on the machine certificate tab page next to the row title Download Certificate see Machine Certificates on page 6 131 The certificate shown by a remote peer can also be checked by the mGuard in a different way i e not by consulting the locally installed remote certificate on the mGuard To check the authentication of remote peers using X 509 the method of consulting CA certificates can be used instead or as a supplement CA certificates provide a way of checking whether the certificate shown by the remote peer is really signed by the CA entered within 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 125 mGuard 7 4 Creation of certificates Authentication procedure ACA certificate is available from the related CA file name extension cer pem or crt It is often available to download from the website of the CA it
477. uthorized to this This means that if set to Enabled for the overall VPN connection this has no effect If a pushbutton is connected to the CMD contact instead of a switch see below the connection can also be established and disabled using the CGI script command nph vpn cgi which has the same rights When Off is selected this function is disabled If a pushbutton or on off switch is connected to the mGuard service contacts then using it has no effect If a VPN connection is controlled via a VPN switch then VPN redundancy cannot be activated 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 175 mGuard 7 4 IPsec VPN gt gt Global gt gt Options continued Only for Switch type connected Push button or on off switch mewer E E w tothe contact The mGuard rs4000 rs2000 and the mGuard industrial rs a cred ara have connections where an external pushbutton switch and a signal LED can be connected Select the switch type that is connected to the corresponding service contacts of the mGuard industrial rs See also Installing the mGuard rs4000 rs2000 on page 4 4 under Service Contacts Installing the mGuard industrial rs on page 4 13 under Service Contacts Operation of the different switch types is also described there a If a VPN connection is established by operating the pushbutton or switch the connection remains in place until it is released by operating the pushbutton switch again
478. v update innominate com No v ATTENTION Do not disconnect the power supply to the mGuard during the update procedure The device could be damaged and may have to be reactivated by the manufacturer 6 36 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration Depending on the size of the update this may take several minutes A message is displayed if a reboot is necessary after the update is completed From mGuard version 5 0 0 onwards a license must be purchased for the device before the installation of a major release update e g from version 5 x y to 6 x y or from version 6 x y to 7 x y fee e e The license must be installed on the device before a firmware update is made see Management gt gt Licensing on page 6 32 Install on page 6 32 Minor release upgrades i e same main version e g within version 7 x y can be installed without a license until further notice Management gt gt Update Local Update Filename To install the packages proceed as follows e Click on the Browse button Select the file and open it so that the file name or path is displayed in the Filename field The file name should have the following format update a b c d e f default lt Platform gt tar gz Example update 7 0 0 7 0 1 default ixp4xx_be tar gz e Click on the Install Packages button Online Update To perform an online update please proceed as follows e Ensure that there is at leas
479. verlap ping page is displayed where connection parameters can be defined for the relevant transport path or tunnel Yes No You specify whether the connection channel should be active Yes or not No Freely selectable comments Can be left empty 6 186 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration IPsec VPN gt gt Connections gt gt Edit gt gt General continued Type The following can be selected Tunnel Network lt gt Network Transport Host lt gt Host Tunnel Network lt gt Network This connection type is suitable in all cases and is also the most secure In this mode the IP datagrams are completely encrypted with a new header and sent to the remote peer VPN gateway the tunnel end The transferred datagrams are then decrypted and the original datagrams are restored These are then forwarded to the destination system Transport Host lt Host In this type of connection the device only encrypts the data of the IP packets The IP header information remains unencrypted When a change to Transport is made the following fields apart from the protocol are hidden as these parameters are omitted Local remote for Define the network areas for both tunnel ends under Local connection type Tunnel and Remote Network lt gt Network m e e i oe _ a IPsec Tunnel 5 A es a D ewe g mgm Local Network VPN gateway Network Internet remote re
480. when loading from the external storage medium 6 42 INNOMINATE 7961_en_04 Configuration 6 2 6 Management gt gt SNMP 6 2 6 1 Query 2 Query Trap lt LoP Settings Enable SNMPv3 access Yes v Enable SNMPv1 v2 access Yes v Port for incoming SNMP connections 161 remote access only Run SNMP Agent under the permissions of the folowing admin v user SNMPv1 v2 Community Read Write Community private Read Only Community public Allowed Networks Log ID w enmp acoess A 26287393 2440 1402 9070 00000206000 gt x e E comment tog The SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is mainly used in more complex networks to monitor the status and operation of devices SNMP is available in several releases SNMPv1 SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 The older versions SNMPv1 SNMPv2 do not use encryption and are not considered to be secure We therefore do not recommend using SNMPv1 SNMPv2 SNMPVS is considerably better from a security perspective but not all management consoles support it If SNMPv3 or SNMPv1 v2 is enabled this is indicated by a green signal field on the tab at the top of the page Otherwise i e if neither v3 nor v1 v2 is enabled the signal field is red Processing an SNMP query can take longer than one second However the default timeout value of many SNMP management applications is set to one second Ifyou experience timeout problems set the timeout of your mana
481. which avoid the additional administration of symmetrical keys Used to check the reliability of a certificate and the CA Certificate Authority that issued it gt X 509 Certificate on page 9 8 A CA certificate can be consulted in order to check that a certificate signature has this CA This check only makes sense if there is little doubt that the CA certificate originates from an authentic source i e is also authentic If doubt occurs then the CA certificate itself can be checked If as is usually the case this applies to a sub CA certificate i e a CA certificate issued by a sub certificate authority then the CA certificate of the superordinate CA can be used to check the CA certificate of the sub ordinate instance If a superordinate CA certificate also has a superordinate CA certificate then its CA certificate can be used to check the CA certificate of the subordinate instance This chain of trust continues down to the root instance root CA The CA file of the root CA is necessarily self signed This instance is the highest available and is ultimately the basis of trust No one else can certify that this instance is actually the instance in question A root CA is therefore a state or state controlled organization The mGuard can use its imported CA certificate to check the validity of displayed certifi cates from remote peers For example with VPN connections the authentication of remote peers can only be made using the CA cer
482. wo mGuards communicate with each other then the dis patch of small UDP packages should be agreed upon first This prevents packages from being fragmented during trans portation which may lead to incorrect transfer from certain routers If you want to use this option set it to Yes If Yes is selected the setting only comes into ef fect if the remote peer is an mGuard with installed firmware above version 5 1 0 In all other cases the setting has no effect also no negative effects IPsec MTU default is The methods for avoiding oversized IKE data packages 16260 incorrect transfer can also be applied for IPsec data packages In order to remain below the upper limit set by DSL 1500 bytes we recommend setting a value of 1414 bytes This also allows enough space for additional headers If you want to use this option enter a value lower than the default setting 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 179 mGuard 7 4 6 8 1 2 DynDNS Monitoring IPsec VPN Global Options DynDNS Monitoring DynDNS Monitoring Watch hostnames of remote VPN Gateways V Refresh Interval sec 300 For an explanation of DynDNS see DynDNS on page 6 111 IPsec VPN gt gt Global gt gt Options DynDNS Monitoring Watch hostnames of Yes No remote VPN Gateways If the mGuard has been given the address of the remote VPN gateway as a hostname see Defining VPN connection VPN connection channels
483. ws XP e After installing the hardware switch on the computer e Logon as the administrator and wait until the following window appears 1 Found New Hardware Wizard Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options D This wizard helps you install software for Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and Ethernet Controller removable media The best driver found will be installed Search removable media floppy CD ROM it your hardware came with an installation CD or Include this location in the search So floppy disk insert it now eutsch Drivers J00_XP F What do you want the wizard to do O Don t search will choose the driver to install O Install the software automatically Recommended Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee thatthe A driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue lt Back Next gt Cancel lt Back Next gt Cancel Hardware Installation Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for The software you are installing for this hardware Innominate mGuardPCl has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility wit
484. xt Transfer Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol POP3 Post Office Protocol Version 3 and DNS Domain Name Service ICMP is based on IP and contains control messages SMTP is an e mail protocol based on TCP IKE is an IPsec protocol based on UDP ESP is an IPsec protocol based on IP On a Windows PC the WINSOCK DLL or WSOCK32 DLL handles the development of both protocols gt Datagram on page 9 2 Aside from other protocols an SMNP Simple Network Management Protocol can also be used especially in large networks This UDP based protocol is used for the central administration of network devices For example the configuration of a device can be requested using the GET order and changed using the SET order To do this the requested network device must be SNMP compatible An SNMP compatible device can also send SNMP messages e g when unexpected events occur Messages of this kind are known as SNMP traps A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network divides a physical network into several independent logical networks Devices of different VLANs can only access devices within their own VLAN Assignment to a VLAN is no longer defined by the network topology alone but also by the configured VLAN ID VLAN settings can also be used as optional settings for each IP A VLAN is identified by its VLAN ID 1 4094 All devices with the same VLAN ID belong to the same VLAN and can therefore communicate with each
485. y ___ TOS Minimize Delay w Unchanged w Urgent v p 2 a v 000 00 any E 0 0 0 0 0 any __ TOS Maximize Reliability Unchanged v Important v p3 a v 00 0 00 any 0 0 0 0 0 any TOS Minimize Cost w Unchanged v Low Priority Y All the tab pages listed above for Egress Rules for the Internal External External 2 Dial in interfaces and for VPN connections made over these interfaces provide the same setting possibilities In all cases the settings relate to the data that is sent externally to the network from the respective mGuard interface 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 223 mGuard 7 4 QoS menu gt gt Egress Rules gt gt Internal External External 2 Dial in QoS menu gt gt Egress Rules VPN gt gt VPN via Internal VPN via External VPN via External 2 VPN via Dial in Default Default Queue Rules Protocol From IP From Port To IP To Port Name of the Egress Queue user defined The names of queues are displayed as listed or defined under Egress Queues on the Internal External VPN via External tab pages The following names are defined as standard Default Urgent Important Low Priority Traffic that is not allocated to an Egress Queue under Rules remains in the Default Queue You can specify which Egress Queue is used as the Default Queue in this selection list The allocation of specific data traffic to an Egress Queue is based on a list of criteria If the criteria in a row apply to a data p
486. zation levels relate to access rights with the Innominate Device Manager X 509 Certificate Configuration is required in the following cases Remote users each show a self signed certificate Remote users each show a certificate signed by a CA Filtering should take place Access is only granted to a user whose certificate copy is installed in the mGuard as the remote certificate and is provided to the mGuard in this table as the X 509 Certificate If used this filter has priority over the Subject filter in the table above The entry in this field defines which remote certificate the mGuard should use in order to authenticate the remote peer browser of the remote user For this select one of the remote certificates from the selection list The selection list shows the remote certificates that were loaded in the mGuard under the Authentication gt gt Certificates menu Authorized for root admin netadmin audit user accessas Defines which user or administrator rights are granted to the remote user For a description of the root admin and user authorization levels see Authentication gt gt Administrative Users on page 6 117 The netadmin and audit authorization levels relate to access rights with the Innominate Device Manager 7961_en_04 INNOMINATE 6 31 mGuard 7 4 6 2 3 Management gt gt Licensing 6 2 3 1 Overview Overview stan Termsorticense mGuard Flash U3DDD33F

mGuard User Manual 7.4 - Innominate Security Technologies AG

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents